Method and bit stream decoding unit using majority voting

ABSTRACT

A method and a bit stream decoding unit for bit stream decoding has a bit stream comprising a number of consecutive samples. In order to provide for rapid and, in particular, reliable decoding of the bit stream, a detection window comprising a number of samples is defined and the detection window is positioned at certain positions on the bit stream in order to comprise certain samples with respective sample values. A majority voting is applied to the sample values in the detection window and, in dependence on the result of the majority voting, the bit stream is decoded and respective bit values are generated.

This application is a continuation of PCT/EP03/03993 filed Apr. 16, 2003 and claims Paris Convention priority of EP 02 008 171.7 and DE 102 16 984.5 both filed on Apr. 16, 2002 the entire disclosure of which are all hereby incorporated by reference.

BACKGROUND OF THE INVENTION

The present invention refers to a method for bit stream decoding. The bit stream comprises a number of consecutive samples.

Furthermore, the invention refers to a computer program, which is able to run on a computer, in particular on a microprocessor.

Further, the invention refers to a bit stream decoding unit for decoding a bit stream. The bit stream comprises a number of consecutive samples.

Finally, the present invention refers to one of a number of nodes of a communication system. The nodes are connected to a communication media for transmitting data among the nodes. The data is transmitted across the communication media in the form of a bit stream, whereas the bit stream comprises a number of consecutive samples.

Various types of communication systems are known in the art. Generally, they comprise a communication media, which for example is a data bus. Various nodes are connected to the communication media. Each node comprises a host controller, a communication controller, a bus driver and optionally a bus guardian. Data can be transmitted across the communication system according to various protocols. An example of such a protocol is TTCAN (Time Triggered Controller Area Network) for time triggered communication systems.

Data transmission can be effected in communication cycles, which comprise various time slots assigned to the nodes of the communication system. Each node can send data across the communication media within the timeslot assigned to the node. Which timeslots are assigned to which nodes is part of a communication media access scheme. If a node wants to transmit data, the data is brought into a format specified in the protocol used. Formatting the data is effected by the communication controller of the node. The formatted data is called bit stream. The bit stream is forwarded from the communication controller to the bus driver, which translates the formatted data into electrical signals which then are applied to the communication media within the timeslots assigned to the node.

A node receiving information receives the electrical signals from the communication media. The signals are transformed into the respective bit stream in the bus driver of the node. From there the bit stream is forwarded to the communication controller, where the bit stream has to be decoded.

Decoding of the bit stream is conducted in the physical layer of the communication system. The decoding comprises in particular extracting logical frames and symbol information, and passing this information to a protocol engine of the node. In particular the following steps have to be performed during decoding of the bit stream:

-   -   Detecting bit edges between two bit cells within the bit stream         applied to the bit stream decoding unit at an input from the         communication media, and     -   Determining the actual value of a bit cell within the bit         stream.

Depending on the detected edges between two bit cells, in particular depending on the detected initial edge of the first bit cell within the bit stream, the decoding within the communication controller is started and data reception is activated. The communication controller itself runs on a time triggered basis, however the processing of the bits runs event triggered. Therefore, it is very important to reliably determine the initial edge of the bit cell within the bit stream. Otherwise the communication controller is started to no purpose.

It is an object of the present invention to provide a possibility of fast and in particular reliable decoding of a bit stream.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION

To solve this object according to the present invention a method of the above mentioned kind is suggested, characterized in that

-   -   a detection window comprising a number of samples is defined;     -   the detection window is positioned at certain positions on the         bit stream in order to comprise certain samples with respective         sample values;     -   a majority voting is applied to the sample values comprised by         the detection window; and     -   according to the result of the majority voting the bit stream is         decoded and respective bit values are generated.

Typically, in a FlexRay communication system, a bit comprises 8 or 10 samples, respectively, a bit cell comprises 8 or 10 sample values.

The method begins with detecting a valid edge. This is done in the Bit Clock Alignment function (BCA). The BCA function is started as soon as an idle state of a channel, across which the bit stream is transmitted, is detected. The detection of channel idle is detected at an input (RxDn) of the Bit Stream Decoding (BSD) unit. As soon as a valid edge is detected, the detection window is positioned on the bit stream in order to detect further bit-edges and to determine the actual value of a bit cell within the bit stream.

Of course, the detection window can comprise any number of samples, in particular an even number of samples. However, according to a preferred embodiment of the invention it is suggested that the detection window comprises an odd number of samples. This allows an unambiguous majority voting.

According to another preferred embodiment of the present invention it is suggested that the detection window is positioned at an expected edge between two bit cells of the bit stream in order to comprise at least one samples of a first bit cell and at least one sample of a subsequent bit cell with the respective sample values and that the method is used for bit edge detection. An edge detection window determines the time window in which the next edge for bit clock alignment is expected. This window is set during frame reception around the expected logical ‘1’ to ‘0’ transition between two consecutive bits of a BSS (Byte Start Sequence) signal. For example, the detection window for bit edge detection comprises 3 samples.

According to yet another preferred embodiment of the present invention it is suggested that the detection window is centered on an expected center of a bit cell of the bit stream in order to comprise at samples only of said bit cell and that the method is used for detecting a bit value of said bit cell. According to this embodiment the actual bit value of a bit cell is not determined from a single sample value. Rather, a number of sample values are acquired and the actual bit value is determined by means of the majority voting over the acquired samples. For example, the detection window for detecting a bit value (sample voting) comprises 6 samples.

Preferably, the method according to the present invention is used for filtering out glitches or spikes in the bit stream. The majority voting over the acquired samples of a bit cell has the effect that glitches or spikes within the bit stream are filtered out.

For positioning the detection window on a bit cell within the bit stream, appropriate parameters can be predefined according to which the detection window is positioned. It is suggested that the detection window is positioned on the expected center of a bit cell according to a predetermined offset-parameter and to a predetermined parameter specifying the number of samples in the detection window. The offset-parameter specifies the distance from the beginning of the bit cell to the beginning of the detection window. Preferably the parameters have a time entity, in particular numbers of samples.

Furthermore, the above-mentioned object is achieved by a computer program of the above-mentioned kind, characterized in that, the computer program is programmed in order to execute a method according to the present invention.

According to a preferred embodiment it is suggested that the computer program is stored on a read-only-memory (ROM), on a random-access-memory (RAM) or on a flash-memory.

Moreover, the above-mentioned object is achieved by a bit stream decoding unit of the above-mentioned kind, characterized in that it comprises:

-   -   means for positioning a predefined detection window at certain         positions on the bit stream, the detection window being         predefined in order to comprise a number of samples, the         detection window being positioned in such a way as to comprise         certain samples with respective sample values;     -   means for applying a majority voting to the sample values         comprised by the detection window; and     -   means for decoding the bit stream according to the result of the         majority voting and for generating respective bit values.

According to a preferred embodiment of the invention it is suggested that the bit stream decoding unit comprises means for executing the method according to the present invention.

Finally, the above-mentioned object is achieved by a node of a communication system of the above-mentioned kind, characterized in that the node comprises a bit stream decoding unit according to the present invention for decoding the bit stream received from the communication media.

These and other features, aspects and advantages of the present invention will become better understood with reference to the following detailed description, appended claims, and accompanying drawings, wherein:

BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWING

FIG. 1 illustrates a communication system according to the present invention with a dual channel bus configuration;

FIG. 2 illustrates a communication system according to the present invention with a dual channel single star configuration;

FIG. 3 illustrates a communication system according to the present invention with a single channel cascaded star configuration;

FIG. 4 illustrates a communication system according to the present invention with a dual channel cascaded stars configuration;

FIG. 5 illustrates a communication system according to the present invention with a single channel hybrid configuration;

FIG. 6 illustrates a communication system according to the present invention with a dual channel hybrid configuration;

FIG. 7 illustrates timing hierarchy levels within a communication cycle for data transmission within the communication system;

FIG. 8 illustrates a time base triggered communication cycle for data transmission within the communication system;

FIG. 9 illustrates possible transmission patterns for a single node within a static segment of the communication cycle;

FIG. 10 illustrates detailed timing of a static slot within the static segment of a communication cycle;

FIG. 11 illustrates an overview of a dynamic segment of a communication cycle;

FIG. 12 illustrates a detailed timing within a minislot of a communication cycle;

FIG. 13 illustrates a detailed timing within a dynamic segment of a communication cycle;

FIG. 14 illustrates a detailed timing at the boundary between a static segment and a dynamic segment of a communication cycle;

FIG. 15 illustrates a detailed timing within a symbol window of a communication cycle;

FIG. 16 illustrates a sender/receiver interface of a communication controller of a node of the communication system;

FIG. 17 illustrates a byte coding;

FIG. 18 illustrates a frame coding in a static segment of a communication cycle;

FIG. 19 illustrates a frame coding in a dynamic segment of a communication cycle;

FIG. 20 illustrates a bit stream of a status normal symbol (SNS);

FIG. 21 illustrates a bit stream of a status alarm symbol (SAS);

FIG. 22 illustrates a bit stream of a collision avoidance symbol (CAS);

FIG. 23 illustrates a bit stream of a sequence of two wake-up symbols (WUS);

FIG. 24 illustrates a block diagram of a bit stream decoding unit of a node of the communication system;

FIG. 25 illustrates a mechanism for determining an initial edge detection window when a frame is received;

FIG. 26 illustrates a mechanism for detecting a falling edge in the middle of a first byte start sequence (BSS);

FIG. 27 illustrates a mechanism for determining an edge detection window;

FIG. 28 illustrates a bit clock alignment according to a first example;

FIG. 29 illustrates a bit clock alignment according to a second example;

FIG. 30 illustrates a bit clock alignment according to a third example;

FIG. 31 illustrates an example of a bit sampling for bits comprising 10 samples;

FIG. 32 illustrates a mechanism for a resynchronization of bit sampling;

FIG. 33 illustrates an example for a bit value voting mechanism;

FIG. 34 illustrates an overview of a FlexRay frame format;

FIG. 35 illustrates an overview of a byteflight frame format;

FIG. 36 illustrates a frame reception state diagram;

FIG. 37 illustrates a frame acceptance timing in a static segment of a communication cycle;

FIG. 38 illustrates a frame acceptance timing in a dynamic segment of a communication cycle;

FIG. 39 illustrates a diagram with local timing of three nodes and their relation to each other;

FIG. 40 illustrates a relative execution timing of a clock synchronization mechanism;

FIG. 41 illustrates a node internal execution of clock synchronization procedures;

FIG. 42 illustrates a time difference measurement (expected vs. observed arrival times);

FIG. 43 illustrates an algorithm for clock correction value calculation;

FIG. 44 illustrates a timing of measurement and correction;

FIG. 45 illustrates an assessment of a calculated rate correction value;

FIG. 46 illustrates an assessment of a calculated offset correction value;

FIG. 47 illustrates a global structure of a wakeup procedure;

FIG. 48 illustrates a structure of a wakeup channel monitoring procedure;

FIG. 49 illustrates a structure of a wakeup pattern transmission procedure;

FIG. 50 illustrates a global structure of a startup procedure;

FIG. 51 illustrates a structure of a channel monitoring and of a selection of a startup path;

FIG. 52 illustrates a structure of a selection of a cold start initiator;

FIG. 53 illustrates a structure of a check on a successfully established communication;

FIG. 54 illustrates a structure of an initial synchronization;

FIG. 55 illustrates a structure of a check on a successful integration;

FIG. 56 illustrates a global structure of a protocol state diagram;

FIG. 57 illustrates a structure of a communication controller wakeup state machine of a node of the communication system;

FIG. 58 illustrates a simple wakeup, whereas the larger amount of times within a millisecond-range are represented by dotted lines;

FIG. 59 illustrates a simple wakeup with forwarding, whereas the larger amount of times within a millisecond-range are represented by dotted lines;

FIG. 60 illustrates a listen-timeout of a first timer value vdStartup;

FIG. 61 illustrates listen-timeouts of a second timer value vdStartupNoise;

FIG. 62 illustrates a startup state diagram in a time triggered protocol mode;

FIG. 63 illustrates a startup state diagram in a byteflight protocol mode;

FIG. 64 illustrates a diagram of a collision-free startup;

FIG. 65 illustrates a diagram of a startup with a collision on a collision avoidance symbol;

FIG. 66 illustrates a diagram of a startup with a validation check in a CC_IntegrationVCW state failed, in which state a node of the communication system does not schedule any transmission;

FIG. 67 illustrates a state transition diagram of a communication controller of a node of the communication system;

FIG. 68 illustrates a state transition diagram of a bus driver of a node of the communication system (the optical bus guardian states are not shown);

FIG. 69 illustrates a state transition diagram of an optical bus driver of a node of the communication system;

FIG. 70 illustrates a state transition diagram of a bus guardian of a node of the communication system;

FIG. 71 illustrates a state transition diagram of an active star communication system topology;

FIG. 72 illustrates an error management state transition diagram for a time-triggered distributed protocol mode and a time-triggered master-controlled protocol mode;

FIG. 73 illustrates an error management state transition diagram for a byteflight protocol mode;

FIG. 74 illustrates a conceptual architecture of a controller host interface of a node of the communication system;

FIG. 75 illustrates a state diagram of a controller host interface;

FIG. 76 illustrates interactions of controller host interface services with controller host interface elements;

FIG. 77 illustrates a bus driver—communication controller interface of a node of the communication system;

FIG. 78 illustrates a bus driver—bus guardian interface;

FIG. 79 illustrates behavior of two signals RxD and RxEN for receiving a data frame transmitted in a static segment of the communication cycle according to a first example;

FIG. 80 illustrates behavior of two signals RxD and RxEN for receiving a data frame according to a second example;

FIG. 81 illustrates required timing of two signals TxD and TxEN for transmitting a data frame;

FIG. 82 illustrates a block diagram of a bus guardian—communication controller interface;

FIG. 83 illustrates a bus guardian schedule overview;

FIG. 84 illustrates a bus guardian—communication controller timing during a static segment of a communication cycle;

FIG. 85 illustrates a bus guardian—communication controller timing at the beginning of a dynamic segment of a communication cycle according to a first example;

FIG. 86 illustrates a bus guardian—communication controller timing at the beginning of a dynamic segment of a communication cycle according to a second example;

FIG. 87 illustrates a bus guardian—communication controller timing during a bus guardian symbol window and a bus guardian watchdog disable time;

FIG. 88 illustrates a structure of a bus guardian schedule monitor;

FIG. 89 illustrates a bus guardian schedule monitor state machine;

FIG. 90 illustrates interaction in a static segment of a communication cycle;

FIG. 91 illustrates interaction in a static segment of a communication cycle with a minimum length of inter-slot gaps;

FIG. 92 illustrates interaction in a dynamic segment of a communication cycle with a symbol window disabled;

FIG. 93 illustrates interaction in a symbol window and in a network idle time;

FIG. 94 illustrates FlexRay communication cycle operating modes;

FIG. 95 illustrates an event triggered communication handling in a host controller, a controller host interface and in a communication controller of a node of the communication system;

FIG. 96 illustrates a timing hierarchy in the view of a master node of the communication system;

FIG. 97 illustrates a communication cycle execution from the view of a master node and a slave node;

FIG. 98 illustrates a trigger condition in an event indication signal;

FIG. 99 illustrates a monitoring of a trigger signal for the communication controller by a master node of the communication system;

FIG. 100 illustrates a monitoring of an event indication signal by slave nodes of the communication system;

FIG. 101 illustrates a protocol state diagram for an event triggered mode;

FIG. 102 illustrates internal bus events, which are indicated externally;

FIG. 103 illustrates an architecture of a node of the communication system;

FIG. 104 illustrates an example for a possible network configuration;

FIG. 105 illustrates a definition of a communication cycle with a static segment;

FIG. 106 illustrates a definition of a communication cycle in a pure dynamic communication system;

FIG. 107 illustrates an example for a communication scheme of two nodes of a FlexRay communication system;

FIG. 108 illustrates a FlexRay frame format;

FIG. 109 illustrates a byteflight frame format;

FIG. 110 illustrates a transmission of a start sequence;

FIG. 111 illustrates a reception of a start sequence;

FIG. 112 illustrates a frame format for an electrical transmission on the physical layer;

FIG. 113 illustrates a topology of a FlexRay communication system using active stars;

FIG. 114 illustrates a topology of a FlexRay communication system using a passive bus;

FIG. 115 illustrates a topology of a FlexRay communication system using an active star combined with a passive bus;

FIG. 116 illustrates a block chart of an electrical active star; and

FIG. 117 illustrates an overview of interfaces between a host controller, a communication controller, a bus driver, a bus guardian, and a power supply of a node of the communication system.

DESCRIPTION OF THE PREFERRED EMBODIMENT

The present invention refers to a dependable automotive network. Throughout the following description the following structure is followed: at the beginning of each chapter (section) the requirements for this topic are defined, afterwards more detailed descriptions are provided. In the description UPPER CASE letters are used to denote constants. All constants used in the document are listed at the end of the description.

Objectives

The objectives pursued in the development of the dependable automotive network are the following:

-   -   Support of two communication paradigms, deterministic         (statically defined) communication and dynamic event driven         communication.     -   Configurable static and dynamic part (segment) within one         communication cycle. Fully static and fully dynamic         configuration has to be supported.     -   Flexible extendibility, even after deployment.     -   High data rate and bandwidth efficiency.     -   Scalable fault tolerance (i.e., single channel and dual channel         operation must be supported).     -   Reliable error detection (bus guardian mechanism in the time         domain, cyclic redundancy check (CRC) in the value domain).     -   Support of electrical and optical physical interfaces.     -   Enable very low system level failure in time ratings.     -   Allow use of crystal oscillators and low tolerance ceramic         resonators.     -   Support of active star and bus topologies.     -   Low overall system cost.     -   Enable re-use of carry over components without embedding         knowledge of future platform partitioning.

The objectives of the static segment are the following:

-   -   Deterministic communication behavior in the time domain.     -   Global time implemented by a fault tolerant clock         synchronization algorithm.     -   Immunity against accepting error-free sub-sequences of a message         as valid messages (i.e. short message rejection).

The objectives of the dynamic segment are the following:

-   -   Event driven dynamic communication possibility.     -   Flexible bandwidth allocation (for different nodes during         runtime).     -   No interference with the static segment.     -   Support for prioritized bus access.     -   Support of variable length messages with at least 200 data         bytes.

The global requirements are the following:

-   -   Support for fault tolerance, but operation without fault         tolerance must also be possible, i.e., a single bus (channel)         connection must be possible for non-fault-tolerant nodes.     -   The communication network has to support a system architecture,         where no single fault may lead to a functional degradation.     -   Protection against faults in accordance with a well-defined         fault hypotheses.     -   Protect against up to and including five random bit errors per         frame.     -   The communication protocol should be independent as far as         possible from the topology.     -   For highly dependable and fault-tolerant applications an         independent bus guardian to prevent the monopolization of the         communication medium by a communication controller is required         (so called “babbling idiot”).     -   Errors in hardware and configuration data have to be detected         during initialization and operation by error detection         mechanisms (EDMs). In case a critical error is detected the         controller and transceiver must not be allowed to enter normal         operation or immediately abort normal operation and report an         error to the host.     -   Support of serviceability of system- and component-level faults.     -   The bit encoding technique must not introduce data dependent         changes in the length of the resulting bit stream, e.g., bit         stuffing is not allowed.     -   Automotive qualification of the communication controller, bus         guardian, and the physical layer is required.     -   Configuration data must be readable/writeable by the host. It         must be possible to prohibit writing during runtime.     -   Support of comprehensive self test at system communication         startup.     -   Support of timely and highly reliable component re-integration         and system-level startup.     -   Support of master-less system startup and shutdown.     -   Support of traceability of system- and component-level faults to         identify root causes of failures.     -   Support of synchronized system shutdown without error         indications.     -   Support of synchronous distributed application startup and         shutdown with acceptable timing and fault tolerance         characteristics.     -   Support of node and network moding with high security against         critical inadvertant mode changes.     -   Logical line compatibility to the byteflight protocol, when         using an optical physical layer must be possible.         Basic Concepts

The communication protocol for the dependable automotive network according to the present invention has the following properties:

-   -   Synchronous and asynchronous frame transfer.     -   Multi-master clock synchronization.     -   Guaranteed frame latency times and jitter during synchronous         transfer.     -   Prioritization of frames during asynchronous transfer.     -   Error detection and signaling.     -   Error containment on the physical layer through an independent         bus guardian device.     -   Scalable fault tolerance, e.g., one controller, one/two         channels, one bus guardian for each channel.

The FlexRay protocol can be divided into various layers of a layer architecture comprising the following layers:

-   -   The Physical Layer defines how signals are actually transmitted.         Tasks of the Physical Layer are fault confinement and error         detection and signaling. The Physical Layer comprises a signal         level, a bit representation and a transmission medium. One task         of the Physical Layer is to detect errors of the communication         controller in the time domain. This is done by the so-called Bus         Guardian.     -   The Transfer Layer represents the kernel of the protocol. It         presents frames received to the presentation layer and accepts         frames to be transmitted from the presentation layer. The         transfer layer is responsible for timing, synchronization,         message framing, error detection and signaling, and fault         confinement.     -   The Presentation Layer is concerned with frame filtering and         masking, frame status handling and contains the communication         controller host interface.     -   The Application Layer is not part of this description.         Node (ECU) Architecture

FIG. 103 shows the architecture of a node 100 (electronic control unit, ECU) of the communication system. Every node 100 consists of the five sub-components host controller 101, communication controller 102, bus guardian 103, bus driver 104, and power supply 105. In the following description the requirements for the communication controller 102, the bus guardian 103, the bus driver 104 and the interfaces to the host 101 and the power supply 105 are described.

Two implementations for the communication controller 102 are possible, one configuration of a communication controller 102 that sends and receives on two redundant physical channels, and a second configuration which is solely connected to one physical channel.

Topology

FIG. 104 shows a possible topology configuration of the communication system 106 (network). A node 100 can either be connected to both channels 1 and 2 (node A, C, and E) or only channel 1 (node B) or only channel 2 (node D). A configuration, where all nodes 100 are connected by one channel only is also possible.

Frame Transfer

In FlexRay media access occurs within a communication cycle. Within one communication cycle FlexRay offers the choice of two media access schemes. These are a static time division multiple access (TDMA) scheme, and a dynamic mini-slotting based scheme. Communication in the communication system 106 is done in a communication cycle consisting of a static segment and a dynamic segment, where each of the segments may be empty. The first frame ID in a system with a static segment is ID number 1 (see FIG. 105). In a pure dynamic system with a start of cycle (SOC) symbol (see FIG. 106). The sending slots are represented through the ID numbers that are the same on both channels.

The sending slots are used deterministically (in a pre-defined time divisional multiple access (TDMA) strategy) in the static segment. In the dynamic segment there can be differences in the phase on the two channels (see FIG. 106). Nodes 100 that are connected to both channels send their frames in the static segment simultaneously on both channels. Two nodes, that are connected to one channel only, but not the same channel, may share a slot in the static segment.

To guarantee the consistency of the clock synchronization only nodes 100 can participate that send frames, which are received by all other nodes (e.g., node A, C and E in FIG. 104). All nodes execute the clock synchronization algorithm, but only the frames of the static segment are considered. It is possible to send different data in the same sending slot on different channels.

The following constraints should be respected in the communication system 106 according to the present invention:

-   -   The communication controller 102 must allow to interface to an         optical or an electrical physical layer.     -   The communication controller 102 must support a net data rate of         at least 5 Mbit/s real application data transferred per seconds         under the constraints of frame overhead (including CRC) and         protocol timing overhead (inter frame gap, IFG) in static         communication mode.     -   It must be possible to connect 2 up to a value CONTROLLER_MAX         controllers 102 to one communication channel. CONTROLLER_MAX is         the maximum number of controllers 102 connected to one         communication channel and can have a value of 64, for example.     -   The maximum number of slots in the static segment is set to         STATIC_SLOTS_MAX. STATIC_SLOTS_MAX is the maximum number of         static slots in a static segment of a communication cycle and         can have a value of 4095, for example.     -   The power supply 105 for the bus driver 104 (including the bus         guardian 103) and the communication controller 102 must meet         automotive requirements.         Comment

Considering the FlexRay protocol as described in the previous part of the description the communication scheme of networked FlexRay nodes can be briefly characterized as follows:

-   -   Each node 100 must be able to make use of the distributed clock.     -   Each node 100 must send frames inside a predefined static slot         or/and inside the dynamic segment (collision free access)

The transmission of frames must be subdivided into 3 phases:

-   1^(st) a bus guardian 103 must enable the access to the bus; -   2^(nd) it must be signalled that a frame should be transmitted; -   3^(rd) the transmission of the frame itself.     Protocol Description

Throughout the document the following notation is used:

-   Req: Requirements -   Comment: contains additional descriptions and explanations     General Requirements     -   Req: The communication protocol shall be independent from the         data rate.         -   Comment:         -   It shall be possible to implement low end controllers e.g.,             500 Kbit/s and high end controllers beyond 100 Mbit/s.     -   Req: The first communication controller must support a net data         rate of at least 5 Mbit/s.         -   Comment:         -   Net data rate: Real application data transferred per seconds             under the constraints of frame overhead (including CRC) and             protocol timing overhead (IFG) in static communication mode.     -   Req: A CRC code with a Hamming Distance of at least 6 must be         used.     -   Req: The communication controller shall be able to operate in a         current byteflight environment, i.e., the two protocol         controllers have to support the same physical interface and the         same representation at the logical line level. The byteflight         compatibility is required for the optical physical layer only.         -   Comment:         -   Compatibility of the interfaces between host CPU and the             protocol controller (CHI) is not required. The electrical             physical layer does not need to support byteflight             compatibility The byteflight specification can be downloaded             from the following web address: www.byteflight.com.             Frame Transfer

Data transfer in FlexRay is done in cycles, called communication cycles.

-   -   Req: The communication cycle consists of a static and a dynamic         segment as shown in FIG. 105. Each of the segments may be empty,         that means there are three possible configurations of the         communication cycle (pure static, mixed static and dynamic (a         mixed system consists of at least two static slots) and pure         dynamic).     -    In a pure dynamic system the communication cycle starts with a         SOC symbol. There are two different SOC symbols (alarm         condition, normal condition). The sending slots are represented         through the identifiers that are the same on both channels (see         FIG. 106).     -    The sending slots are used deterministically (in a pre-defined         TDMA strategy) in the static segment. In the dynamic segment         there can be differences in the phase on the two channels (see         FIG. 105). Nodes that are connected to both channels send their         frames in the static segment simultaneously on both channels. A         node that is connected to only one channel may share an         identifier with another node that is only connected to the other         channel.     -    The current communication cycle is determined by a cycle         counter that is consistently incremented in every cycle (see         FIG. 108).     -   Req: The length of the communication cycle has to be stored in         the configuration data.         -   Fit Criteria:         -   The maximum cycle length is defined by CYCLE_LENGTH_MAX and             can have a value of 64 ms, for example.     -   Req: A check mechanism has to be designed that ensures that no         frame transmission is started within a certain interval so         called forbidden region before the end of the communication         cycle, to ensure that the beginning of the static segment in the         next communication cycle is not disturbed.     -   Req: Multiplexing of sending slots of one controller must be         supported in such a way, that the contents of frames can be         multiplexed for a certain sending slot in different         communication cycles.         -   Comment:         -   So a communication matrix with nearly any possible             communication patterns (periods of certain frames) based on             the principle of communication cycles can be built up.             Static Segment     -   Req: If the static segment of the communication cycle is not         empty it consists of         STATIC_SLOTS_MIN≦NUMBER_OF_SLOTS≦STATIC_SLOTS_MAX.     -   Req: The static segment is subdivided into a sequence of time         slots. In each of these static slots only one controller may         send one frame on each channel.         -   Comment:         -   In the static segment of the communication cycle a TDMA             media access strategy is used.     -   Req: There is one configuration parameter for the slot length         (slot_length) in the static segment, that defines this value.         The length of the slots is configurable off-line but fixed         during runtime.         Dynamic Segment     -   Req: In a pure dynamic system the communication cycle starts         with the start of cycle (SOC) symbol.     -   Req: The dynamic segment of the communication cycle consists of         zero or more dynamic identifiers (slots) within the         communication cycle.     -   Req: Bus access in the dynamic segment is done via static frame         priorities according to the byteflight specification.     -   Req: In the dynamic segment the media access strategy is based         on wait times (mini-slotting scheme) and the priority of         identifiers. Controllers transmitting frames with higher         priority identifiers send before controllers transmitting lower         priority frames.     -   Req: The frame length in the dynamic segment is variable during         runtime.     -   Req: In pure dynamic mode an external triggered SOC generation         and with it the start of the communication cycle has to be         supported. The timing behavior of the external trigger has to be         monitored by the communication controller.         Frame Format FlexRay     -   Req: Two frame formats as specified below must be supported.         -   Comment:         -   The mixture of the two frame formats need not be supported,             i.e., all nodes connected to a FlexRay communication system             can be configured using only the FlexRay format (see             FIG. 108) or the byteflight format (see FIG. 109).             FlexRay Frame Format

The following refers to the FlexRay frame format.

-   -   Req: It must be possible to use the FlexRay format in a pure         static, in a combined static and dynamic, and in a pure dynamic         configuration.     -   Req: The first section of the data field in a frame according to         the FlexRay format must be configurable as a message ID field.         This data field must be filterable by the receiver.

In FIG. 108 the following abbreviations are used:

-   Res: Reserved bits, 4 bit, for future protocol extensions. -   ID: Identifier, 12 bit, value domain: (1₁₀ . . . 4095₁₀), defines     the slot position in the static segment and defines the priority in     the dynamic segment. A lower identifier determines a higher     priority. The identifier of a frame must be unique within a cluster.     Each controller can have one or more identifiers (in the static and     the dynamic segment). -   SYNC: Synchronization field, 1 bit, indicates that the slot is used     for clock synchronization. -   DLC: Data length code field, 7 bit, DLC*2=number of data bytes (0₁₀,     2₁₀, . . . , 246₁₀). -   H-CRC: 9 Bit Cyclic Redundancy Check-Sequence. The H-CRC is     calculated over the SYNC- and DLC-field. -   NF: Null frame indication field, 1 bit, indicates that the     corresponding data buffer is not updated by the host before sending. -   CYCO: Cycle Counter, 6 bit, the cycle counter is increased     simultaneously in all nodes by the controller at the start of each     new communication cycle. -   Message ID: The Message ID field is configurable to be used as the     message identifier or as the first two data bytes. -   D0 . . . D246: Data bytes, 0-246 bytes. -   CRC: 24 Bit Cyclic Redundancy Check-Sequence. The CRC is calculated     over the complete frame.     Byteflight Frame Format

The following refers to the byteflight frame format (see FIG. 109).

-   -   Req: The byteflight frame format must be supported for pure         dynamic configurations.

In FIG. 109 the following abbreviations are used:

-   ID: Identifier, 8 bit, value domain: (1₁₀ . . . 255₁₀), defines the     priority in the dynamic segment. A lower identifier determines a     higher priority. The identifier of a frame must be unique within a     cluster. Each controller can have one or more identifiers. -   Res: Reserved bits, 4 bits, for future protocol extensions. -   LEN: Length field, 4 bit, LEN=number of data bytes (0₁₀ . . . 12₁₀),     a value higher than 12 is handled as LEN=12. -   D0 . . . D11: Data bytes, 0-12 Bytes -   CRC: 15 Bit Cyclic Redundancy Check-Sequence     (x¹⁵+x¹⁴+x¹⁰+x⁸+x⁷+x⁴+x³+1). -   FCB: Fill completion bit: an additional bit is added to the 15 bit     CRC to fill the complete word. The bit is set to “0” as LSB.     Frame Scheduling—Multiplexing of Sending Slots

The following refers to frame scheduling and multiplexing of sending slots.

-   -   Req: The cycle counter can be used to distinguish between         different frame contents.         -   Comment:         -   For a sending slot different send and receive buffers can be             defined in different cycles (slot multiplexing).         -   Comment:         -   The cycle counter can be used as a logical extension to the             identifier (in the case of multiplexing).             Frame and Bit Coding

The following refers to frame and bit coding.

-   -   Req: The coding algorithm in the communication controller has to         be robust against:         -   glitches             Optical Physical Layer

The following refers to the optical physical layer.

-   -   Req: The controller must support at least the byteflight optical         bit encoding.         -   Comment:         -   In byteflight, frames on the communication media are             composed of individual bytes consisting of a start bit,             eight data bits and a stop bit.         -   In addition, transmission of each frame begins with a start             sequence consisting of 6 logical “0”-bits. This is             illustrated by the diagram in FIG. 110. Due to certain             effects in the optical transmission, it is possible for the             start sequence to be become shorter or longer during optical             transmission. This is why the receiver accepts start             sequences in the region of 1 to 9 logical “0”-bits. This is             illustrated by the diagram in FIG. 111.             Electrical Physical Layer

The following refers to the electrical physical layer.

-   -   Req: Frames on the communication media for the electrical         physical layer are composed as shown in FIG. 112. The frame end         sequence may be empty.     -   Req: A suitable bit coding scheme has to be selected, in         accordance to bandwidth efficiency and electromagnetic         compatibility (EMC) requirements.         Frame Timing

The following refers to frame timing.

-   -   Req: Frame timing of different communication controller         implementations must be interoperable.         Frame Timing for the Static Segment     -   Req: Looking at the frame timing for the static segment, the         reception start window shall be defined in relation to the         precision. I.e., the start window must be greater than the         precision.         -   Comment:         -   The actual value for the reception start window must be             defined in the implementation specification.     -   Req: In the static segment accurate timing requirements have to         be ensured for correct frame reception. Frames may only start         within the reception start window.         -   Comment:         -   The length of the frame determines the frame duration.             Correct reception is given if the respective frame does not             violate the temporal borders given by the access scheme. The             judgement of temporal correctness is based on a rigid timing             scheme.     -   Req: The time difference between the predicted start StartNom         and the observed start of the frame (SOF) is used by the clock         synchronization algorithm.     -   Req: The length of the inter frame gap (IFG) has to be         minimized, in order to optimize the net communication rate.         Frame Timing for the Dynamic Segment     -   Req: Looking at the frame timing for the dynamic segment, the         frame timing in the dynamic segment must be defined due to the         byteflight specification.         Start-Up         Requirements

The following refers to the start-up of the communication system.

-   -   Req: For each configuration (Pure Static, Pure Dynamic and Mixed         Systems) the start-up of the communication network has to be         possible as soon as two nodes are able to communicate.     -   Req: The integration of controllers that are powered on later         must not disturb the start-up procedure of the other nodes.     -   Req: The start-up and re-integration of controllers shall not         disturb the normal operation of the network.     -   Req: The worst-case start-up time under the fault conditions         given above has to be provided and guaranteed by the supplier of         the communication controller. The communication network must be         operational after 100 ms.         -   Comment:         -   The application designer has to consider the start-up time             during the determination of the configuration parameters.             Typical automotive applications require a worst case startup             time of 100 ms. For system configurations with extremely             long communication cycles longer startup times are             acceptable.     -   Req: During start-up a communication controller sets the cycle         counter according to the value in the received frame. The cycle         time is derived from the frame ID and set accordingly.     -   Req: The startup must work without reliance on collision         detection.         -   Comment:         -   Collisions can occur on the bus during start-up and in the             case of faults. In star topologies collision detection is             not always feasible.             Principle of Operation—Protocol Modes             Pure Static System and Mixed System     -   Req: The start-up has to work as a distributed algorithm.     -   Req: Only controllers that participate in clock synchronization         (sync bit set) are allowed to start up the system.         -   Comment:         -   In a dual channel system only controllers connected to both             channels are allowed to execute the start-up in a             heterogeneous topology (mixing controllers with single             channel and controllers with dual channel).         -   Controllers connected to only one channel are not allowed to             start-up the bus because they may corrupt the traffic of             this channel in case of an incoming-link failure by sending             frames after the listen-timeout (listen_timeout).     -   Req: The start-up of the communication network, the integration         of nodes powered on later and the re-integration of failed nodes         must be fault-tolerant against:         -   the temporary/permanent failure of one or more communication             controllers (down to one controller sending in the static             segment for mixed or pure static configurations),         -   the temporary/permanent failure of one or more communication             channel(s) in a redundant configuration, and         -   the loss of one or more frames.             Pure Dynamic System     -   Req: A single master sends the SOC symbol. The master shall be         defined at design time.         Shutdown

The following refers to shut-down of the communication system.

-   -   Req: The co-ordinated shutdown of the FlexRay cluster, including         all nodes and all stars initiated by the application must be         possible. The interference with the wake-up mechanism must be         handled.     -   Req: The communication system has to support a synchronized         system shutdown without error indications.         Clock Synchronization

The following refers to clock synchronization of the nodes in the communication system.

Comment:

The proper synchronization of the individual clocks of the communication controllers is a pre-requisite for the TDMA communication scheme.

The following description refers to the FlexRay clock synchronization mechanism (based on the Fault-Tolerant Midpoint algorithm).

Pure Dynamic System

-   -   Req: In a pure dynamic operation the clock synchronization is         performed by a master (SOC).         Pure Static and Mixed System     -   Req: The global time is a vector of two values. Global         time=<cycle_counter, cycle_time>.     -   Req: The cycle time is a counter incremented in units of         macroticks. The cycle time is reset to 0 at the beginning of         each communication cycle.     -   Req: The macrotick defines the resolution of the global time         within one cluster. A resolution of 1 μs must be achievable in         realistic configurations.     -   Req: The macrotick shall be independent of oscillator frequency.         -   Comment:         -   In the implementation each (local) macrotick is an integer             multiple of the (local) clock tick, i.e. depends on the             oscillator frequency, but the factors of two different             macroticks can be different, so over a cycle, independence             can be achieved.     -   Req: The microtick defines the accuracy of the clock difference         measurement. A resolution of <=50 ns is required for the         microtick.         -   Comment:         -   Typical automotive applications require a resolution of 50             nanosecond. For system configurations with low bandwidth,             higher values are acceptable.     -   Req: The clock synchronization mechanism must be able to keep         all fault-free controllers within the precision. A clock         synchronization precision within the different controllers of         better than 1 microsecond is required.         -   Comment:         -   Typical automotive applications require a precision of 1             microsecond. For system configurations with lower precision             requirements, greater values are acceptable.     -   Req: The absolute value of the global time must be the same at         every controller, within the limits defined by the precision.         During start-up the first sending node determines the value of         the global time.     -   Req: The fault tolerance of the clock synchronization mechanism         must be scalable with the number of controllers. The level of         fault tolerance depends on the number of actual nodes in the         system (3k+1 to tolerate k asymmetric faults). In a reduced         fault-tolerant configuration of less than four controllers         (e.g., 2 or 3, in a degraded mode of operation) the         synchronization must be possible. For 4 to 6 controllers the         clock synchronization mechanism must be fault-tolerant against 1         (asymmetric) fault. For 7 or more controllers the clock         synchronization mechanism must be fault-tolerant against 2         (asymmetric) faults.     -   Req: The clock synchronization mechanism must prevent the         formation of cliques with different notions of time within the         network.     -   Req: The clock synchronization mechanism must be able to operate         with oscillators that have automotive quality. In particular the         clock synchronization mechanism must be able to deal with the         physical phenomena (drift, deterioration) that can occur during         an automobile lifetime.     -   Req: A subset of controllers must be configured to send         sync-frames (a frame with a set SYNC bit). In a dual channel         system only controllers connected to both channels may belong to         this subset.     -   Req: Only one static sending slot of each controller is allowed         to contribute to the clock synchronization mechanism, i.e., a         controller may send at most one sync-frame per communication         cycle.     -   Req: Only correctly received sync-frames are used for clock         synchronization.     -   Req: Every node has to use all available sync-frames for clock         synchronization.     -   Req: The clock synchronization and the implementation of the         clock synchronization shall be as resilient as possible against         design violations resulting from environment or possible misuse.         Principle of Operation

The following refers to the principle of operation.

Obtaining the Time Values

-   -   Req: In the static segment every node measures the time         difference between the actual receive time and the expected         receive time for the sync-frames with a resolution of a         microtick.     -   Req: This time difference measurement is done for all channels.     -   Req: A start of frame (SOF)-window is placed around the expected         receive time of an SOF. The length of the receive-window is         equal to the length of the SOF-window.     -   Req: Time values are obtained for correct frames only.         -   Comment:         -   Note that one of the reasons why a frame is considered             incorrect is reception outside the receive window. The             stringent application of the receive-window mechanism             ensures that synchronization errors of nodes are detectable.             Measurement Method     -   Req: The measurement of the clock deviations is done through         measuring the differences between the expected arrival time and         the actual arrival time. The expected arrival time of a frame is         defined by the internal view of the cycle time.         Synchronization Algorithm

The following refers to the synchronization algorithm.

-   -   Req: The synchronization algorithm uses a fault-tolerant         midpoint algorithm (FTM) that operates with an arbitrary number         of controllers.         -   Comment, Description of the FTM:         -   The measured values are sorted and the k largest and             smallest values are discarded. k is adapted dynamically so             that at least 2 measured values are remaining.         -   The largest and the smallest of the remaining values are             selected for the calculation of the midpoint value, i.e.,             average of those two values. The resulting value in a node             describes the deviation of the own clock from the global             time base and serves as a correction term.     -   Req: The resulting correction term(s) shall be used for error         detection of the communication controller. If the correction         term cannot be applied, an error has to be signaled to the host.     -   Req: The clock correction term(s) calculated in the previous         step shall be applied to the local clock.     -   Req: If equal or more than half of the frames are received         outside the reception start window a synchronization error is         indicated to the host. The synchronization error is a fatal         error the controller has to reintegrate.         -   Comment:         -   This mechanism prevents the formation of cliques.             External Synchronization

The following refers to the external synchronization

-   -   Req: External synchronization must be supported.         -   Comment:         -   External synchronization is necessary for the             synchronization of a FlexRay network to an external time             reference, e.g., a GPS receiver or a DCF77 receiver, or to             synchronize several FlexRay networks.     -   Req: Each controller can add an additional external clock         correction term(s) to the calculated clock correction term(s).     -   Req: The resulting clock correction term(s) shall not be greater         than the maximum allowed correction term(s) or smaller than the         minimum allowed term(s). The communication controller shall         limit the applied correction term(s) to allowed values.     -   Req: The host shall be able to read the current (local)         correction term(s) (current clock value) and set the external         correction term(s).     -   Req: A hardware input signal at the communication controller for         external synchronization is required.     -   Req: The hardware input signal shall be connected to the         internal soft-reset of the controller. It shall be possible to         release the controller from soft reset at a specific time by the         host.         Support of Application Agreement Protocols     -   Req: The protocol has to support the realization of application         agreement protocols. This requires multiple sending slots to         achieve agreement within one communication cycle.         Support of Network Management     -   Req: Support of synchronous distributed application startup and         shutdown with acceptable timing and fault tolerance         characteristics.     -   Req: Support of node and network modes with high security         against critical inadvertent mode changes.         Hardware Specification

The following part of the description explains the hardware-related requirements for a FlexRay system.

General Requirements

Regarding the communication hardware, a distributed system of FlexRay nodes must offer some properties when being designed by using active stars and passive busses:

-   -   Req: One and two channel solutions have to be supported.     -   Req: An electrical and optical physical layer must be supported.     -   Req: Communication via redundant physical links is optional. The         communication system must support both communication via         redundant and non-redundant physical links. A mix of redundant         and non-redundant physical links must be supported.     -   Req: When using active stars several 1:1 links must be used.     -   Req: Wake-up of nodes and stars via the communication system         must be supported. Signaling on one channel is sufficient for         wake-up.     -   Req: A baud-rate from 500 kbit/s up to 10 Mbit/s must be         supported.     -   Req: A power mode management must be supported.         Topology     -   Req: The protocol has to be independent from the topology as far         as possible. Mixed and homogeneous system topologies must be         supported.     -   Req: A FlexRay network using a passive bus must be possible (see         FIG. 114).     -   Req: A FlexRay network using a passive star must be possible.     -   Req: A FlexRay network using a active star must be possible (see         FIG. 113).     -   Req: Support for different topologies/physical layers on         different channels is desirable.     -   Req: Support for different physical layers on one channel is         desirable.     -   Req: A distributed system of FlexRay nodes can be designed by         combining the active star and the passive bus approach (see FIG.         115). Several nodes may be connected to a branch.

Each node must adhere to the following requirements (see FIG. 103):

-   -   Req: Within a node 1 or 2 bus drivers must be connected to a         single communication controller.

Each active star must adhere to the following requirements (see FIG. 116):

-   -   Req: No communication controller is required to perform the star         functionality.     -   Req: No host is required to perform the star functionality.         -   Comment:         -   An implementation may integrate the star within an ECU.     -   Req: A branch of an active star has to be de-activated if a         faulty communication signal is detected:         -   1) permanent “0” on the bus or         -   2) permanent “1” on the bus or         -   3) permanent noise on the bus.     -   Req: A de-activated branch may not influence the communication         of the active modules (fail silent).     -   Req: A de-activated branch has to be re-activated if the failure         condition which leads to a faulty communication signal is no         longer available.         Automotive Constraints

The communication system according to the present invention can be used in almost any environment. However, preferably it is used in vehicles of any kind, in particular in safety critical applications in the automotive sector. In that case the communication system has to fulfill the following automotive constraints:

-   -   Req: FlexRay devices must meet automotive temperature         requirements.         -   Comment:         -   General temperature requirements include a range of −40 to             +125 degrees Celsius. Special applications may require             higher temperatures, e.g., near braking actuators.     -   Req: Each product has to be optimized to meet the automotive and         legal EMC requirements. External filters may not be required but         may well be used.         -   Comment:         -   Listed severity levels as named won't be achievable when             using a passive bus.     -   Req: The power consumption during the normal operating mode and         the low power mode has to be minimized.         -   Comment:         -   Typical values are given in the following table 1:

TABLE 1 Typical current consumption. Function Min. Typ. Max. Unit Remarks Quiescent current (from the 10 μA The bus driver monitors wake-up permanent power) of the events, the voltage regulator bus driver is switched off Current for the bus driver 10 mA bus free - no actual communication and the communication controller Current for the bus driver 50 mA bus busy - communication active and the communication controller

-   -   Req: The voltage supply for the communication controller should         be the same as for commercially available ECUs.         -   Comment:         -   Today most ECUs support 5 V. For optimizations e.g., 3 V are             allowed.     -   Req: All inputs and outputs of the bus driver and the         communication controller which are directly coupled to the wire         harness have to fit the known electric requirements. Support of         future high supply voltages (36/42 V instead of 12 V) must be         supported.         Architecture—Power Modes

This part of the description summarizes the requirements on the communication controller and the bus driver to run an ECU in several modes.

-   -   Req: The power modes of the ECU must be sensitive to control         signals from the host and wake-up signals from the transmission         media, from the ECU internally (e.g., from the host) and         optionally from the ECU externally (e.g., by a switch).     -   Req: At least 3 power modes must be distinguished for         communication controllers and bus drivers and stars (see Table         2):         -   Normal (voltage regulator(s) active, communication possible)         -   Standby (voltage regulator(s) active, communication not             possible)         -   Sleep (voltage regulator(s) not active, communication not             possible)

TABLE 2 Power modes Power Mode of the Node Communication Power Supply Normal available available Standby not available available Sleep not available not available

-   -   Req: The power modes of the active star must be controlled by         the bus drivers automatically. It is not desireable that a         dedicated ‘wake-up’ and ‘shut-down’ command is send to the star         or additional wiring is required.         Communication Controller

The following refers to the Communication Controller:

-   -   Req: A communication controller must include an interface to         connect a host.     -   Req: Parts of the behavior visible to the host, e.g.,         application control, configuration, message area, communication         controller status, interrupts, etc. have to be confirmed among         the suppliers and specified.     -   Req: The time base of the redundant channels must be the same         within each node (e.g., by a single state machine).     -   Req: The functionality of the communication controller must be         independent of the existence of a bus guardian.     -   Req: For a stand-alone controller the pin-out must be completely         specified and documented.         States and Operating Modes     -   Req: Power-on and NOT (power-on) must be distinguished at least.     -   Req: The controller has to be passive outside the mode power-on.     -   Req: The controller has to be resetable externally.     -   Req: The controller has to support at least one low-power mode.     -   Req: The controller modes have to be defined in accordance with         the bus driver modes.         Logical Line Operation on the Communication Media (e.g. Bus)     -   Req: At least the following information has to be distinguished:     -   bus busy: data or SOC symbol are transmitted.     -   bus idle.     -   Req: The encoding/decoding method has to allow both optical and         electrical communication networks. At least one method has to be         supported:         -   Non Return to Zero (NRZ) in the physical layer coding scheme             (see byteflight specification).     -   Req: Bit sampling must be robust against disturbances typically         inside vehicles e.g., signal delay, edge jitter, baud-rate         jitter.     -   Req: Bit sampling must be able to deal with e.g., temperature         variations or tolerances of electrical and physical parameters.         Optical Driver     -   Req: See the byteflight specification.         Electrical Bus Driver     -   Req: For a bus driver the pin-out must be completely specified         and documented.     -   Req: For redundant configurations an implementation has to be         chosen which minimizes the probability of common mode failures         of both bus drivers (→each redundant communication is         disturbed).         -   Comment:         -   Two bus drivers to support redundant communication by a             single communication controller may possibly not be             implemented on a single die.         -   Two bus drivers to support redundant communication by a             single communication controller can be integrated in one             package, if any common mode failure can be excluded.     -   Req: The bus driver must provide status information and         diagnostics information which can be read by any u-controller         optionally.     -   Req: The bus driver must be protected against electrical         over-voltage and short-circuits.         Voltage Monitoring     -   Req: The bus driver must monitor the battery voltage and has to         provide status information.     -   Req: The bus driver must detect an interrupted connection to the         battery and has to provide status information.         States and Operating Modes

The bus driver has to support several states or operating modes:

-   -   Req: Power-on and NOT (power-on) must be distinguished         -   →permanent power         -   →regulator voltage     -   Req: The bus driver has to support at least two low-power modes.     -   Req: The bus driver has to be able to signal an internal power         down mode to an external voltage regulator.     -   Req: the bus driver has to support a “shutdown mode”         -   →this mode has to be reached by secured mechanisms on demand             of the host         -   →this mode must be left only by a power down         -   →the bus driver has to be passive and has to signal to the             voltage regulator to switch off.     -   Req: The bus-levels have to be chosen by the bus driver         automatically to support any net-wide power down modes.         Bus Guardian     -   Req: The failure of a communication controller in the time         domain, e.g., a communication controller sends in a time slot         when it is not allowed to send, must be prevented by a bus         guardian. The probability for common mode failures in the time         domain affecting both, the communication controller and the bus         guardian must be sufficiently low.     -   Req: The bus guardian must protect the static slots (controller)         from each other. In the dynamic segment the bus guardian grants         all controllers access to the bus.         -   Comment:         -   One of the main reasons for an error in the time domain is             an erroneous internal state that leads to an incorrect             (timing) access to the communication media.     -   Req: The bus guardian must be able to detect errors in the         physical clock source as well as errors in the internal         representation of the time base of the communication controller.         -   Comment:         -   One of the main reasons for an error in the time domain is             an error in the clock source of the communication             controller. Hence, the clock source check mechanism of the             bus guardian must concentrate on the main physically             possible failure modes of the clock source of the             communication controller.         -   The bus guardian may have a clock source of its own. Two bus             guardians, which are connected to the same communication             controller can use the same clock source.     -   Req: The bus guardian must not disable access to more than one         channel, i.e., one bus guardian per channel is required.     -   Req: It must be possible to implement the bus guardian as a         stand-alone circuit. This circuit has to be combinable with the         known state of the art physical layers.         -   Comment:         -   The bus guardian could be integrated in the bus driver. The             interface(s) towards the communication controller (and the             bus driver) must be defined.     -   Req: It must be possible to implement the bus guardian as a         stand-alone circuit in the star coupler. This circuit has to         interact with the known state of the art physical layer.     -   Req: The bus guardian has to check the correct enabling of the         driver output stage.     -   Req: The mechanism of separating the communication controller         from the communication media must be checked. At least once per         driving cycle (power on/power off) is sufficient.     -   Req: The bus guardian is configured via a configuration data         interface.     -   Req: The bus guardian has to enable and disable the bus driver         output stage according to a predefined timing pattern. If the         bus guardian detects an error in the timing pattern of the         communication controller it permanently disables access to the         communication media and signals this.     -   Req: If an error in the bus guardian occurs the communication         channel must not be disturbed (monopolized).     -   Req: The configuration data interface must be specified and         documented. This mainly includes the logical contents of the         timing pattern.         Wake-Up     -   Req: Several wake-up mechanisms have to be taken into         consideration.         ECU→Bus Driver     -   Req: The bus driver has to be woken up by any source inside or         outside the ECU (local wake-up).     -   Req: The wake has to be two edge sensitive.         -   Example:         -   e.g., edge at a Wakeup pin of the Bus Driver             Bus→Bus Driver     -   Req: From the host's point of view a general wake-up mechanism         is required for both electrical and optical systems.     -   Req: The bus driver should be woken up via standard         communication (message-pattern).     -   Req: The wake-up detector has to be robust against disturbances         in vehicles like common mode signals by emission.     -   Req: The bus driver may not be woken up by any noise.         Bus Driver→Controller     -   Req: The bus driver has to wake up the controller by any signal         on the interface. A dedicated wake-up line is not required.         -   Example:         -   e.g., edge at the receive (Rx) pin produced by the bus             driver             Bus Driver→Power Supply     -   Req: The bus driver has to signal its sleep state, e.g., to         control the voltage regulator.         -   Example:         -   inhibit signal             Controller→Bus Driver     -   Req: The controller must be able to wake-up the bus driver by         any signal on the interface. A dedicated wake-up line is not         required.         -   Example:         -   Edge at the Send (Tx) pin             Selective Sleep     -   Req: The realization of selective sleep has to be supported.         Interfaces

The following refers to the interfaces provided within a node of the communication system:

The interfaces between the single modules (host, controller, bus driver, bus guardian, and power supply) have to be agreed upon among the suppliers according to the general requirements defined in this document. FIG. 117 shows an overview of all interfaces.

Communication Controller

Host Interface (CHI)

General Requirements

-   -   Req: The configuration data of the communication controllers         must be securable (e.g., by soft reset) against accidental         access and modifications.     -   Req: Protect against improper host modification of BG and CC         configuration data.     -   Req: The interface between the host and the communication         controller should be implemented as a 16 bit interface         (selectable multiplexed/non-multiplexed bus interface).     -   Req: Functional compatibility between different suppliers has to         be guaranteed at CHI level.     -   Req: The CHI has to be configurable into transmit and dedicated         receive buffers and receive buffers with first in first out         (FIFO) behavior.     -   Req: If the FIFO queue is full and new data arrives the oldest         data is overwritten. The FIFO queue must set a diagnosis bit         when data in the buffer is overwritten.     -   Req: Most significant bit/byte (MSB) first is used for frame         transmission.         -   Comment:         -   The status area of the CHI contains communication controller             status fields, which are written by the controller and which             are read-only for the host. The status fields will be             defined in the protocol specification and interface             specification.         -   The control area in the CHI contains fields that allow the             host to control the behavior of the communication             controller. The control fields will be defined in the             protocol specification and interface specification.         -   The message area in the CHI contains a memory area where the             frames to be sent/received are stored together with status             information for each frame. The layout of this memory area             is determined in the configuration data of each             communication controller. The message buffer status fields             will be defined in the protocol specification and interface             specification.     -   Req: Support of traceability of system- and component-level         faults to identify root causes of failures.     -   Req: The hardware implementation should verify that only one         combination of frame ID and sync bit is considered valid for         transmission.         Frame Filtering and Masking     -   Req: Message Reception, every message buffer has to contain a         channel, frame ID and cycle counter which are used for message         filtering. Optionally the first two data bytes of each message         buffer are used as message ID filter.         -   Options for filtering:         -   1) Frame ID+channel         -   2) Frame ID+cycle counter+channel         -   3) Message ID+cycle counter+channel         -   Comment:         -   Filtering: Filtering of messages means that for each message             buffer the message's frame ID, cycle count and message ID             are parameters that define in which message buffer the             correctly (correct CRC, time, etc.) received message is             stored or if the message is discarded.     -   Req: There must be at least one mask register per communication         controller and channel that allows all combinations of masking.         -   Comment:         -   Masking: Masking of message filters means that some (parts)             of the filtering parameters may be configured to be             disregarded (set to “don't care”).     -   Req: Message transmission, filtering parameters for transmission         are frame ID and cycle counter; there is no masking possible for         the frame ID. Each transmit buffer has its own mask for the         cycle counter.         Interrupts     -   Req: The host computer has to be able to request different         interrupts from the communication controller: at least read         interrupt (buffer), write interrupt (buffer), 2 independent         timer interrupts.     -   Req: Timer interrupt: the host can request a time interrupt at         any absolute point in the global time (across communication         cycle borders).     -   Req: One interrupt line is required for a standalone controller         implementation.     -   Req: Interrupts can be mapped to one or more interrupt lines in         an integrated controller.         Host         Bus Guardian Interface     -   Req: The bus guardian configuration data is written during         download and then stored in a local memory of the bus guardian.     -   Req: During normal operation no configuration data transfer from         the host to the bus guardian is allowed.     -   Req: The bus guardian periodically updates a status field which         can be accessed by the host/bus guardian interface containing at         least the following status information:     -   State of the bus     -   State of the controller         Communication Controller         Bus Guardian Interface     -   Req: At least the following control information is required:     -   ARM signal         Communication Controller         Bus Driver Interface     -   Req: This interface has to be confirmed among the suppliers.         -   Example:         -   Tx, TxEnable (TxEN)         -   Rx, RxEnable (RxEN)             Bus Guardian             Bus Driver Interface             Bus Driver             Power Supply Interface     -   Req: To perform the wake-up and sleep functionality an interface         between bus driver and power supply is required.         Error Handling

The following refers to the error handling.

The communication system and its components shall offer adequate error management mechanisms to deal with faults arising from the following levels:

-   -   media     -   bit (coding)     -   frame     -   data     -   topology and     -   time.

The communication system furthermore shall offer diagnosis information to the host computer with respect to controller, bus (channel), and incoming/outgoing link failures.

Requirements

-   -   Req: The error management shall follow the “never-give-up”         philosophy.         -   Comment:         -   This means that the communication protocol has to support             proper operation until a certain critical error states is             reached.     -   Req: The non-arrival of periodic messages shall not be         unrecognized.         -   Comment:         -   It is okay, if, e.g. one, periodic message is missed, but             this has to be detected. The fact, that a periodic message             was missed should be signaled to the host.     -   Req: If a periodic message was missed, no random data shall be         given to the host.     -   Req: Data content of messages, (periodic and spontaneous) must         not be changed by the communication protocol.     -   Req: The change of data content shall be signaled to the host.     -   Req: After an error was detected at a communication partner in         the network, the functionality of the other communication         partners shall not be influenced.         -   Comment:         -   The correct function may not depend from the correct             function of a certain host, of a certain communication             controller or of a certain power supply.

The communication controller shall detect the following list of errors:

-   -   Req: Synchronization error. The communication controller is not         any more synchronized to the global time on the bus.     -   Req: The communication network must offer diagnosis information         to the host computer with respect to the bus (channel),         incoming/outgoing link failures.     -   Req: The communication network must offer diagnosis information         to the host computer within a defined maximum delay after the         occurrence of the failure of the diagnosis element.     -   Req: The communication network is not required to provide         consistent and agreed diagnosis information to the host         computer.         Hardware Units

The following faults have at least to be detected by the communication controller:

-   -   Req: Defect time source (e.g., broken crystal).     -   Req: Low voltage.         -   The following faults has to be recognized by the bus driver             as errors:     -   Req: Faulty communication signals caused by e.g. any faulty         transmission media (e.g., a broken line, short circuit to         ground, . . . ).     -   Req: Incorrect communication with the host e.g., communication         via the data interface.     -   Req: Incorrect communication with the communication controller         e.g., bus-blocking transmit signals.     -   Req: De-activated branch.         Interfaces     -   Req: Status information on detected errors must be provided.         Additionally it is required that maskable interrupts for certain         detected errors can be requested by the host.         Constant Definitions

In the following part of the description the constants for a number of design parameters defined throughout the document are set to actual values. The values mentioned are examples and can be replaced by almost any desired value.

Table 3 shows Communication Network Constants (Min/Max).

TABLE 3 Definition of the constants used throughout the specification. Name Value Description CONTROLLER_(—) 64 Maximum number of controllers MAX connected to one communication channel. CYCLE_(—) 250 μs Minimum length of the configurable LENGTH_MIN communication cycle. CYCLE_(—) 64 ms Maximum length of the configurable LENGTH_MAX communication cycle. DATA_(—) 246 Maximum number of data bytes. BYTES_MAX DYNAMIC_(—) 4095 Maximum number of dynamic IDS identifiers. STATIC_(—) 2 Minimum number of static slots SLOTS_MIN in a static segment of a communication cycle STATIC_(—) 4095 Maximum number of static slots SLOTS_MAX in a static segment of a communication cycle Glossary

In the following glossary some of the terms used for description of the present invention are defined.

Bus Consists of one or several channels. Bus Driver A bus driver connects a communication controller to one channel. Bus Guardian A bus guardian protects one channel from timing failures of the communication controller. It is therefore connected to one communication controller and one bus driver. The bus guardian must be independent from the protocol communication controller. byteflight Communication network developed by BMW AG, Motorola, ELMOS, Infineon, Siemens EC, Steinbeis Transferzentrum fur Prozessautomatisierung, IXXAT (see www.byteflight.com) Channel A channel is a physical connection between several communication controllers. A redundant channel consists of two channels connecting the same communication controllers. CHI Controller Host Interface. Clique Set of communication controllers having the same view of certain system properties, e.g., the global time value, or the activity state of communication controllers. Cluster Synonym for network within this specification. Cluster time Same as cycle time. Communication A communication controller is connected to Controller one or two channels where it can send and receive frames. Communication Periodic data transfer mechanism. Structure Cycle and timing are statically defined. However, a static and a dynamic segment allows for the transmission of both, state and event information. Controller see, Communication Controller. CRC Cyclic Redundancy Code attached to a frame. CYCLE The CYCLE field is used to transmit the cycle counter. The cycle counter is increased simultaneously in all nodes by the communication controller at the start of each new communication cycle. Cycle Counter Contains the number of the current communication cycle. Cycle time Contains the time within a communication cycle in units of macroticks. Same as cluster time. DATA Data field in a frame. DLC: Data length field Dynamic Segment of the communication cycle where Segment frames are transmitted according to a mini-slotting algorithm. The sending order is defined by a statically determined identifier. Identifiers with smaller numbers have priority over identifiers with higher numbers. A communication cycle may consist of the static segment only. EOF End Of Frame. An optical or electrical physical layer may require different end of frame sequences. ECU Electronic Control Unit. Same as node. EMC Electro Magnetic Compatibility. FIFO First In First Out. Buffers can be configured to work as a FIFO memory for frames. Frame A frame consists of all information transmitted in one slot (with one identifier) on one channel. FTA Fault Tolerant Average. The FTA is a fault tolerant clock synchronization algorithm that is able to tolerate up to a pre-defined number k of maliciously faulty clocks. This algorithm is based on a sorted array of clock deviations. The lower and upper k clock deviation values are discarded. From the remaining clock deviation values the average value is calculated and then used for the clock correction. FTM Fault Tolerant Midpoint. The FTM is a fault tolerant clock synchronization algorithm that is able to tolerate up to a pre-defined number k of maliciously faulty clocks. This algorithm is based on a sorted array of clock deviations. The lower and upper k clock deviation values are discarded. From the remaining clock deviation values the median value is chosen for the clock correction. Gateway A node may function as a gateway and connect two or more networks. Global time Contains the combination of cycle counter and cluster time. Hamming Minimum distance of any two code words Distance within a code. Host The host is the part of an ECU where the application software is executed, separated by the CHI from the communication network. ID The frame identifier defines the slot position in the static segment and defines the priority in the dynamic segment. A lower identifier determines a higher priority. Identifier 0 is reserved for the SOC symbol. The identifier of a frame must be unique within a cluster. Each controller can have one or more identifiers (in the static and the dynamic segment). Identifier see, ID. IFG Inter Frame Gap. LEN Length field of a frame. LLI Logical Line Interface. LSB Least Significant Bit/Byte. MAC Media Access Control. Macrotick Basic unit of time measurement within a network of communication controllers. The clock synchronization mechanism guarantees that the clock values at all non-faulty controllers are equal. The uncertainty in the clock values is bounded by the precision. Message Application data transported within a frame. Several messages may be packed together to constitute a frame. Microtick Basic unit of time measurement within a communication controller for measuring the time difference between the controllers clock and the clocks of the other communication controllers. Clock correction is done in units of Microtick. MSB Most Significant Bit/Byte. Network A network consists of a set of nodes (more than one node) connected by communication subsystem. Networks are connected by special nodes (gateways). Same as Cluster. Node A node may contain one or more communication controllers. Equivalent to ECU (Electronic Control Unit). Nominal The nominal precision is the clock Precision synchronization precision that can be reached by the local clock synchronization of a cluster. NRZ Non Return to Zero physical layer coding scheme. Precision The precision is a time interval bounding the deviations between the local clocks of all active communication controllers. If a communication controllers clock deviates more than the precision from the clocks of the other controllers it must not participate in the communication any longer. Slot Duration of time during which one communication controller may access the communication medium. SOC Start of Cycle. Defines the start of a communication cycle in the pure dynamic mode, and the start of communication for start-up. SOF Start of Frame. An optical or electrical physical layer may require different start of frame sequences. Star A star coupler is connected to one channel. Coupler Static Segment of the communication cycle where Segment frames are transmitted according to a statically defined TDMA scheme. A communication cycle may consist of the static segment only. SYNC Synchronization field. This field indicates that the slot is used for clock synchronization. TDMA Time Division Multiple Access.

The following is a description of the notation used for variables, constants and parameters in this document.

TABLE 4 Naming Conventions Naming Information Convention Type Description cName Protocol Values used to define characteristics or Constant limits of the protocol. These values are fixed for the protocol and can not be changed. vName Node Values which will be changed depending Variable on time, events, etc. gName Cluster Parameter which must have the same value Constant in all nodes in a cluster, is initialized during soft reset, and can only be changed during soft reset pName Node Parameter which may differ in nodes of a Constant cluster, is initialized during soft reset, and can only be changed during soft reset fName Frame Parameters which are transmitted as part Variable of a FlexRay or byteflight frame. These variables are set by the transmitting node and read by the receiving nodes. xdName Time Value (variable, parameter, etc.) Duration describing a time duration, the time between two time points xtName Time Value (variable, constant, etc.) describing an instant xsName Set Set of values (variables, parameters, etc.) xyName[ch] Channel Set of variables/parameters that are channel Specific specific. xyName[ch] represents the Info pair of variables, xyName[A] represents the variable associated with channel A, xyName[B] represents variable associated with channel B. S_Name Event Internal event signal sent between various portions of the protocol description. These do not necessarily represent actual parameters, but rather represent an abstract method by which various protocol descriptions can interact. x Stands for one of c, v, g, or p above y Optionally stands for one of d, t, or s above. Pseudocode Conventions

To specify functions and algorithms short code pieces are used. The pseudocode is loosely based on the programming language used by MATLAB. The following table 5 outlines some of the pseudocode conventions (functions and elements).

TABLE 5 Pseudocode Conventions Function or Element Description x = LENGTH(list) Returns the number of elements in the list “list” list = [ ] Sets the list “list” to an empty list (i.e., a list with no elements) list = [list, x] Appends element “x′”’ to the end of the list “list” x = list(i) “x” is the i-th element of the list “list”. list(1) is the first element of the list “list” x = SORT(list) “x” is a sorted list containing the elements from the n-element list “list” placed in decreasing order such that x(1) ≧ x(2) ≧ x(3) ≧ . . . ≧ x(n − 1) ≧ x(n) x = MIN(a, b) Minimum function. If both a and b are valid it returns a if a < b, otherwise returns b; if a invalid returns b, if b invalid returns a, if a and b invalid returns an empty set x = Midterm(list) “x” is the result of the Fault Tolerant Midpoint Algorithm executed on the list “list“. for the definition of the Fault-tolerant Midpoint Algorithm x = Int[a] Returns the integer part of the (real) number “a” x = |a| Returns the absolute value of “a” (a if a ≧ 0, −a if a < 0) x = MODULO(a,b) The modulo or remainder function. “x” is the remainder when integer “a” is divided by integer “b”. For example, MODULO(6,2) = 0 and MODULO(7,2) = 1. // Pseudocode comment. Characters on the line after the “//” are considered comments (i.e., not part of the pseudocode). Bus Topology

FIG. 1 shows a possible topology configuration of a communication system 106 as a dual bus. A node 100 can either be connected to both channels A and B (nodes A, C, and E), only to channel A (node D) or only to channel B (node B).

A FlexRay communication system 106 can also be a single bus. In this case, all nodes 100 are connected to this bus.

Star Topology

Valid Star Network Configurations

A FlexRay communication system can be built as a multiple star topology. Similar to the bus topology, the multiple-star topology can support redundant communication channels. Each network channel must be free of closed rings, and the number of star couplers must be between 1 and cStarCouplersMax, inclusive, if there are sequentially connected (cascaded) star couplers. The total number of star couplers may be more than cStarCouplersMax if there are branches in the network. Each network line connecting a node to the star coupler or between two star couplers represents a properly terminated point-to-point connection. The incoming signal received by the star coupler is actively driven to all communication nodes.

The configuration of a single redundant star network is shown in FIG. 2. The logical structure (i.e., the node connectivity) of this topology is identical with that shown in FIG. 1. It is also possible to create a single, non-redundant star topology which has the same logical structure as the single bus mentioned above.

FIG. 3 shows a single channel network built with three star couplers. Each node has a point-to-point-connection to one of the three star couplers. Two of the star couplers (No. 1 and 3) are directly connected to the third star coupler (No. 2).

Note that it is also possible to have a redundant channel configuration with cascaded stars. An example of such a configuration is FIG. 4. Note that this example does not simply replicate the set of stars for the second channel—Star 1A connects nodes A, B, and C, while Star 2A connects nodes A, C, and E.

Star Coupler Behavior and Protocol Impact

-   -   For each node connected to a star coupler, the star coupler         contains a bi-directional connection operating in half-duplex         mode.     -   Before transmitting a frame, all connections in each star         coupler must be dynamically set up to either receive or transmit     -   The FlexRay coding mechanism defines a Transmission Start         Sequence (TSS), which is used to initiate a proper connection         setup throughout the network before the actual FlexRay frame or         symbol is transmitted. The transmission of the TSS is detected         by the star coupler and is treated as a connection setup         request. The star coupler returns to its idle state after the         bus has been released to the idle state by the transmitting         node.     -   At the end of each frame transmission, all star couplers must         return to the initial state before the next connection setup         request is initiated. This is necessary in order for the star         coupler to be able to process the next configuration request         correctly.     -   The minimum idle time between two consecutively transmitted         frames must accommodate the times for connection setup and         return to the initial state for the star couplers that are used         in the system.         Hybrid Topologies

In addition to topologies that are composed either entirely of a bus topology or entirely of a star topology, it is possible to have hybrid topologies that are a mixture of bus and star configurations. The FlexRay system supports such hybrid topologies as long as the limits applicable to each individual topology are not exceeded. For example, the limit of cStarCouplersMax cascaded star couplers also limits the number of cascaded star couplers in a hybrid topology.

There are a large number of possible hybrid topologies, but only two representative topologies are shown here. FIG. 5 shows an example of one type of hybrid topology. In this example, some nodes (nodes A, B, C, and D) are connected using point-to-point connections to a star coupler. Other nodes (nodes E, F, and G) are connected to each other using a bus topology. This bus is also connected to a star coupler, allowing nodes E, F, and G to communicate with the other nodes.

A fundamentally different type of hybrid topology is shown in FIG. 6. In this case, different topologies are used on different channels. Here, channel A is implemented as a bus topology connection, while channel B is implemented as a star topology connection.

Communication Cycle

The communication cycle is the fundamental element of the media access scheme within FlexRay. It is defined by means of a timing hierarchy.

Timing Hierarchy

The timing hierarchy consists of four timing hierarchy levels as shown in FIG. 7.

The highest level, the communication cycle level, defines the communication cycle. It contains the static segment, the dynamic segment, the symbol window and the network idle time (NIT). Within the static segment a static time division multiple access scheme is used to arbitrate transmissions. Within the dynamic segment a dynamic mini-slotting based scheme is used to arbitrate transmissions. The symbol window is a communication period in which one symbol out of a defined set of symbols can be transmitted on the network. The static segment, the dynamic segment and the symbol window form the network communication time (NCT), a period during which network wide communication takes place. The network idle time defines a communication-free period that concludes each communication cycle.

The next lower level, the arbitration grid level, contains the arbitration grid that forms the backbone of FlexRay media arbitration. In the static segment the arbitration grid consists of consecutive time intervals, called static slots, in the dynamic segment the arbitration grid consists of consecutive time intervals, called minislots.

The arbitration grid level builds on the macrotick level that is defined by the macrotick. The macrotick is specified further on. Specific macrotick boundaries are called action points. These are dedicated instants at which transmissions shall start (in the static segment, dynamic segment and symbol window) and shall end (only in the dynamic segment).

The lowest level in the hierarchy is defined by the microtick that is covered further on.

Communication Cycle Execution

The following specifies the communication cycle for the time-triggered distributed (TT-D) mode and for the time-triggered master-controlled (TT-M) mode. The communication cycle for the event-triggered (ET) mode is specified futher on. The communication cycle for the byteflight mode is covered in the byteflight specification.

In both the TT-D mode and the TT-M mode the synchronized time triggers the execution of the communication cycle based on a periodically recurring principle with a period that consists of a constant number of macroticks.

The communication cycles are numbered from 1 to cCycleMax. Each node shall maintain a cycle counter vCycle that shall hold the number of the current communication cycle. Initialization of the cycle counter is specified further on.

FIG. 8 illustrates the execution of the communication cycle.

In the TT-D mode the static segment must contain at least two static slots (at least two frames must be sent with the sync bit set). The dynamic segment may exist optionally as well as the symbol window. Media access test, however, can only be performed if the symbol window exists.

In the TT-M mode the static segment must contain exactly one static slot (In this slot a frame must be sent with the sync bit set). In this mode the dynamic segment must exist, while existence of the symbol window remains optional.

Table 6 summarizes the protocol modes and the possible configurations of the communication cycle.

TABLE 6 Network Communication Time Constituents vs. Protocol Modes network communication time protocol static dynamic symbol media access mode segment segment window test usable TT-D mode at least 2 static — — no slots configured configured yes at least 2 static minislots — no slots configured configured configured yes TT-M mode 1 static slot minislots — no configured configured configured no ET mode see Chapter “Event Triggered Mode” BF mode see byteflight specification WU mode no communication cycle established

As described above, the FlexRay protocol supports clusters with a single communication channel (channel A only) or with dual communication channels (channel A and channel B). In the case of a dual channel cluster the channels are synchronized to one another. In the dual channel case nodes may be connected to either one or both of the communication channels. These topology options may be combined freely with the communication cycle.

Network Communication Time

Arbitration within the network communication time is performed by means of unique frame priorities and a slot counting scheme.

Arbitration assumes that unique frame priorities, referred to as frame identifiers, have been assigned to the frames among the nodes for each channel (The frame identifiers may either be assigned by an off-line configuration tool or during run-time using an application based assignment strategy. Note that in all cases the uniqueness of the frame identifiers per channel must be maintained to ensure collision-free arbitration). The frame identifiers shall range from 1 to cSlotIDMax. The frame identifier determines in which segment and when within the respective segment a frame shall be sent.

Each node shall maintain a slot counter vSlotCounter[ch] for each of the two respective channels. In the operation phase the slot counters shall be initialized with 1 at the start of each communication cycle. Initialization in the startup phase is specified further on.

Static Segment

Within the static segment a static time division multiple access scheme shall be applied to arbitrate transmissions. In this segment all communication slots are of equal, statically configured duration and all frames are of equal, statically configured length.

Structure

The static segment shall consist of gNumberOfStaticSlots static slots of equal duration. The number of static slots gNumberOfStaticSlots is a global constant for a given cluster and may range between 1 and cSlotIDMax.

In any given node one static slot pSyncSlot may be configured to contain a synchronization frame, a special type of frame required for synchronization within the cluster. psyncSlot is a node specific value that equals the number of the static slot in which the sync frame shall be transmitted

FIG. 9 illustrates all transmission patterns that are possible for a single node within the static segment.

In slot 1 the node transmits a frame on channel A and a frame on channel B. In slot 2 the node transmits a frame only on channel A (An equivalent pattern is also possible in which a node transmits a frame on channel B and no frame on channel A. Different nodes can share a static slot across both channels as described above). In slot 3 no frame is transmitted on either channel.

Transmission Condition

In the static segment the condition whether a frame shall be transmitted or not differs depending on the current protocol phase.

In the startup phase a frame shall be transmitted on a channel

-   -   1. if the slot is assigned to the node via the frame ID and         channel specific assignment, and     -   2. if startup has enabled frame transmission, and     -   3. if the slot is configured to contain a sync frame, i.e. the         respective slot counter matches pSyncSlot.

In the operation phase a frame shall be transmitted on a channel

-   -   1. if the slot is assigned to the node via the frame ID and         channel specific assignment, and     -   2. if the control state machine is in the operation state.

The frame shall be assembled as follows:

-   -   1. The reserved bit shall be set to zero.     -   2. The sync bit shall be set to one if the respective slot         counter vSlotCounter[ch] matches pSyncSlot, otherwise set to         zero.     -   3. The network management bit shall be set to the value held in         the CHI.     -   4. The frame ID field shall be set to the value of the         respective slot counter vSlotCounter[ch].     -   5. The length field shall be set to gPayloadLengthStatic.     -   6. The header CRC shall be set to the value held in the CHI.     -   7. The cycle count field shall be set to the value of the         current cycle counter vCycle.     -   8. If payload data is available from the CHI for the respective         slot then         -   a. the null frame indication bit shall be set to zero, and         -   b. the payload data shall be set to the values received from             the CHI, and         -   c. any remaining payload data bytes shall be set to the             padding pattern 0x00.     -   9. If no payload data is available from the CHI for the         respective slot then         -   a. the null frame indication bit shall be set to one, and         -   b. all payload data shall be set to the padding pattern             0x00.     -   10. The frame CRC shall be calculated using the procedure         specified further on.         Timing and Slot Counter Housekeeping

All static slots shall consist of an equal number of gdStaticSlot macroticks. The number of macroticks per static slot gdStaticSlot is a global constant for a given cluster and may range between 2 and TBD.

Each static slot contains an action point that shall be offset from the start of the slot by gdActionPointOffset macroticks. Frame transmission shall start at the action point of the respective static slot. The number of macroticks within the action point offset gdActionPointOffset is a global constant for a given cluster and may range between 1 and TBD.

Appropriate configuration of the static slot length must assure that the frame and the communication separator fit within the static slot.

FIG. 10 depicts the detailed timing of the static slot.

At the end of every static slot the slot counter for channel A vSlotCounter[A] and the slot counter for channel B vSlotCounter[A] shall be incremented by one (Note that this also holds for the last static slot within the static segment).

Configuration

The static slot length gdStaticSlot shall be chosen such that the static slot accommodates not only the transmission of the frame but also the channel idle detection latency under worst-case assumptions (The parameter gdStaticSlot shall be determined by an off-line configuration tool). The formula for determining this parameter and respective constraints are specified further on. The formula for determining the parameter gdActionPointOffset and respective constraints are specified further on, too.

Dynamic Segment

Within the dynamic segment a dynamic mini-slotting based scheme shall be used to arbitrate transmissions. In this segment the duration of communication slots may vary in duration in order to accommodate frames of different length.

Structure

The dynamic segment shall consist of gNumberOfMiniSlots minislots of equal duration. The number of minislots gNumberOfMiniSlots is a global constant for a given cluster and may range between 0 and tbd.

The dynamic segment also consists of a set of consecutive dynamic slots that contain one or multiple minislots. The duration of a dynamic slot depends on whether or not communication, i.e. frame transmission or reception, takes place. The duration of a dynamic slot shall be established on a per channel basis.

The condition of whether or not communication takes place shall be evaluated at the end of every minislot:

-   -   The dynamic slot shall consist of one minislot if no         communication takes place, i.e. the respective communication         channel is in the channel idle state throughout the respective         minislot.     -   The dynamic slot shall consist of multiple minislots if         communication takes place.

Details of how the duration of a dynamic slot is determined for frame transmissions are specified in the subsequent subsection. Details of how this is determined in the case of frame reception are specified further on.

FIG. 11 outlines the media access scheme within the dynamic segment.

As shown in the figure the media access on the two communication channels does not occur in lock step. Both communication channels do share, however, the same arbitration grid. FIG. 11 also shows how the duration of a dynamic slot adapts depending on whether or not communication takes place.

Transmission Condition

In the dynamic segment the condition that determine whether a frame shall be transmitted or not depend on the current protocol phase.

In the startup phase no frames shall be transmitted on either channel.

In the operation phase a frame shall be transmitted on a channel

-   -   1. if the slot is assigned to the node via the frame ID and         channel specific assignment, and     -   2. if the dynamic segment has not exceeded the pLatestTx         minislot, which is a node specific upper bound, and     -   3. if the control state machine is in the operation state.

The frame shall be assembled as follows:

-   -   1. The reserved bit shall be set to zero.     -   2. The sync bit shall be set to zero.     -   3. The network management bit shall be set to the value held in         the CHI.     -   4. The frame ID field shall be set to the value of the         respective slot counter vSlotCounter[ch].     -   5. The length field shall be set to the number of payload data         bytes divided by two.     -   6. The header CRC shall be set to the value held in the CHI.     -   7. The cycle count field shall be set to the value of the         current cycle counter vCycle.     -   8. If payload data is available from the CHI for the respective         slot then         -   a. the null frame indication bit shall be set to zero, and         -   b. the payload data shall be set to the values received from             the CHI, and         -   c. any remaining payload data bytes shall be set to the             padding pattern 0x00.     -   9. If no payload data is available from the CHI for the         respective slot then         -   a. the null frame indication bit shall be set to one, and         -   b. all payload data shall be set to the padding pattern             0x00.     -   10. The frame CRC shall be calculated using the procedure         specified further on.         Timing and Slot Counter Housekeeping

Timing within the dynamic segment is based on minislots. Each minislot shall contain an equal number of gdMinislot macroticks. The number of macroticks per minislot gdMinislot is a global constant for a given cluster and may range between 2 and tbd.

Each minislot contains an action point that shall be offset from the start of the minislot by gdMsActionPointOffset macroticks. The number of macroticks within the minislot action point offset gdMsActionPointOffset is a global constant for a given cluster and may range between 1 and tbd.

FIG. 12 shows the detailed timing of a minislot.

Frame transmission shall start at the minislot action point of the first minislot of the respective dynamic slot. In the dynamic segment frame transmission shall also end at a minislot action point. If the frame does not end at a minislot action point by virtue of its data length, then the transmitter shall extend the transmission using the dynamic trailing sequence (DTS) as described further on. The DTS prevents premature idle detection by the receivers.

In contrast to a static slot the dynamic slot distinguishes between the transmission phase and the dynamic slot idle phase. The transmission phase ranges from the start of the dynamic slot to the last minislot, in which the transmission terminates. The dynamic slot idle phase concludes the dynamic slot. The dynamic slot idle phase is defined as a communication-free phase that succeeds the transmission phase in each dynamic slot. It is required to account for the communication channel idle detection latency and to process the frame by the receivers.

FIG. 13 shows the detailed timing within the dynamic segment.

The start of the dynamic segment requires particular attention. The first action point in the dynamic segment shall occur after max(gdActionPointOffset, gdMsActionPointOffset) macroticks after the end of the static segment.

The two possible cases are illustrated in FIG. 14.

Each node shall perform slot counter housekeeping on a per channel basis. At the end of every dynamic slot the respective slot counter vSlotCounter[ch] shall be incremented by one until either

-   -   1. the respective slot counter vSlotCounter[ch] has reached         cSlotIDMax, or     -   2. the dynamic segment has reached the minislot         gNumberOfMinislots, i.e. the end of the dynamic segment, or

Once one of these conditions is met the respective slot counter shall be set to zero and further increments shall be suspended for the respective communication cycle.

The arbitration procedure assures that all fault-free receivers agree implicitly on the dynamic slot in which the transmission starts. Further, all fault-free receivers also agree implicitly on the minislot in which slot counting is resumed. As a result, the slot counter of all fault-free receivers matches the slot counter of the fault-free transmitter and the frame identifier contained in the frame.

Configuration

Constraints concerning the configuration of the dynamic segment are specified further on.

Symbol Window

Within the symbol window a single symbol may be sent, i.e. either a normal symbol, an alarm symbol, a medium access test symbol or no symbol at all shall be sent. In general, arbitration among different senders is not provided by the protocol for the symbol window. If arbitration among multiple senders is required for the symbol window it has to be performed by means of a higher-level protocol.

Structure

The symbol window shall consist of a fixed number of gdSymbolWindow macroticks. The number of macroticks per symbol window gdSymbolWindow is a global constant for a given cluster and may range between 0 and TBD.

Transmission Condition

As in the two communication segments the condition whether a symbol shall be transmitted or not differs depending on the current protocol phase.

In the startup phase no symbol shall be transmitted on either channel.

In the operation phase a symbol shall be transmitted on a channel

-   -   1. if a symbol is released for transmission, and     -   2. if the control state machine is in the operation state.

Details specifying when a symbol is released for transmission are specified further on.

Transmission Timing

The symbol window contains an action point that shall be offset from the start of the slot by gdActionPointOffset macroticks. Symbol transmission shall start at the action point within the symbol window (see FIG. 15).

Configuration

Constraints concerning the configuration of the symbol window are specified further on.

Network Idle Time

Within the network idle time the clock correction terms shall be calculated and the offset correction term shall be applied in one or multiple macroticks. Details of the clock synchronization process are described further on.

The network idle time shall also serve as a phase to perform implementation specific cluster cycle related tasks.

The network idle time shall contain gdNIT macroticks. The number of macroticks within the network idle time gdNIT is a global constant for a given cluster and may range between 1 and TBD.

Constraints on the duration of the network idle time are specified further on.

Coding and Decoding

The following describes the coding and decoding methods used by the FlexRay system.

Since the FlexRay protocol is independent from the underlying physical layer, the following describes the coding and decoding rules of the interface signals as seen by the communication controller (i.e., TxENn, TxDn and RxDn, nε{A, B} in FIG. 16). Further on additional information on this interface will be given.

In general, there are several non-ideal conditions (for example, clock oscillator differences, electrical characteristics of the transmission media and transceivers, etc.) that can cause variations of signal timing or introduce anomalies/glitches into the communication bit stream. The coding and decoding mechanisms described below are intended to be robust against such effects.

FlexRay uses a Non-Return to Zero (NRZ) signaling method for coding and decoding of frames and symbols.

Bit Stream Coding with NRZ

This section specifies the mechanisms used to encode the logical frames and symbols into a bit stream for transmission and how the transmitting node presents this bit stream to the Bus Driver for communication onto the network. The sender shall start the transmission of a frame or symbol by setting the TxENn signal to logical “0”. The sender shall stop the transmission of a frame or symbol by setting the TxENn and the TxDn signals to logical “1”. The logical frame is described further on.

Frame Coding

Frame coding transforms logical frames to a continuous bit stream by the following steps:

-   -   Dividing the logical frame into single byte components     -   Building byte sequences by adding a Byte Start Sequence (BSS) at         the beginning of each byte component     -   Assembling a continuous bit stream out of the byte sequences     -   Adding a Transmission Start Sequence (TSS) before the start of         the bit stream     -   Appending a Frame End Sequence (FES) at the end of the bit         stream     -   Appending a Dynamic Trailing Sequence (DTS) after the Frame End         Sequence if the frame is transmitted in the dynamic segment of         the communication cycle         Byte Coding

Each byte sequence shall begin with a Byte Start Sequence (BSS). The BSS consists of a logical “1” bit followed by a logical “0” bit. A byte sequence consists of a BSS followed by eight data bits from the logical frame.

Transmission of the data bits within a byte sequence shall be such that the most significant bit of the data is transmitted first with the remaining bits of the data being transmitted in decreasing order of significance. This is shown in FIG. 17.

The purpose of the BSS is to provide bit stream timing information to receiving devices. The signal edge between the first and the second bit of the BSS is used to realign the bit timing of the receiver (i.e., bit clock resynchronization).

Transmission Start Sequence (TSS)

The Transmission Start Sequence (TSS) is inserted into the bit stream before the first byte sequence. The TSS consists of a continuous logical “0” level. The duration of the TSS shall be configurable between 1 to 15 nominal bit times.

Frame End Sequence (FES)

The Frame End Sequence (FES) is appended to the bit stream following the final byte sequence. The FES is a two bit sequence consisting of a logical “0” bit followed by a logical “1” bit.

Dynamic Trailing Sequence (DTS)

A dynamic trailing sequence (DTS) shall be transmitted immediately after the FES of a frame that is transmitted in the dynamic segment of a communication cycle. The purpose of this sequence is to indicate the exact point in time of the minislot action point.

The DTS starts with a variable number of consecutive logical “0”s. The DTS length is greater or equal to 1 bit. The DTS is concluded with the transmission of a logical “1” bit. Note that the granularity of the length of the “0” portion of the DTS is microticks rather than bits. In general, the trailing “0” to “1” transition is not synchronous to a bit cell boundary.

Entire Bit Stream for a Frame in the Static Segment

FIG. 18 shows the entire bit stream of a frame transmitted in the static segment.

At the completion of the FES the transmitting node shall set the TxENn signal to logical one.

Entire Bit Stream for a Frame in the Dynamic Segment

FIG. 19 shows the entire bit stream of a frame transmitted in the dynamic segment.

At the minislot action point the TxDn output shall switch to logical “1” level, while TxENn shall switch to logical “1” one bit duration gdBit after the action point (This ensures that there is a duration of gdBit in which the TxDn output is at logical one prior to the transition of TxENn to logical one. This is required for the stability of certain types of physical layers.).

Symbol Coding

The FlexRay communications protocol defines six symbols; each of which is represented by specific bit pattern:

-   -   Status Normal Symbol (SNS)     -   Status Alarm Symbol (SAS)     -   Media Access Test Symbol (MTS)     -   Collision Avoidance Symbol (CAS)     -   Event Indication Symbol (EIS)     -   Wake-Up Symbol (WUS).

The bit stream of each symbol is described in the following sections.

Status Normal Symbol (SNS)

The Status Normal Symbol shall be transmitted starting with the Transmission Start Sequence (TSS) followed by 2 gdBit times at a logical “1” level, 30 gdBit times at a logical “0” level, and a final gdBit time at a logical “1” level as shown in FIG. 20.

Status Alarm Symbol (SAS)

The Status Alarm Symbol shall be transmitted starting with the Transmission Start Sequence (TSS), followed by 2 gdBit times at a logical “1” level, 20 gdBit times at a logical “0” level, and a final gdBit time at a logical “1” level as shown in FIG. 21.

Collision Avoidance Symbol (CAS)

The Collision Avoidance Symbol shall be transmitted starting with the Transmission Start Sequence (TSS), followed by 30 gdBit times at a logical “0” level as is shown in FIG. 22.

Media Access Test Symbol (MTS)

The Media Access Test Symbol (MTS) shall be encoded in the same manner as the CAS symbol described above.

Event Indication Symbol (EIS)

The Event Indication Symbol (EIS) shall be encoded in the same manner as the SNS symbol described above.

Wake-Up Symbol (WUS)

At the TxD output the Wake-Up Symbol shall be transmitted starting with a configurable number of gdBit times at a logical “0” level (gdWakeupSymbolTxLow) followed by a configurable number of gdBit times at a logical “1” level (gdWakeupSymbolTxIdle).

At the TxENn output the WUS shall be transmitted identically to the TxD line, i.e., starting with a configurable number of gdBit times at a logical “0” level (gdWakeupSymbolTxLow) followed by a configurable number of gdBit times at a logical “1” level (gdWakeupSymbolTxIdle).

The Wake-up symbol shall be repeated for a configurable number of times (gWakeupPattern). The minimum number of repetitions is 2. The configuration parameters for the WUS are described more detail below. An example with a sequence of two WUS's is shown in FIG. 23.

Bit Stream Decoding with NRZ

This section specifies the mechanisms used to perform bit stream decoding, including the relevant parameter limits and configuration parameters with this function. The decoding function interprets the bit stream observed at the RxDn inputs of the CC.

The block diagram in FIG. 24 shows the control flow of the receive signals through the Bit Stream Decoding (BSD) unit.

The bit stream decoding processes bit streams present on the physical media, extracts logical frame and symbol information, and passes this information to the FlexRay protocol engine. The following steps are performed:

-   -   Bit clock alignment at dedicated edges during the bit stream         detected at the RxDn input     -   Bit sampling and voting based on the aligned bit clock     -   Decoding of frame and symbol information from the bit sampling         and voting output

The bit stream decoding processes of the individual channels on a multiple channel FlexRay node operate independently from one another. Specifically, the bit clock alignment, edge detection, sample voting, frame decoding, and symbol detection processes on the individual channels must be capable of independent operation.

Bit Clock Alignment

The Bit Clock Alignment function (BCA) synchronizes the local bit clock used for bit sampling and voting to the received bit stream at the RxDn input.

Edge Detection Window Control

The edge detection window determines the time window in which the next edge for bit clock alignment is expected. This window is set during frame reception around the expected logical “1” to “0” transition between the two bits of the next BSS.

Initial Edge Detection Window Determination

The initialization of the BCA is started as soon as channel idle is detected at RxDn (and signaled to the BCA via the decoder unit). FIG. 25 shows the mechanism that determines the initial edge detection window when a frame is received. If the received bit stream is not a frame (e.g., symbol reception), the BCA shall be deactivated until the next channel idle is signaled to the BCA via the decoder unit.

The initialization of the BCA is performed through the following steps:

-   -   Falling edge detection (potential start of a frame, i.e., the         start of a TSS)     -   Rising edge detection (potential start of BSS)     -   Falling edge detection (potential falling edge in the middle of         the BSS)     -   Alignment of bit stream to that falling edge     -   First edge detection window determination         Start of Frame Detection

After channel idle the BCA waits for a falling edge that is potentially the start of a frame (TSS). In order to filter out glitches, a continuous number of pVotingSamples samples are taken for majority voting to validate the occurrence of the edge (see FIG. 25 with pVotingSamples=3).

If the majority of pVotingSamples consecutive samples is logical “0”, a valid falling edge has been detected.

Start of BSS Detection

After detecting a valid falling edge the BCA waits for a rising edge that is potentially the start of a BSS. In order to filter out glitches, a continuous number of pVotingSamples samples are taken for majority voting to validate the occurrence of the edge (see FIG. 25 with pVotingSamples=3).

If the majority of pVotingSamples consecutive samples is logical “1”, a valid rising edge has been detected.

Falling Edge Detection in the Middle of the BSS

After detecting a valid rising edge the BCA waits for a falling edge that is potentially the middle of a BSS. In order to filter out glitches, a continuous number of pVotingSamples samples are taken for majority voting to validate the occurrence of the edge (see FIG. 25 with pVotingSamples=3).

If the majority of pVotingSamples consecutive samples are logical “0”, a valid falling edge has been detected.

Alignment of Bit Stream

After detecting a valid falling edge the bit clock is aligned to the bit stream as seen in FIG. 26.

The first sample of the next bit is determined by the central sample of the voting window. FIG. 26 shows an example with pVotingSamples=3, where the second sample of the voting window shall be considered to be the first sample of the next bit. After aligning the bit sampling to this particular sample in the BSS, the first sample of each consecutive bit of the next byte is considered to occur pSamplesPerBit after first sample of the previous bit.

First Edge Detection Window Determination

The falling edge of the next BSS is expected 10*pSamplesPerBit samples after the falling edge of the current BSS. The bit time window is placed symmetrically around the expected edge in the next BSS with a size of 6 samples, i.e., the next edge detection window is set from three samples before to three samples after that expected falling edge (see FIG. 27).

Bit Clock Alignment

During the edge detection window, the number of samples that equal logical “0” is counted as vEdgeLowSamples. Three cases have to be distinguished:

Case 1: vEdgeLowSamples=pEdgeSamples/2

In this case, the bit clock alignment is assumed to be correct. The falling edge is detected at the expected falling edge (see FIG. 28).

Case 2: vEdgeLowSamples>pEdgeSamples/2

In this case, the bit clock has to be aligned by −1 sample point (see FIG. 29).

Case 3: vEdgeLowSamples<pEdgeSamples/2

In this case, the bit clock has to be aligned by +1 sample (see FIG. 30).

In general, shifting the bit start time is limited to plus or minus one sample point.

If there is no falling edge detected during the edge detection window (i.e., all samples have the same value), the resynchronization of the next bit sampling is performed according to the following rules

-   -   If only logical “0” values are sampled in the edge detection         window, the bit clock is aligned −1 sample relative to the         expected falling edge.     -   If only logical “1” values are sampled in the edge detection         window, the bit clock is aligned +1 sample relative to the         expected falling edge.

This condition does not constitute a coding error.

Edge Detection Window Determination During Frame Reception

The next edge detection window is determined from the aligned bit clock of the current detected falling edge. The falling edge of the next BSS is expected 10*pSamplesPerBit after the current detected falling edge. The bit time window is placed symmetrically around the expected edge in the next BSS, i.e., the next edge detection window is set from three samples before to three samples after that expected falling edge (see FIG. 27).

Bit Sampling and Voting

The bit sampling and voting function decides whether the current bit value is to be considered as logical “1” or as logical “0”. This determination shall be performed on the signals RXDA and RXDB.

Initial Bit Start Determination

After initialization of the CC, the BSD unit starts bit sampling immediately, i.e., the local bit clock is started immediately and the bit stream is sampled with this (unaligned) bit clock. The first bit is assumed to start with the first sample. Bit clock alignment starts independently as described above. The number of samples of a bit is configured by the parameter pSamplesPerBit. pSamplesPerBit can be either 8 or 10. Each consecutive bit is assumed to start pSamplesPerBit after it's predecessor bit. FIG. 31 shows an example of bit sampling with pSamplesPerBit=10.

Resynchronization of Bit Sampling

Once the bit clock alignment is activated, bit sampling is resynchronized to the received bit stream by using the aligned bit clock. The resynchronization of the bit sampling is only performed at the falling edges in the BSS. In general, the first sample of the next bit shall be set to the sample following the falling edge detected by the BCA. This mechanism is illustrated in FIG. 32.

After bit clock alignment bit sampling is performed without resynchronization for the next ten bits, i.e., until the falling edge of the next BSS.

Bit Value Voting

The number of samples to be considered for majority voting shall be odd. It is recommended to center the voting window on the supposed center of the bit cell.

The sample voting process defines a “window” of samples that are used to make the determination of the value of a received bit. This window is characterized by two parameters, pVotingOffset and pVotingSamples. An example with pVotingOffset=3 and pVotingSamples=5 is shown for the case of pSamplesPerBit=10 in FIG. 33.

The parameter pVotingOffset specifies the offset between the 1^(st) sample of the bit and the start of the voting window. This offset defines the first sample of the bit that will be considered for the voting. Specifically, the first sample considered for voting is the sample after the first pVotingOffset samples of the bit (i.e., voting starts after pVotingOffset samples have been “skipped”).

The pVotingSamples parameter specifies the number of samples in the voting window. The window is defined by taking pVotingSamples consecutive samples starting with the sample indicated by pVotingOffset.

The bit value shall be determined by majority voting over the samples within the voting window (This implies that the number of samples within the voting window, pVotingSamples, must be odd.), i.e., if a majority of samples within the voting window have logical value “0”, the output value of the sampled bit shall be “0”; if a majority of samples within the voting window have logical value “1” the output value of the sampled bit shall be “1”.

Note the voting window and the bit sampling shall be resynchronized with every edge between the two bits of the Byte Start Sequence (BSS). This is the only edge to be used for the resynchronization.

Frame and Symbol Decoding

Note that due to certain effects on the physical transmission medium (e.g., optical transmission, truncation due to connection setup in the star coupler, etc.), it is possible that the TSS seen at the RxDn input may be shorter or longer than the TSS that was transmitted. All receivers shall accept Transmission Start Sequences with any duration in the range of 1 to 16 bit times (inclusive).

A valid start of frame or symbol shall be considered when the following conditions are met:

-   -   the channel was detected as idle and     -   there was at least one transition from logical “1” to logical         “0” and     -   the bit value associated with the transition being considered as         start of the bit cell was considered to be logical “0” (bit         value voting result)

Note: for glitch filtering and bit start time alignment at start of frame and/or symbol see the bit clock alignment section in this chapter.

Frame Decoding

The frame coding status shall be “valid coding”, if the following conditions are met:

-   -   the TSS length was detected to be at least 1 bit and less or         equal to 16 bits, and     -   all the expected BSS's were successfully detected (i.e. the         first bit of the BSS was voted as a logical “1” and the second         bit was voted as a logical “0”), and     -   the FES was successfully detected (i.e. the first bit of the FES         was voted as a logical “0” and the second bit was voted as a         logical “1”).

Once the decoder unit detects an FES instead of an expected BSS, the BCA function is deactivated until channel idle is detected.

SNS Decoding

The detection of an SNS symbol shall be considered as “valid coding” if the following conditions are met:

-   -   a TSS is detected with a duration between 1 and 16 gdBit, and     -   two gdBit times logical “1” is detected, and     -   a subsequent logical “0” level is detected for a duration of 27         gdBit<t_(—) _(sns) _(—) ₀ <33 bit         SAS Decoding

The detection of an SAS symbol shall be considered as “valid coding” if the following conditions are met:

-   -   a TSS is detected with a duration between 1 and 16 gdBit, and     -   two gdBit times logical “1” is detected, and     -   a subsequent logical “0” level is detected for a duration of 18         gdBit<t_(—) _(sas) _(—) ₀ <22 gdBit         EIS Decoding

The detection of an EIS symbol shall be considered as “valid coding” if the same conditions are met as for SNS decoding (see above).

CAS Decoding

The detection of a CAS symbol shall be considered as “valid coding” if the following condition is met:

-   -   the TSS is detected with a duration between 1 and 16 gdBit, and     -   a logical “0” level is detected for a duration of 27 gdBit<t_(—)         _(cas) _(—) ₀ <33 gdBit         MTS Decoding

The detection of an MTS symbol shall be considered as “valid coding” if the same condition is met as for CAS decoding (see above).

WUS Decoding

The detection of a WUS symbol shall be considered as “valid coding” if the following condition is met:

-   -   a duration between 1 gdBit and gdWakeupSymbolRxLow at a logical         “0” level is detected.         Channel Idle Detection

The channel idle detection function is located in the decoder, using the input from the sampling and voting unit. The channel idle detection function is always active, including, for example during ongoing frame and/or symbol detection. When the CC is in low power mode and/or in the CC configuration state, then channel idle detection support is not performed.

Upon exiting the CC configuration state and/or the CC low power mode, the channel shall initially be assumed to be busy (i.e. not idle). The behavior is also required when an undefined communication element is detected.

The channel shall be considered to be idle as soon as 12 consecutive bits with the data value logical ‘1’ have been detected.

Presence of glitches while the channel is idle does not establish a coding error condition and there shall be no re-start of the channel idle detection timer. The channel idle detection counter shall be re-started when a logical “1” to “0” transition was detected where the associated bit voting result was “0”.

If the next start of frame or symbol is detected earlier than after successful channel idle detection then this establishes a channel idle condition violation (but not a coding error) and shall be signaled to the host.

Coding Error Signaling

After a frame or symbol start is detected, i.e., if a transition from channel idle to logical “0” is observed at RxDn and none of the conditions described in section 0 hold, the coding status shall be “invalid coding”.

After a valid frame or symbol is received, the CC shall perform the channel idle check. If the consecutive 12 bits after end of frame or symbol are not logical “1” a “channel idle coding violation” shall be signaled to the host.

Device is in Sleep Mode

As soon as a logical “0” condition is detected, this condition shall be captured and be considered as a potential start of a wakeup symbol. If the wakeup condition is verified as “valid”, then the appropriate startup actions shall be performed (see below), otherwise the device shall continue to stay in sleep mode.

Configuration Parameters

In order to be able to support a suitable set of different bit rates without having to modify the oscillator frequency, the number of samples per bit pSamplesPerBit shall be configurable to either 8 or 10. In addition, a scalable oscillator clock period multiplier should typically be provided. At a minimum, the node shall support clock period multiplier settings (prescaler settings) of 1, 2, 4, 8, and 16. The supported bit rates depend on the oscillator frequency that is used, the prescaler setting, and the samples per bit setting.

The following Table 7 gives an example of supported bit rates with a 12.5 ns oscillator period (e.g. f_osc=80 MHz nominal.).

TABLE 7 Example of supported bit rates with a 12.5 ns oscillator period Sample Sample Samples Clock Clock Period per Bit Time Bit Rate Index Prescaler (ns) Bit (ns) (Mbps) 1 1 12.5 8 100 10.000 2 1 12.5 10 125 8.000 3 2 25.0 8 200 5.000 4 2 25.0 10 250 4.000 5 4 50.0 8 400 2.500 6 4 50.0 10 500 2.000 7 8 100.0 8 800 1.250 8 8 100.0 10 1000 1.000 9 16 200.0 8 1600 0.625 10 16 200.0 10 2000 0.500 Overview

The following describes the supported frame formats used by the FlexRay protocol and gives an overview. Then the description focuses on the frame formats.

The FlexRay protocol supports two distinct frame formats:

-   -   the FlexRay frame format     -   the byteflight frame format

All controllers in a cluster must be configured to use the same frame format. Specifically, a system in which some controllers use the FlexRay frame format while other controllers use the byteflight frame format is not a valid system configuration.

The FlexRay frame format may be used for systems in time-triggered distributed mode (TT-D mode), in time-triggered master-controlled mode (TT-M mode), or event-triggered mode (ET mode).

The byteflight frame format may only be used in systems operating in byteflight mode (BF mode).

Both frame formats contain a header segment, a payload segment and a trailer segment, each of which contains specific fields. These are described for the FlexRay and byteflight frame formats, and illustrated, respectively, in FIG. 34 and FIG. 35.

FlexRay Frame Format

An overview of the FlexRay frame format is given in FIG. 34. The frame shall be transmitted on the network such that the header segment appears first, followed by the payload segment, and then followed by the trailer segment, which is transmitted last.

FlexRay Header Segment

The FlexRay header segment consists of 5 bytes that contain several distinct fields; a reserved bit, a Network Management Indication Bit, a Null Frame Indication Bit, a Sync Bit, a Frame ID field, a Payload Length field, a Header CRC field, and a Cycle Counter field. These fields are described in detail in the following sections.

Within the header segment the fields shall be transmitted in the order indicated in FIG. 34, moving from left to right (i.e., the Reserved bit is transmitted first and the Cycle Counter field is transmitted last).

Reserved Bit (1 bit—fReservedBit)

This field consists of one bit that is reserved for future protocol use. This bit shall not be used by the application.

-   -   In a transmitting node the Reserved bit shall be set to logical         ‘0’.     -   In a receiving node the Reserved bit shall be ignored (The         receiver uses the value of the Reserved Bit for the Frame CRC         checking process, but otherwise ignores its value (i.e., the         receiver shall accept either a 1 or a 0 in this field).).         Network Management Indication Bit (1 bit—fNMIndicationBit)

This field indicates whether an optional network management vector is contained within the payload section of the frame.

-   -   If the network management indication bit is set to         fNMIndicationBit=1 the payload section of the frame contains a         network management vector.     -   If the network management indication bit is set to         fNMIndicationBit=0 the payload section of the frame does not         contain a network management vector.         Null Frame Indication Bit (1 bit—fNullFrameIndicationBit)

The Null Frame Indication bit fNullFrameIndicationBit indicates whether the current frame is a “null frame”, i.e., a frame that contains no usable data in the payload segment of the frame. (The Null frame indication bit indicates only whether valid data was available to the communications controller at the time the frame was sent. A Null Frame Indication Bit set to 1 means that received data in the payload segment is not valid. If the bit is set to 0 the data in the payload segment is valid from the transmitting communication controller's point of view. The receiver may have to do several other checks to decide whether the data is actually valid.)

-   -   If the Null frame indication bit is set to         fNullFrameIndicationBit=1 the payload segment contains no valid         data.     -   If the Null frame indication bit is set to         fNullFrameIndicationBit=0 the payload segment contains data.

Further information on null frames may be found below.

Sync Bit (1 bit—fSyncBit)

The sync bit fSyncBit determines whether the frame is to be used for various aspects of system synchronization.

-   -   If the Sync Bit is set to fSyncBit=1 the frame is a candidate to         be used for synchronization if it meets other criteria (see         below).     -   If the Sync Bit is set to fSyncBit=0 the frame shall not be used         for synchronization.

Examples of protocol mechanisms that make use of the Sync Bit include clock synchronization (described further on) and startup (described further on). In all cases, the condition fSyncBit=1 is only one of several conditions necessary for the frame to be used in the various synchronization mechanisms.

All frames transmitted in the dynamic segment (if present) shall be sent with fSyncBit=0.

If a node transmits a given frame on more than one channel it shall set fSyncBit to the same value on each channel.

A node shall not transmit a frame with fSyncBit=1 in more than one slot of a given communication cycle. If a node does transmit frames with fSyncBit=1, it shall do so in the same slot of every communication cycle.

A node shall only transmit a frame with fSyncBit=1 in a given slot of a communication cycle if it is configured to transmit on all configured channels for that slot (This implies that nodes transmitting frames with fSyncBit=1 on dual channel systems must transmit that frame on both channels of the system. Single channel systems implicitly meet this requirement—all frames are transmitted on all configured channels.).

Frame ID (12 bits—fFrameID)

This field contains the Frame Identifier for the frame. Each frame that may be transmitted in a cluster has a frame ID fFrameID assigned.

The frame ID fFrameID is a unique number per communication channel per communication cycle and defines the slot in which the frame is transmitted.

Valid values for fFrameID range from 1 to 4095 (In binary: from (0000 0000 0001)₂ to (1111 1111 1111)₂) during the protocol operation phase (POP). The Frame ID 0 is an invalid Frame ID.

The Frame ID field shall be transmitted such that the most significant bit of fFrameID is transmitted first with the remaining bits of fFrameID being transmitted in decreasing order of significance.

Payload Length (7 bits—fPayloadLength)

The Payload Length field consists of a single parameter, fPayloadLength, that is related to the number of bytes contained in the payload segment of the frame. Specifically, fPayloadLength indicates the number of bytes in the payload segment divided by two. For example, a frame that contains a payload segment consisting of 72 bytes would be sent with fPayloadLength=36. A detailed definition of the contents of the payload segment of a FlexRay frame can be found below.

The payload length field does not include the number of bytes within the header and the trailer segments of the FlexRay frame.

The maximum payload length is cPayloadLengthMax, which corresponds to a payload segment containing 2*cPayloadLengthMax bytes. The payload field shall be less than or equal to the maximum payload length: fPayloadLength≦cPayloadLengthMax.

The payload length shall be fixed for all frames in the static segment of a communication cycle. For these frames the payload length field shall be transmitted with fPayloadLength=gPayloadLengthStatic.

The payload length fPayloadLength may be different for different frames in the dynamic segment of a communication cycle. In addition, the payload length of a specific dynamic segment frame may vary from cycle to cycle. Finally, the payload lengths of a specific dynamic segment frame may be different on each configured channel. All dynamic segment frames, however, shall have 0≦fPayloadLength≦cPayloadLengthMax.

The Payload Length field shall be transmitted such that the most significant bit of fPayloadLength is transmitted first with the remaining bits of fPayloadLength being transmitted in decreasing order of significance.

Header CRC (11 bits—fHeaderCRC)

The Header CRC field contains a Cyclic Redundancy Check code (CRC) computed over the Sync Bit, Frame ID, and Payload Length fields of the frame.

The CRC is computed in the same manner on all configured channels. The CRC polynomial shall be x ¹¹ +x ⁹ +x ⁸ +x ⁷ +x ²+1=(x+1)(x ⁵ +x ³+1)(x ⁵ +x ⁴ +x ³ +x+1)

This 11 bit CRC polynomial generates a (31,20) BCH code that has a minimum Hamming distance of 6. The codeword consists of the data to be protected and the CRC. In this application, this CRC protects exactly 20 bits of data (1 bit sync+12 bits frame ID+7 bits payload length=20 bits). This polynomial was obtained from T. Wadayama, Average Distortion of Some Cyclic Codes, web site available at http://vega.c.oka-pu.jp/˜wadayama/distortion.html, and its properties were verified using the techniques described in P. Koopman, “32-bit Cyclic Redundancy Codes for Internet Applications,” Proceedings of the International Conference on Dependable Systems and Networks (DSN 2002), Washington D.C., June 2002, pp. 459-468. The initialization vector of the register used to generate the header CRC shall be (1A)_(HEX).

With respect to the computation of fHeaderCRC, the Sync Bit, the Frame ID and the Payload Length fields shall be fed into the CRC generator in network order, specifically the Sync Bit shall be shifted in first, followed by the most significant bit of the Frame ID field, followed by subsequent bits of the Frame ID, followed by the most significant bit of the Payload Length field, and followed by subsequent bits of the Payload Length field.

The Header CRC field shall be transmitted such that the most significant bit of fHeaderCRC is transmitted first with the remaining bits of fHeaderCRC being transmitted in decreasing order of significance.

A detailed description of how to generate or verify the Header CRC is given further on.

Cycle Counter (6 bits—fCycleCount)

The Cycle Counter field indicates the transmitting node's view of the cycle counter vCycle at the time of frame transmission.

The Cycle Counter field shall be set to fCycleCount=vCycle before transmitting a frame.

The Cycle Counter field shall be transmitted such that the most significant bit of fCycleCount is transmitted first with the remaining bits of fCycleCount being transmitted in decreasing order of significance.

FlexRay Payload Segment

The FlexRay payload segment contains 0 to 254 bytes (0 to 127 two-byte-words) of data written by the host.

Because of the limitations imposed on the representation of the length of the payload segment by the Payload Length field (fPayloadLength) of the header segment, the FlexRay Payload Segment shall consist of an even number of bytes. (The length of the payload segment indicated by fPayloadLength correlates with the number of bytes that are sent on the communication channel. It does not necessarily define the number of bytes used by the application in the payload section. The data provided by the application may be shorter than the payload section. A padding function in the communication controller fills the “missing” bytes if the configured transmit buffer is smaller than the configured payload length.)

Note that the frame CRC described below has a Hamming distance of six for payload lengths up to 248 bytes. For payload lengths greater than 248 bytes the CRC only provides a Hamming distance of four.

The first two bytes of the FlexRay payload segment may optionally be used as a message ID field, allowing receiving nodes to filter or steer data based on the contents of this field.

The subsequent bytes of the payload segment may optionally be used as network management vector. The length of the network management vector is configured by gNetworkManagementVectorLength during CC_SoftReset and cannot be changed during the protocol startup phase (PSP) or during the protocol operation phase (POP). gNetworkManagementVectorLength can be configured between 0 and 12 bytes, inclusive. The network management indication bit in the frame header indicates whether the payload section contains the network management vector (Frames that contain network management data are not restricted to containing only network management data—the other bytes in the payload section may be used to convey additional, non-Network Management data.).

If the optional message ID field is not used the network management vector (if present) starts with the first byte of the payload section.

The individual bytes within the Payload Segment shall be transmitted such that the most significant bit of the byte is transmitted first with the remaining bits of the byte being transmitted in decreasing order of significance.

FlexRay Trailer Segment

The FlexRay trailer segment contains a single field, a 24-bit CRC for the frame.

Frame CRC (24 bits—fFrameCRC)

The Frame CRC field contains a Cyclic Redundancy Check code (CRC) computed over the Header and Payload segments of the frame. The computation includes all fields in these segments (This includes the header CRC, as well as any Communication Controller-generated “padding” bytes that may be included in the Payload segment.).

The CRC is computed using the same generator polynomial on both channels. The CRC polynomial shall be x ²⁴ +x ²² +x ²⁰ +x ¹⁹ +x ¹⁸ +x ¹⁶ +x ¹⁴ +x ¹³ +x ¹¹ +x ¹⁰ +x ⁸ +x ⁷ +x ⁶ +x ³ +x+132 (x+1)²(x ¹¹ +x ⁹ +x ⁸ +x ⁷ +x ⁵ +x ³ +x ² +x+1)(x ¹¹ +x ⁹ +x ⁸ +x ⁷ +x ⁶ +x ³+1)

This 24-bit CRC polynomial generates a code that has a minimum Hamming distance of 6 for codewords up to 2048 bits in length and a minimum Hamming distance of 4 for codewords up to 4094 bits in length. The codeword consists of all frame data and the CRC. This corresponds to H=6 protection for FlexRay frames with payload lengths up to 248 bytes and H=4 protection for longer payload lengths. This polynomial was obtained from G. Castagnoli, S. Bräuer, and M. Herrmann, “Optimization of Cyclic Redundancy-Check Codes with 24 and 32 Parity Bits,” IEEE Trans. Commun., vol. 41, pp. 883-892, June 1993., and its properties were verified using the techniques described in P. Koopman, “32-bit Cyclic Redundancy Codes for Internet Applications,” Proceedings of the International Conference on Dependable Systems and Networks (DSN 2002), Washington D.C., June 2002, pp. 459-468.

The generation process of the CRC differs slightly depending on which channel the frame is being transmitted (Different initialization vectors are defined to prevent a node from communicating if it has crossed channels, connection of a single channel node to the wrong channel, or shorted channels (both controller channels connected to the same physical channel).):

-   -   The initialization vector of the CRC generator shall be (FE DC         BA)_(HEX) for frames sent on channel A.     -   The initialization vector of the CRC generator shall be (AB CD         EF)_(HEX) for frames sent on channel B.

With respect to the computation of fFrameCRC, the frame fields shall be fed into the CRC generator in network order (that is, the first thing into the generator is the most significant bit of the Reserved Bit field, and the last thing into the generator is the least significant bit of the last byte of the Payload Segment).

The Frame CRC field shall be transmitted such that the most significant bit of fFrameCRC is transmitted first with the remaining bits of fFrameCRC being transmitted in decreasing order of significance.

A detailed description of how to generate or verify the Frame CRC is given further on.

Null Frames

Under certain conditions a transmitting node may send a “null frame” which is a frame that contains no valid data in the payload segment. Such a frame is sent when a transmitter is configured to send in a given slot and channel of the static segment but is not in possession of valid data at the time when transmission of that slot is scheduled to begin. This could be caused by the host locking a transmit buffer and not releasing it before transmission time, or by a transmitter being configured for cycle counter filtering (see further on) and the current cycle counter does not match the filter. Additionally, a transmitting controller may indicate a null frame if the host has not successfully updated the data since the last scheduled transmission. This behavior is optional (see further on). The transmitter indicates a null frame by setting fNullFrameIndicationBit=1.

A Null Frame consists of

-   -   A header segment as described above, which has         fNullFrameIndicationBit=1     -   A payload segment with all bits set to zero     -   A trailer segment as described above.

Null frames shall only be sent in the static segment, hence the payload length is defined by gPayloadLengthStatic.

The payload segment of a Null Frame shall be ignored by the receiver (The receiver uses the data in the Payload Segment for the Frame CRC checking process, but otherwise ignores the data.) but other fields of the frame may contain useful data (For example, the clock synchronization algorithm may make use of the arrival time of null frames with the Sync Bit field set to 1 (provided all other criteria for that frame's acceptance are met).).

byteflight Frame Format

An overview of the byteflight frame format is given in FIG. 35. The frame shall be transmitted on the network such that the header segment appears first, followed by the payload segment, and then followed by the trailer segment, which is transmitted last.

byteflight Header Segment

The byteflight header segment consists of 2 bytes that contain several distinct fields; the Frame ID, a field of reserved bits, and the frame length. These fields are described in detail in the following sections.

Within the header segment the fields shall be transmitted in the order indicated in FIG. 35, moving from left to right (i.e., the Frame ID field is transmitted first and the Frame Length field is transmitted last).

Frame ID (8 bits—fBfFrameID)

This field contains the Frame Identifier for the frame. Each frame that may be transmitted in a cluster has a frame ID fBfFrameID assigned.

The frame ID fBfFrameID is a unique number per communication cycle and defines the minislot in which the frame is transmitted.

Valid values for fBfFrameID range from (0000 0001)₂ to (1111 1111)₂.

The Frame ID field shall be transmitted such that the most significant bit of fBfFrameID is transmitted first with the remaining bits of fBfFrameID being transmitted in decreasing order of significance.

Special Application Bits (4 bits—fBfSpecialApplBits)

This field consists of four bits that may are used by the application.

The fBfSpecialApplBits field shall be transmitted such that the most significant bit of fBfSpecialApplBits is transmitted first with the remaining bits of fBfSpecialApplBits being transmitted in decreasing order of significance.

The fBfSpecialApplBits field in the transmitting node is written by the host (The four special application bits are written by the host of the transmitting node. The communication controllers on all nodes (transmitter and receiver) treat these bits as application data.).

Frame Length (4 bits—fBfFrameLength)

The Frame Length consists of a single parameter, fBfFrameLength, which indicates the number of data bytes that are contained in the payload segment of the frame.

The frame length field does not include the number of bytes within the header and the trailer segment of the byteflight frame.

The shortest possible length is 0 bytes (fBfFrameLength=(0000)₂), the longest length is 12 bytes (fBfFrameLength=(1100)₂). A frame which is received with fBfFrameLength greater than 12 shall be treated as an error.

The Frame Length field shall be transmitted such that the most significant bit of fBfFrameLength is transmitted first with the remaining bits of fBfFrameLength being transmitted in decreasing order of significance.

byteflight Payload Segment

The byteflight payload segment consists of 0 to 12 bytes of data written by the host.

The individual bytes within the Payload Segment shall be transmitted such that the most significant bit of the byte is transmitted first with the remaining bits of the byte being transmitted in decreasing order of significance.

byteflight Trailer Segment

The byteflight trailer segment consists of 2 bytes that contain two distinct fields; a Frame CRC and the Frame Completion Bit. These fields are described in detail in the following sections.

Within the trailer segment the fields shall be transmitted in the order indicated in FIG. 35, moving from left to right (i.e., the Frame CRC field is transmitted first and the Frame Completion Bit is transmitted last).

Frame CRC (15 bits—fBfFrameCRC)

The Frame CRC field contains a Cyclic Redundancy Check code (CRC) computed over the Header and Payload segments of the frame. The computation includes all fields in these segments.

The CRC generator polynomial shall be x¹⁵+x¹⁴+x¹⁰+x⁸+x⁷+x⁴+x³+1

This is the same polynomial as used in the CAN protocol as defined in ISO/DIS 11898-1:1999, Road vehicles—Controller area network (CAN)—Part 1: Data Link Layer and Physical Signaling, International Standards Organization, 1999. It is optimized for code words of up to 127 bits.

The initialization vector of the byteflight Frame CRC shall be (00)_(Hex).

With respect to the computation of fBfFrameCRC, the frame fields shall be fed into the CRC generator in network order (that is, the first thing into the generator is the most significant bit of the Frame ID field, and the last thing into the generator is the least significant bit of the last byte of the Payload Segment).

The Frame CRC field shall be transmitted such that the most significant bit of fBfFrameCRC is transmitted first with the remaining bits of fBfFrameCRC being transmitted in decreasing order of significance.

A detailed description of how to generate or verify the Frame CRC is given below.

Frame Completion Bit (1 bit—fBfFCB)

The Frame Completion Bit, fBfFCB, is a single bit whose sole purpose is to allow the byteflight frame to end on a byte boundary.

The Frame Completion Bit field shall be transmitted with fBfFCB=0.

Dependencies

Message ID (Optional, 16 bits—fMessageID)

The first two bytes of the payload segment of the FlexRay frame format can be used as receiver filterable data called Message ID.

-   -   The Message ID is an application determinable number that         describes the contents of the data segment.     -   The Message ID is 16 bits long.     -   At the transmitter the Message ID is written by the host as         application data. The communication controller has no knowledge         about the message ID and no mechanism inside the communication         controller is based on the message ID.     -   At the receiver the storage of a frame may depend on the result         of a filtering process that makes use of the Message ID. All         frame checks done in Frame Processing (see further on) are         unmodified (i.e., are not a function of the Message ID). The use         of the Message ID filter is defined in the Host Interface         chapter (see further on).     -   The optional use of Message IDs must be consistent in all frames         in the whole cluster (Consistency means that a Message ID is         used for ALL frames (both static and dynamic) in a cluster or it         is not used for ANY frame. Partial use of the Message ID is not         possible.).     -   If this mechanism is used, the most significant bit of         fMessageID shall be placed in the most significant bit of the         first byte of the payload segment. Subsequent bits of fMessageID         shall be placed in the next payload bits in order of decreasing         significance.         Frame CRC Calculation

The Frame CRC calculation is done inside the communication controller before transmission or after reception of a frame. It is part of the frame transmission process or the frame reception process, respectively.

The variable vCheckCRC_x denotes the result of the check of the consistency of a frame and its CRC for the respective communication channel. The calculation may be described by the following pseudocode.

The values of the protocol constants cCrcSize, cCrcInit_x, and cCrcPolynomial depend on the frame format used, i.e. the FlexRay or byteflight frame format. For the FlexRay frame format the value of cCrcInit_x also depends on the channel that is used to transmit the frame:

FlexRay frame format / channel A: cCrcSize = 24; // size of the register is 24 bits cCrcInit = (FE DC BA)_(HEX); // initialization vector of channel A cCrcPolynomial = (5D 6D CB)_(HEX); // hexadecimal representation of the CRC polynomial FlexRay frame f rmat / channel A: cCrcSize = 24; // size of the register is 24 bits cCrcInit = (AB CD EF)_(HEX); // initialization vector of channel B cCrcPolynomial = (5D 6D CB)_(HEX); // hexadecimal representation of the CRC polynomial byteflight frame format: cCrcSize = 15; // size of the register is 15 bits cCrcInit = 0_(HEX); // initialization vector cCrcPolynomial = (45 99)_(HEX); // hexadecimal representation of the CRC polynomial

Short Description: Initialize the CRC shift register with the appropriate initialization value. As long as bits (vNextBit_x) from the header or payload segment of the frame are available the while-loop is executed. The number of bits available in the payload segment is derived from the payload length field. The bits (Transmitters use the bit sequence that will be fed into the coding algorithm, including any controller generated padding bits. Receivers use the decoded sequence as received from the decoding algorithm (i.e., after the removal of any coding sequences (e.g. Byte Start Sequences, Frame Start Sequences, etc.)).) of the header and payload segments are fed into the CRC register by using the variable vNextBit_x, bit by bit, in network order, e.g., for the FlexRay frame format the first bit used as vNextBit_x is the Reserved Bit field, and the last bit used is the least significant bit of the last byte of the Payload Segment.

Procedure 1: Frame CRC Calculation

// Initialize the CRC register vCrcReg_x(cCrcSize − 1 : 0) = cCrcInit_x; while(vNextBit_x) // determine if the CRC polynomial has to be applied by taking // the exclusive OR of the most significant bit of the CRC // register and the next bit to be fed into the register vCrcNext_x = vNextBit_x EXOR vCrcReg_x(cCrcSize − 1); // Shift the CRC register left by one bit vCrcReg_x (cCrcSize − 1 : 1) = vCrcReg_x(cCRCSize − 2 : 0); vCrcReg_x(0) = 0; // Apply the CRC polynomial if necessary if vCrcNext_x vCrcReg_x(cCrcSize − 1:0) = (vCrcReg_x(cCrcSize − 1 : 0) EXOR cCrcPolynomial; end; // end if end; // end while loop

The following comparison is only done in the receiver.

// compare fFrameCRC_x (frame CRC received on channel x) with CRC // register content if (vCrcReg_x == fFrameCRC_x) vCheckCRC_x = “T”; else vCheckCRC_x = “F”; end; Header CRC Calculation

Among its other uses, the Header CRC field of a FlexRay frame is intended to provide protection against improper modification of the Sync Bit field by a faulty communication controller (CC). The CC that is responsible for transmitting a particular frame shall not compute the Header CRC field for that frame. Rather, the CC shall be configured with the appropriate Header CRC for a given frame by the host. This makes it unlikely that a fault in the CC that causes the value of a Sync Bit to change would result in a frame that is accepted by other nodes in the network because the CRC would not match. Removing the capability of the transmitter to generate the CRC minimizes the possibility that a message that results from a CC fault would have a proper header CRC.

The CC that is responsible for the reception of a frame shall perform the CRC computations required to check the correctness of the Header CRC field relative to the other information that is received in the frame.

The variable vCheckHeaderCRC_x denotes the result of the check for the respective communication channel. The check may be described by the following pseudocode.

The value of the protocol constants cHCrcSize, cHCrcInit, and cHCrcPolynomial are defined as follows:

FlexRay header CRC calculation: cHCrcSize = 11; // size of the register  is 11 bits cHCrcInit := (1A)_(HEX); // initialization vector of  Header CRC for both channels cHCrcPolynomial := (3 85)_(HEX); // hexadecimal representation  of the Header CRC polynomial

Short description: Initialize the CRC shift register with the appropriate initialization value. As long as bits (vHNextBit_x) from the Sync Bit, Frame ID and Payload Length fields of the frame are available the while-loop is executed. The number of bits available is fixed (at 20) by to the frame format definition. The bits of the indicated fields are fed into the CRC register by using the variable vHNextBit_x, bit by bit, in network order, i.e., the Sync Bit followed by the most significant bit of the Frame ID field followed by subsequent bits of the Frame ID, followed by the most significant bit of the Payload Length field, and followed by subsequent bits of the Payload Length field. Transmitters use the bit sequence that will be fed into the coding algorithm. Receivers use the decoded sequence as received from the decoding algorithm (i.e., after the removal of any coding sequences, etc.).

The same procedure is used as described in Procedure 1 except starting with:

-   -   vNextBit_x=vHNextBit_x;     -   cCrcSize=cHCrcSize;     -   cCrcInit=cHCrcInit;     -   cCrcPolynomial=cHCrcPolynomial;

The following comparison is only done in the receiver:

if (vCrcReg_x == fHeaderCRC_x) // compare fHeaderCRC_x  (Header CRC received on vCheckHeaderCRC_x = “T”; // channel x) with Header  CRC register content else vCheckHeaderCRC_x = “F”; end;

The following covers the frame processing, and in particular frame reception procedure of the FlexRay protocol.

Overview

The protocol engine related frame processing consists of three steps: The first step is called frame decoding. In this step frame decoding takes place. Frame decoding shall occur according to the decoding rules specified above. The next step is called the frame reception. In this step the syntactical correctness of the frame is assured. The last step is called frame acceptance. In this step the protocol specific data that is contained in the header of each frame such as the cycle count is checked against reference values.

Frame Reception

Frame reception specifies how the syntactical correctness of a frame is established.

Syntactical Correctness

In general a frame is considered syntactically correct if no coding violations are detected during the reception of the frame, the header CRC is valid, the frame CRC is valid, and the number of bytes received corresponds to the frame length that is contained in the frame header.

Thus a frame shall be considered as syntactically correct when all of the following conditions are met:

-   -   1. Beginning with the start of the reception the five frame         header bytes are received without a coding error. The violation         of this condition is considered to be a header-coding error         (S_HeaderCodingError).     -   2. The header CRC verification according to the CRC calculation         procedure returned with the result ‘valid’. The violation of         this condition is considered to be an invalid-header-CRC error         (S_InvalidHeaderCRCError).     -   3. The remaining (2*fPayloadLength+3) bytes of the frame are         received without a coding error using the fPayloadLength value         extracted from the header of the frame. The violation of this         condition is considered to be a frame-coding error         (S_FrameCodingError).     -   4. The frame CRC verification according to the CRC calculation         procedure returned with the result ‘valid’. The violation of         this condition is considered to be an invalid-frame-CRC error         (S_InvalidFrameCRCError).     -   5. The frame end is reached without a coding error. The         violation of this condition is considered to be a frame-coding         error (S_FrameCodingError).     -   6. The node does not initiate an own transmission while         reception is ongoing on the same channel. The violation of this         condition is considered to be a transmission-conflict error         (S_TransmissionConflictError).

The error-free reception of five frame header bytes, i.e. condition 1 of a syntactically correct frame is met, is considered to be a successful-header reception (S_SuccessfulHeaderReception).

A syntactically correct frame is considered to be a correct frame (S_CorrectFrame).

Frame Reception State Diagram

FIG. 36 shows the frame reception state diagram. The transitions are summarized in Table 8.

TABLE 8 Frame Reception State Transitions Transition Direction Action taken from to Condition for Transition on Transition FR_Idle FR_Active Transition of the channel state from channel idle to channel active FR__Active FR_Idle Transition of the channel state from channel active to channel idle. In this case a syntactically correct frame was received. FR_Active FR_Abort header-coding error detected OR invalid-header-CRC error detected OR frame-coding error detected OR invalid-frame-CRC error detected FR_Abort FR_Idle Transition of the channel state from channel active to channel idle FR_Soft FR_Idle Soft reset released AND channel is Reset in the channel idle state All FR_Soft Soft reset initiated states Reset FR_Idle State

The reception state machine shall remain in the FR_Idle state as long as the channel is idle. In this state the node waits for the start of a reception, which occurs once the channel becomes active. The start of a reception shall cause a transition to the FR_Active state.

FR_Active State

Frame reception occurs in the FR_Active state. Hereby the syntactical correctness of a frame shall be established. The occurrence of a S_HeaderCodingError, S_InvalidHeaderCRCError, S_FrameCodingError, S_InvalidFrameCRCError shall cause a transition to the FR_Abort state.

The detection of idle at the end of a syntactically correct frame shall cause a transition to the FR_Idle state.

FR_Abort State

The reception state machine shall remain in the FR_Abort state until the channel idle state is reached on the respective channel. Once the channel idle state is reached the reception state shall change to FR_Ready.

FR_SoftReset State

The reception state machine shall remain in the FR_SoftReset state as long as the communication controller is in the CC_SoftReset state and the respective communication channel is not in the idle state.

Frame Acceptance

Frame acceptance differs depending on the current protocol phase. Whether a frame is accepted in a specific phase or not depends on the outcome of a number of checks.

FlexRay distinguishes between the startup acceptance criteria, the static segment acceptance criteria and the dynamic segment acceptance criteria.

Startup Acceptance Criteria

The startup acceptance criteria are applied when the node is in the integration path of the startup phase.

Thus a frame shall be considered compliant with the startup acceptance criteria when all of the following conditions are met that are applied to a correct frame:

-   -   1. The frame ID included in the header of the frame is not         larger than the number of the last static slot         gNumberOfStaticSlots.     -   2. The sync bit is set.     -   3. The payload length included in the header of the frame is         equal to the globally configured value of the payload length of         a static frame held in gPayloadLengthStatic. The violation of         this constraint is considered to be a payload-length-static         error (S_PayloadLengthStaticError).

A frame that complies with the startup acceptance criteria is considered to be a valid-startup frame (S_ValidStartupFrame).

If the cycle count value included in the header of a valid-startup frame is even then the frame is considered to be a valid-even-startup frame (S_ValidEvenStartupFrame).

If the cycle count value included in the header of a valid-startup frame is odd then the frame is considered to be a valid-odd-startup frame (S_ValidOddStartupFrame).

Static Segment Acceptance Criteria

The static segment acceptance criteria are applied when the node is operating in the static segment prior to having the schedule in place.

A frame shall be considered compliant with the static segment acceptance criteria when all of the following conditions are met that are applied to a correct frame:

-   -   1. The payload length included in the header of the frame is         equal to the globally configured value of the payload length of         a static frame held in gPayloadLengthStatic. The violation of         this constraint is considered to be a payload-length-static         error (S_PayloadLengthStaticError).     -   2. The frame ID included in the header of the frame is equal to         the value of the slot counter vSlotCounter[ch] both at the start         of the frame as well as at the end of the frame. The violation         of this constraint is considered to be a frame-ID error         (S_FrameIDError). FIG. 37 illustrates this constraint.     -   3. The cycle count included in the header of the frame is equal         to the value of the cycle counter vCycle both at the start of         the frame as well as at the end of the frame. The violation of         this constraint is considered to be a cycle-count error         (S_CycleCountError).

A frame that complies with the static segment acceptance criteria is considered to be a valid-static frame (S_ValidStaticFrame).

Dynamic Segment Acceptance Criteria

The dynamic segment acceptance criteria are applied when the node is operating in the dynamic segment.

A frame shall be considered compliant with the dynamic segment acceptance criteria when all of the following conditions are met that are applied to a correct frame:

-   -   1. The frame ID included in the header of the frame is equal to         the value of the slot counter vSlotCounter[ch] at the start of         the frame. The violation of this constraint is called a frame-ID         error (S_FrameIDError). FIG. 38 illustrates this requirement.     -   2. The cycle count included in the header of the frame is equal         to the value of the cycle counter vCycle both at the start of         the frame as well as at the end of the frame. The violation of         this constraint is considered to be a cycle-count error         (S_CycleCountError).     -   3. The sync bit included in the header is set to ‘0’. The         violation of this constraint is considered to be a sync-bit         error (S_SyncBitError).

A frame that complies with the dynamic segment acceptance criteria is considered to be a valid-dynamic frame (S_ValidDynamicFrame).

Clock Synchronization

Introduction

In a distributed communication system every node has its own clock. Due to temperature fluctuations, voltage fluctuations, and production tolerances of the timing source (e.g. oscillator), the internal time base diverges between the nodes after a short time, even if all internal time bases of the nodes are started concurrently.

A basic assumption for a time-triggered system is that every node in the cluster has practically the same view of time and this common global view of time is used as the local time base for each node. In this context, “the same” means that the differences between any two nodes' views of the global time are bounded to a specified tolerance limit and that the maximum value for this difference is known as the precision.

The primary task of the clock synchronization function is to ensure the time differences between the nodes of a cluster stay within the precision.

Two types of time differences between nodes can be distinguished:

-   -   Offset (phase) differences and     -   Rate (frequency) differences

To synchronize the local time base of different nodes, methods are known for offset correction and for rate correction. In FlexRay a combination of both methods is used.

Clock Synchronization Modes

FlexRay supports both time-triggered and event-triggered clock synchronization. This chapter describes the time-triggered modes. Further on it is described how the event-triggered mode works. The appropriate clock synchronization mode should be chosen based upon the requirements of the applications to be supported by the cluster. The cluster must then be configured accordingly. Table 9 illustrates the cluster configuration conditions for the various clock synchronization modes.

FlexRay supports two modes for performing time-triggered clock synchronization.

TABLE 9 Configuration Rules for Various Clock Synchronization Modes Operation Mode: FlexRay byteflight Multi-Master, Single-Master, Single-Master, Synchronization distributed clock with rate without rate mode: sync correction correction Number of Sync Nodes: [2 . . . 16] 1 1 Number of Static Slots: ≧ number of sync ≧1 0 masters Number of Sync Frames: = number of sync 1 0 nodes Number of Cold Starters at least one exactly one exactly one Single-Master Clock Synchronization

With Single Master Clock Synchronization, each node individually synchronizes itself to the cluster by observing the timing of transmitted sync frames from the clock sync master.

-   -   Single-master clock synchronization shall be performed if the         static segment is configured with only one static slot         (gNumberOfStaticSlots=1).     -   The node that owns the static slot must transmit sync frames in         this slot in every cycle. This node is the only node in the         cluster that transmits sync frames. It is the clock         synchronization master and the remaining nodes are slaves.     -   All other nodes shall receive the sync frames and perform the         clock synchronization algorithm as if the node were in a cluster         using distributed clock synchronization (see below).     -   The behavior in case of a fault is described further on. The         conditions to signal an fault are different for the master and         for the salves and they are listed in Table 10 below.         Distributed Clock Synchronization

With Distributed Clock Synchronization, each node individually synchronizes itself to the cluster by observing the timing of transmitted sync frames from other nodes. A fault-tolerant algorithm is used.

-   -   Distributed clock synchronization shall only be performed if the         cluster is configured with a static segment         (gNumberOfStaticSlots>1).     -   At least two nodes shall transmit sync frames.

The time representation and the principles of the (distributed) clock synchronization are described in detail below.

Differences Between Distributed and Single Master Clock Synchronization

In both modes (single-master and distributed clock synchronization) the same clock synchronization algorithm is used. Differences between both modes exist

-   -   in the configuration (see Table 6),     -   in the start-up (see further on) and     -   signaling of a fault to the error management.

The following tables list the relevant differences for the error signaling.

TABLE 10 Differences in the Error Signaling Between Distributed and Single Master Clock Synchronization Multi-Master, Single-Master, distributed with rate Synchronization mode: clock sync correction Missing Rate Correction master no sync frame never Signal (MRCS) set to 1 pair in an slave even/odd no sync frame double cycle pair in an even/odd double cycle Missing Offset Correction master no sync frame never Signal (MOCS) set to 1 in odd cycle slave no sync frame in odd cycle Clock Correction Limit master calculated never Reached (CCLR) set to 1 offset or slave rate calculated correction offset or value outside rate the specified correction limits value outside the specified limits Time Representation Local Time Representation

-   -   Internally, nodes can time their behavior with microtick         resolution. Microticks are time units derived from the         (external) oscillator clock tick, optionally using a prescaler.         Microticks are controller-specific units. They may have         different durations in different controllers. The precision of a         node's local time difference measurements is a microtick.     -   Local controller time is based on cluster-wide synchronized         cycle and macrotick values provided by the distributed clock         synchronization mechanism. Finer resolution local timing shall         be done using the node-specific microtick. The value         vMacrotick.vMicrotick represents the controller local view of         time within a given cycle.     -   vCycle is the (controller-local) cycle number and is increased         once every communication round. At any given time all nodes         should have the same value for vCycle (except due to imperfect         synchronization at cycle boundaries).     -   Cycle counter values (vCycle) range from zero (00 0000)₂ to         cCycleMax (11 1111)₂.     -   When cCycleMax is reached, the cycle counter vCycle shall be         reset to zero (00 0000)₂ in the next communication cycle (see         Procedure 3)     -   vMacrotick is the current value of the (controller-local)         macrotick counter.     -   gMacroPerCycle defines the (integer) number of macroticks per         cycle (see FIG. 39).     -   Within tolerances, the duration of a macrotick is constant         throughout the cluster on synchronized nodes.     -   Every node in the cluster has its own local view of the global         time. The local view of global time is represented by a vector         consisting of the current cycle number (vCycle) and the current         macrotick value (vMacrotick). The value vCycle.vMacrotick is the         (controller-local) view of the global time in the cluster. It is         visible to the application.     -   pMicroPerMacroNom is the (controller-specific) nominal number of         microticks per macrotick.     -   vRateCorrection is the (integer) number of microticks that shall         be added to the pMicroPerMacroNom*gMacroPerCycle microticks in         the current cycle to produce the correct cycle length.         vRateCorrection may be negative. The value of vRateCorrection is         determined by the clock synchronization algorithm. It may only         change once (usually at the beginning) per cycle.     -   pMicroOverheadPerCycleNom is the initial configuration value of         vRateCorrection.     -   The duration of the current controller-local macrotick is an         integer multiple of controller-local microticks and is         represented by vMicroPerMacroCorr. The value of         vMicroPerMacroCorr within one controller may change from         macrotick to macrotick.     -   In any given cycle, vRateCorrection microticks shall be         distributed across the gMacroPerCycle macroticks comprising the         cycle in order to adjust the cycle length to the proper         duration. Consequently, vMicroPerMacroCorr does not remain         constant. In general, vRateCorrection is nonzero and is not a         multiple of gMacroPerCycle. Consequently, the process of         distributing the vRateCorrection microticks across the         gMacroPerCycle macroticks conceptually introduces fractional         macroticks.     -   At the beginning of the first communication cycle the “local         time variables” shall be initialized (see Procedure 2).         Procedure 2: Initialization of a Node

[vCycle, vMacrotick, vMicrotick, vMicroPerMacroCorr] = NodeInitialization( ) // vCycle = 0; // reset cycle counter vMacrotick = 0; // reset macrotick counter vMicrotick = 0; // reset microtick counter vMicroPerMacroCorr = // set the predefined pMicroPerMacroNom; vRateCorrection = // value for pMicroOverheadPerCycleNom; // microticks per macrotick

-   -   The initialization of the first three values differs if the node         reintegrates into a running cluster (see Chapter “Wakeup,         Startup and Reintegration”).         Procedure 3: Incrementing the Cycle Count

[vMacrotick, vCycle] = ChangeOfCycleCount(vMacrotick, vCycle) if vMacrotick ≧ gMacroPerCycle // vCycle++; // increment cycle counter vMacrotick = 0; // reset macrotick counter if vCycle > cCycleMax // vCycle = 0; // reset cycle counter end; // end; //

-   -   The host shall be able to read the cycle counter and the         macrotick counter. The update of the cycle counter shall be         atomic with the macrotick counter. An atomic action is an action         where no interruptions is possible.     -   The duration of a Macrotick shall be an integer number of a         Microticks, however, the number of microticks per macrotick may         differ from macrotick to macrotick. Before the first correction         value is calculated the clock synchronization algorithm shall         work with nominal macroticks, using         vMicroPerMacroCorr=pMicroPerMacroNom+pMicroOverheadPerCycleNom         (see Procedure 4).     -   The number of microticks per nominal macrotick may differ         between nodes and depends on the oscillator frequency and the         prescaler.     -   The duration of one cycle shall be an integer number of a         macroticks. The number of macroticks per cycle is intended to be         identical in all nodes in a cluster (see FIG. 39).         Procedure 4: Incrementing the Macrotick Counter

[vMicrotick, vMacrotick] = IncrementMacrotickCounter(vMicroPerMacroCorr, vMicrotick, vMacrotick) // uses microtick pulses while(1) // wait(Microtick_duration); // every microtick increase vMicrotick++; // microtick counter by one if vMicrotick ≧ vMicroPerMacroCorr // vMicrotick = 0; // Reset microtick counter vMacrotick++; // Increment macrotick counter end; // end; //

-   -   For a given cycle (without offset correction) the average length         of a macrotick is given by         pMicroPerMacroNom+vRateCorrection/gMacroPerCycle.         Procedure 5: Uniform Distribution of Microticks

The following example only addresses the distribution of microticks over the macroticks comprising the cycle. The more complete solution must also deal with offset corrections and is described in Procedure 10.

InitRateStartOfCycle(vRateCorrection) // execute at beginning of cycle // sufficient every second cycle vMicroPerCycle = gMacroPerCycle * pMicroPerMacroNom // total number of microticks + vRateCorrection; // for this cycle vRatioMicroMacro = vMicroPerCycle/gMacroPerCycle; // real division, not integer vIntegerRatio = Int[vRatioMicroMacro]; // Integer part of ratio vRest = vRatioMicroMacro − vIntegerRatio; // Fractional part of ratio vRemainingSumOfFractionalParts = vRest; // Initialization values vDeltaCorrect=0; // for variables // DistributeMicroOverMacroRate // while(1) // vMicroPerMacroRateCorr = vIntegerRatio + vDeltaCorrect; // Calculate new MicroPerMacro vRemainingSumOfFractionalParts = vRemainingSumOfFractionalParts + vRest; // fractional history term if vRemainingSumOfFractionalParts ≧ 1 // If sum of fractional vDeltaCorrect = 1; // parts becomes greater vRemainingSumOfFractionalParts = vRemainingSumOfFractionalParts −1; // increase macrotick length by 1 else // vDeltaCorrect = 0 // vMicroPerMacroCorr = vMicroPerMacroRateCorr; // if no offset correction present end; // [vMicrotick, vMacrotick] = IncrementMacrotickCounter(vMicroPerMacroCorr, vMicrotick, vMacrotick)

Notes on the above Procedure:

-   -   Offset correction has an additional influence. Therefore there         is a difference between the variables vMicroPerMacroCorr and         vMicroPerMacroRateCorr.     -   Since there is no real division available in hardware, the         implementation will not precisely replicate the above procedure.         Most likely the variable vMicroPerMacroCorr will not be         explicitly calculated in hardware.     -   As is typically true with pseudocode, the above procedure         provides insight into the behavior of the mechanism, but not its         implementation.         Global Time Representation

In a FlexRay node activities, including communication, shall be based on the concept global time, even though each individual node maintains its own view of it. It is the clock synchronism mechanism that differentiates the FlexRay cluster from other node collections with independent clock mechanisms. The global time is a vector of two values, the cycle ((cycle counter)) and the macrotick counter ((cycle time)).

General Concepts

-   -   The node (or nodes in the case of a startup with collisions)         that transmits the first CAS during startup, shall initialize         the cycle counter and the cycle time to zero at the beginning of         the communication cycle following the transmission of the CAS.         See above for details.     -   The duration of a static slot gdSlot, a communication cycle         gdCycle, and the idle time at the end of a communication cycle         gdNetworkIdle shall be all expressed as an integer number of         macroticks.     -   Each node with pChannels==gChannels that is configured to send         in the static segment of the communication cycle may send at         most one frame per communication cycle with the sync bit set.     -   The sync bit may only be set in frames that are transmitted on         all channels (gChannels—one or two channel configuration).     -   Not all nodes that are configured to send in the static segment         of the communication cycle need to send frames with the sync         field set.     -   The communication controller shall count all correctly received         frames where the sync bit is set. The counter is reset at the         start of the communication cycle. This number of the correct         received sync frames of the previous communication cycle is         presented by vValidSyncFrameCount and shall be accessible to the         host.     -   If a controller receives more than gSyncNodeMax the first         gSyncNodeMax shall be used for clock synchronization.     -   The calculation of the correction values shall take place every         second communication cycle during the network idle time (NIT).

The clock synchronization can be realized with four processes called measurement, calculation, offset correction, and rate correction. The offset correction, measurement, and calculation processes are performed sequentially. Rate correction is performed in parallel to the other three. FIG. 40 shows the relative execution timing of these four processes.

FIG. 41 illustrates the internal structure of the clock synchronization mechanism in more in detail. The blocks in the illustration correspond to the pseudocode procedures in this chapter. The black boxes describe the tasks performed and the adjacent blue text gives the corresponding procedure name. Note: For boxes with no corresponding procedure name (no blue text) there is no procedure that corresponds precisely to the task. Pseudocode fragments for these tasks are interspersed with the text.

Time Measurement

Every node shall measure and store, by channel, the time differences vMeasureChx (in microticks) between the expected and the observed arrival time of all sync frames received during the static segment. Difference observations are marked as invalid until the frame is received completely and has passed the required validity checks.

-   -   The expected arrival time of a frame is the Minislot action         point of the corresponding slot. It is represented by         vExpectedArrivalTime=vMacrotick_(Expected).vMicrotick_(Expected),         where vMacrotick_(Expected) and vMicrotick_(Expected) are the         macrotick and microtick timer values at the instant of the         minislot action point.     -   The observed arrival time of a frame is the instant of reception         of the 1/0-edge in the middle of the first Byte Start Sequence         after the Frame Start Sequence. It is represented by         vObservedArrivalTimeChx=vMacrotick_(observed),vMicrotick_(Observed),         where vMacrotickObserved and vMicrotick_(Observed) are the         macrotick and microtick timer values at the instant of reception         of this edge.     -   The time difference between expected and observed arrival time         is calculated as follow:     -   vMeasureChx=vObservedArrivalTimeChx−vExpectedArrivalTime−gdFrameStartSequence−1         gdbit−pDelayCompensationChx     -   The global parameters gdFrameStartSequence and gdBit are         specified in units of bit times that can differ between nodes if         clock sources with different frequencies are used. Internally         these parameters are represented in microticks.     -   The sync frame validity checks used during startup and         reintegration and during normal operation are described in         Section “Frame Processing”.     -   The time difference measurement shall be done for all channels         p-channels.     -   If there are time difference measurements from more than one         channel for a given sync frame, the smallest value shall be         taken.     -   If only one valid frame is received within a given static slot,         this single observation shall be used for the Time Difference         Measurement.     -   Every node has to be able to store measurement values with their         associated Frame IDs for gSyncNodeMax sync nodes. A counter         vValidSyncFrameCount is increased when a valid sync frame is         received. If a node receives more than gSyncNodeMax sync frames         in one communication cycle it is communication to the Error         Management but uses the first gSyncNodeMax observations for the         calculation of the rate and drift correct values. The counter         vValidSyncFrameCount is set to zero when a new communication         cycle starts.     -   Note, the Frame Identifiers of sync frames expected to be         received are not stored in the configuration of a node.     -   Individual delay compensation values pDelayCompensationChA and         pDelayCompensationChB can be configured for each channel. The         compensation values should be set to the minimum propagation         delay time experienced by any node in the cluster.         Procedure 6: Measurement

The following procedure shall be executed during normal operation following the reception of each frame in the static segment.

[vsMeasureOddList, vsMeasureEvenList] = Measurement(vCycle, vsMeasureOddList, vsMeasureEvenList); if fSyncBit == 1; // sync bit in message set if messageChA == valid // message is valid vMeasureChA = vObservedArrivalTimeChA − // measurement on channel A vExpectedArrivalTimeChA − gdFrameStartSequence − // minus compensation value 1 gdBit − pDelayCompensationChA; // else // vMeasureChA = ‘invalid’; // mark message as invalid end; // if messageChB == valid // message is valid vMeasureChB = vObservedArrivalTimeChB − // measurement on channel B vExpectedArrivalTimeChB − gdFrameStartSequence − // minus compensation value 1 gdBit − pDelayCompensationChB; // else // vMeasureChB = ‘invalid’; // mark message as invalid end; // if vMeasureChA == ‘invalid’ // if vMeasureChB == ‘invalid’ // vMeasureMin = ‘invalid’; // else // vMeasureMin = vMeasureChB; // end; // else // if vMeasureChB == ‘invalid’ // vMeasureMin = vMeasureChA; // else // vMeasureMin = MIN(vMeasureChA, vMeasureChB); // save the minimum value of // both if vMeasureMin ~= ‘invalid’ // if MODULO(vCycle, 2) == 1 // separate in odd and even // cycles vsMeasureOddList = [vsMeasureOddList; [fFrameID, vMeasureMin]]; // to list else // measured value vsMeasureEvenList = [vsMeasureEvenList; [fFrameID, vMeasureMin]]; end; // measured value end; // end; // Correction Term Calculation Fault-Tolerant Midpoint Algorithm

The technique used for the calculation of the correction terms is a fault-tolerant midpoint algorithm (FTA/FTM). The algorithm works as follows (see FIG. 43 and Procedure 7):

-   -   1. The measured values are sorted and the n largest and the n         smallest values are discarded.         -   7. The value of n is adapted dynamically to the number of             values in the sorted list.

TABLE 11 FTA/FTM Term Deletion as a Function of List Size Number of Values n 1-2 0 3-7 1  8-16 2

-   -   -   8. The largest and the smallest of the remaining values are             averaged for the calculation of the midpoint value. The             resulting value is assumed to represent the node's deviation             from the global time base and serves as the correction term             (see FIG. 43).             Procedure 7: FTM/FTA Algorithm

function: vCorrectValue = Midterm(list); n = LENGTH(list); // number of elements in the list if n > 0 // list = SORT(list); // order list by values if n < 3 // k=0 vCorrectValue = (list(1) + list(n)) / 2; // choose largest and smallest value else // if n < 8 // k=1 vCorrectValue = (list(2) + list(n−1)) / 2; // choose second largest and second else // smallest value // k=2 vCorrectValue = (list(3) + list(n−2)) / 2; // choose third largest and third smallest value end; // end; // else // vCorrectValue = 0; // end; //

-   -   If the list contains only one value this value is used for clock         synchronization.         Calculation of the Offset Correction Value     -   1. The Offset Correction Value vOffsetCorrection is a (signed)         integer indicating by how many microticks the node should shift         its start of the cycle.     -   2. Offset calculation shall be finished before start of cycle,         and it may only start after end of last synchronization slot.     -   3. The node's own offset value (most likely zero, depending on         the measurement principle used) shall be included if it         transmits a sync Frame.     -   4. The calculation of the offset correction value shall be done         every communication cycle, but the offset correction shall be         only done in the odd numbered cycles. In even numbered cycles no         offset correction shall be done.     -   5. The calculated offset correction value shall be checked         against the limit values every cycle. If the calculated offset         correction value outside of the allowed range a warning shall be         raised to the host (further behavior is specified in the         following text).     -   6. If the node transmits sync frames, its own offset time shall         be included by adding one instance of the value zero (depending         on measurement method) to the list of measured time difference         values from the last cycle.     -   7. The offset correction value shall be determined by applying         the FTA/FTM to the list of measured time differences.         Procedure 8: Offset Correction Value Calculation

vOffsetCorrection = OffsetCalculation(vsMeasureOddList) list = [ ]; // initialize list list = vsMeasureOddList(:,2) // take all measure values without // frame ID in a list (:,2) = all // lines, second colum) if LENGTH(vsMeasureOddList) == 0 AND SingleMaster == 0 // if no sync frame in the odd cycle MOCS = 1; // was received set the Missing Offset else // Correction Signal to 1 for the Error MOCS = 0; // Signaling otherwise to 0 end; // // if sync_master == 1 AND ErrorState == ‘green’ AND OperationState == (‘ColdStartICW’ OR ‘ColdStartVCW’ OR ‘NormalOperation’) // if node is a sync master (means the // node transmits sync messages) list = [list, 0]; // add one zero value to the list end; // if LENGTH(list) > 0 // at least one value vOffsetCorrection = Midterm(list); // calculate offset correction term else // vOffsetCorrection = 0; // no offset correction end; // Calculation of the Rate Correction Value

-   -   1. The calculation of the rate correction value shall be done         after every second communication cycle, in the odd numbered         cycles (see FIG. 44).     -   2. The rate correction value shall be determined by comparing         the corresponding measured time differences from two successive         cycles. Specifically, a new list of values shall be created         whose elements are calculated by taking the differences between         the most recent cycle's measured time difference and the         previous cycle's measured time difference. Only time values         corresponding to frames passing the validity checks on both         channels shall be used.     -   3. If the node transmits sync frames its own rate correction         influence shall be considered by adding an instance of the value         zero to the list of calculated time difference.     -   4. In the next step the FTA/FTM algorithm described above shall         be applied to the list of time difference values built in the         previous two steps.     -   5. After calculating the correction term, the stored measurement         values shall be deleted so that the next calculation starts with         a new set of values.     -   6. The ideal new rate correction value is the sum of the value         calculated in the previous step and the current correction         value.     -   7. To prevent cluster drift that can result from an accumulation         of rounding errors the rate correction term actually used is not         the ideal rate correction, but a slight modification of this         term towards the configuration value. The modification term is a         positive integer pClusterDriftDamping that is part of node's         static configuration.         Procedure 9: Rate Correction Value Calculation

vRateCorrection = RateCalculation(vsMeasureOddList, vsMeasureEvenList, vCycle, vRateCorrection) if MODULO(vCycle, 2) == 1 // if cycle number is odd for i=1 to LENGTH(vsMeasureOddList) // for all elements of list1 for j=1 to LENGTH(vsMeasureEvenList) // and list2 if vsMeasureOddList(i,1) = vsMeasureEvenList(j,1) // if same frameID diff = vsMeasureOddList(i, 2) − vsMeasureEvenList(i, 2); // build difference vsMeasureDiffList = [vsMeasureDiffList, diff]; // and save in difference list end; // end; // end; // // if LENGTH(vsMeasureDiffList) == 0 AND SingleMaster == 0 // if no sync frame pair was received MRCS = 1; // set the Missing Rate Correction else // Signal to 1 for the Error Signaling MRCS = 0; // otherwise to 0 end; // // if sync_master == 1 AND ErrorState == ‘green’ AND OperationState == (‘ColdStartICW’ OR ‘ColdStartVCW’ OR ‘NormalOperation’) // if node is a sync master vsMeasureDiffList = [vsMeasureDiffList, 0]; // add one instance of zero to list end; // // number of sync frames pairs used vValidSyncFramesCount = LENGTH(vsMeasureDiffList) // for rate correction calculation is // supported to the host if LENGTH(vsMeasureDiffList) > 0 // at least one value in the list vIdealRateCorrection = Midterm(vsMeasureDiffList) + // calculate the rate correction term vRateCorrection; // plus old correction value if vIdealRateCorrection ≧ pMicroOverheadPerCycleNom + pClusterDriftDamping vRateCorrection = vIdealRateCorrection − pClusterDriftDamping; // elseif vIdealRateCorrection ≦ pMicroOverheadPerCycleNom − pClusterDriftDamping vRateCorrection = vIdealRateCorrection + pClusterDriftDamping; // else // vRateCorrection = vIdealRateCorrection; // no damping end; // else // no valid sync frames vRateCorrection = vRateCorrection; // no new rate correction value, end; // take old value; no damping; end; // warning!

-   -   pClusterDriftDamping should be configured in a way that the         damping value in all controllers has nearly the same duration. A         configuration value is used to adapt in case of different         Microtick duration in different controllers.     -   After calculation of the rate correction value the memory for         the measurement values is cleared and marked empty. It should be         clear that the offset correction value is calculated before the         memory is cleared.         External Clock Synchronization (Optional)

During normal operation, two independent clusters can drift significantly (e.g., by the damping factor of each cluster). If synchronous operation is desired across the two clusters, external synchronization is necessary; even though the nodes within each cluster are synchronized. This can be accomplished with the synchronous application of host-deduced rate and offset correction terms to both clusters.

External clock synchronization is an optional feature of a FlexRay controller that means is not required for any controller to meet protocol conformance. However, if this feature is used in a cluster all nodes in this cluster should support this feature in order to make it useful.

-   -   External offset correction shall be performed in the same cycle         in all nodes of a cluster; external rate correction shall be         performed in the same double cycle in all nodes of a cluster.     -   The external correction terms (offset and rate correction terms)         available to the communication controller when the network idle         time starts are the values that are used. If no values are         available the external correction values shall be set to zero         for the next double cycle.     -   The external correction terms shall be checked against limits         and applied following the corresponding tasks are performed for         the internal correction terms. This shall take place during the         Network Idle Time.     -   Following the Network Idle Time, an aggregate rate correction         term consisting of correction components from the internal and         external rate correction terms, shall be applied during the next         two communication cycles.     -   The aggregate offset correction term, consisting of correction         components from the internal and external offset correction         terms, shall be applied in the remainder of the Network Idle         Time, before the next cycle starts.     -   In soft reset, the initial external rate correction may be         accomplished by setting the external rate correction term by the         host.         Value Limitations

Before applying them, the calculated correction values shall be checked against pre-configured limits. These limits define two regions that are referred to as the “red” and “green” regions, where the colors reflect the acceptability of the calculated value (see FIG. 45). The green region is between −gRateCorrectionOut and +gRateCorrectionOut and the red region is outside these boundaries.

If correction values are in the green region, the node is fully synchronized. No further actions are necessary.

If one of the correction values is in the red region, the node is out of synchronization. This corresponds to an error condition. Information on the handling of this situation is specified further on in the text.

-   -   The correction values are in the green region if:         -   −gRateCorrectionOut≦vRateCorrection≦+gRateCorrectionOut AND         -   −gRateCorrectionOut≦vRateCorrection+vRateCorrectionExtern≦+gRateCorrectionOut−gOffsetCorrectionOut≦vOffsetCorrection≦+gOffsetCorrectionOut             AND         -   −gOffsetCorrectionOut≦vOffsetCorrection+vOffsetCorrectionExtern≦+gOffsetCorrectionOut     -   If both correction values are in the green area the correction         is done.     -   −gRateCorrectionOut is the lower boundary and         +gRateCorrectionOut is the upper boundary of the green area for         the rate correction.     -   −gOffsetCorrectionOut is the lower boundary and         +gOffsetCorrectionOut is the upper boundary of the green area         for the offset correction.     -   The correction value is in the red region if         -   −gRateCorrectionOut>vRateCorrection OR         -   +gRateCorrectionOut<vRateCorrection OR         -   −gRateCorrectionOut>vRateCorrection+vRateCorrectionExtern OR         -   +gRateCorrectionOut<vRateCorrection+vRateCorrectionExtern         -   −gOffsetCorrectionOut>vOffsetCorrection OR         -   +gOffsetCorrectionOut<vOffsetCorrection OR         -   −gOffsetCorrectionOut>vOffsetCorrection+vOffsetCorrectionExtern             OR         -   +gOffsetCorrectionOut<vOffsetCorrection+vOffsetCorrectionExtern     -   The significance of having correction values in the red region         depends on whether the node is in the process of startup, or         not. During normal operation this is to be considered a fault         condition. If vRateCorrection OR         vRateCorrection+vRateCorrectionExtern is outside the specified         area the error signal CCLR is set to 1. If vOffsetCorrection OR         vOffsetCorrection+vOffsetCorrectionExtern is outside the         specified area the error signal CCLR is set to 1, too. During         startup and reintegration this condition is treated differently         (see further on in the text).     -   The values of gRateCorrectionOut and the gOffsetCorrectionOut         are identically specified for all nodes in the cluster. They are         defined in terms of macroticks or fractions of a macrotick. From         these cluster-wide values the configuration data for each node         shall be calculated (measured in microticks). These values shall         be included in the configuration interface. These calculations         are summarized as follows:         pOffsetCorrectionOut=gOffsetCorrectionOut*pMicroPerMacroNom         pRateCorrectionOut=gRateCorrectionOut*pMicroPerMacroNom         Clock Correction

Once calculated, the correction terms shall be used to modify the local clock in a manner that synchronizes it more closely with the global clock. This shall be accomplished by using the correction terms to adjust the number of microticks in each macrotick.

-   -   Rate correction shall be accomplished by modifying the value of         vRateCorrection (see Procedure 9), which shall be subsequently         distributed over the macroticks comprising the next cycle.     -   Offset correction shall be accomplished by modifying the value         of vOffsetCorrection (see Procedure 8), which shall be         subsequently distributed over the macroticks comprising the         current Network Idle Time.         Rate Correction     -   The rate correction term shall be uniformly distributed over the         entire cycle (see FIG. 44).         Procedure 10:Distribution of Microticks over Macroticks

[vIntergerRatio, vRest, vRemainingSumOfFractionalParts, vDeltaCorrect, vOffsetRemainder] = InitStartOfCycle(vRateCorrection, vOffsetCorrection, vRateCorrectionExtern, vOffsetCorrectionExtern) // This replaces InitRateStartOfCycle // execute at the beginning of every vMicroPerCycle = gMacroPerCycle * pMicroPerMacroNom // second cycle + vRateCorrection + vRateCorrectionExtern; // vRatioMicroMacro = vMicroPerCycle / gMacroPerCycle; // vIntegerRatio = Int[vRatioMicroMacro]; // vRest = vRatioMicroMacro − vIntegerRatio; // value between 0 and 1 vRemainingSumOfFractionalParts = vRest; // vDeltaCorrect = 0; // vOffsetRemainder = vOffsetCorrection + vOffsetCorrectionExtern; // Additional variable [vMicroPerMacroCorr, vIntegerRatio, vDeltaCorrect, vRemainingSumOfFractionalParts, vRest, vOffsetRemainder] = DistributeMicroOverMacro(vIntegerRatio, vDeltaCorrect, vRemainingSumOfFractionalParts, vRest, vOffsetRemainder) // This replaces DistributeMicroOver // MacroRate while(1) // vMicroPerMacroRateCorr = vIntegerRatio + vDeltaCorrect; // Rate correction part vRemainingSumOfFractionalParts = vRemainingSumOfFractionalParts + vRest; if vRemainingSumOfFractionalParts ≧ 1 vDeltaCorrect = 1; vRemainingSumOfFractionalParts = vRemainingSumOfFractionalParts −1; else vDeltaCorrect = 0; end; if vMacrotick > OffsetCorrectionStart AND vMacrotick < OffsetCorrectionEnd vMicroPerMacroCorr = OffsetCorrection(vOffsetRemainder, vMicroPerMacroRateCorr) else vMicroPerMacroCorr = vMicroPerMacroRateCorr; end; [vMicrotick, vMacrotick] = IncrementMacrotickCounter(vMicroPerMacroCorr, vMicrotick, Macrotick) end; [vMacrotick, vCycle] = ChangeOfCycleCount(vMacrotick, vCycle) Procedure Notes:

-   -   This is only an example.     -   As previously mentioned, it seems to be unlikely that the         variable vMicroPerMacroRateCorr can be calculated explicitly in         hardware. It is more likely that the IncrementMacrotickCounter         procedure will be an intrinsic part of at least the rate part of         the microtick distribution state machine.         Offset Correction     -   Offset correction shall be done during the network idle time by         increasing or decreasing the size of macroticks depending on the         value of vOffsetCorrection.     -   It is not required that all controllers perform their offset         correction identically. However, they shall perform the offset         correction in the Network Idle Time. The offset correction         should be completed at least one macrotick before the end of the         NIT and therefore before the communication cycle ends.     -   The offset correction term, vOffsetCorrection, is a signed         integer that shall be visible to the application. The maximum         number of microticks by that a macrotick can be increased (due         to offset correction and rate correction combined) shall be         bounded by a configuration constant pMicroPerMacroMax. The         offset correction term, vOffsetCorrection, shall be distributed         across the first, and subsequent macroticks to the limit allowed         by pMicroPerMacroMax, until the total offset term is         distributed.     -   The maximum number of microticks by that a macrotick can be         decreased (due to offset correction and rate correction         combined) shall be bounded by a configuration constant         pMicroPerMacroMin. The offset correction term,         vOffsetCorrection, shall be distributed across the first, and         subsequent macroticks to the limit allowed by pMicroPerMacroMin,         until the total offset term is distributed.     -   pMicroPerMacroMax is the maximum length of a macrotick in         microticks.     -   pMicroPerMacroMin is the minimum length of a macrotick in         microticks.         Procedure 11: Offset Correction

[vMicroPerMacroCorr] = OffsetCorrection(vOffsetCorrection, vMicroPerMacroRateCorr) if networkIdleTime == true // if vOffsetCorrection > 0 // positive offset if vOffsetCorrection > pMicroPerMacroMax − vMicroPerMacroRateCorr; vMicroPerMacroCorr = pMicroPerMacroMax; vOffsetCorrection = vOffsetCorrection − (pMicroPerMacroMax − vMicroPerMacroRateCorr); else // vMicroPerMacroCorr = vOffsetCorrection + vMicroPerMacroRateCorr; vOffsetCorrection = 0; // end; // else // if (vMicroPerMacroRateCorr − pMicroPerMacroMin) < |vOffsetCorrection| vMicroPerMacroCorr = pMicroPerMacroMin; vOffsetCorrection = vOffsetCorrection + (vMicroPerMacroRateCorr − pMicroPerMacroMin); else vMicroPerMacroCorr = vMicroPerMacroRateCorr + vOffsetCorrection; vOffsetCorrection = 0; // end; // end; // else // vMicroPerMacroCorr = vMicroPerMacroCorr; // end; // Clock Synchronization Parameters

The following parameters are specific to clock synchronization

Range/ Name Description Value Units vDeltaCorrect Additional microticks per macrotick necessary μT as a result of clock rate correction vIntegerRatio The integer portion of the corrected — microtick to macrotick ratio vRatioMicroMacro. vMicroOverhead- The integral number of microticks that must μT PerCycle be added to (or subtracted from, if negative) the current cycle in order for the cycle to have the correct length. vMicroPerMacro- μT RateCorr vOffsetRemainder vRatioMicroMacro Floating-point number representing the ratio — of the number of microticks to the number of macroticks per cycle. vRatioMicroMacro = vIntegerRatio + vRest vRemainingSumOf- Floating-point number used for clock rate μT FractionalParts correction that indicates the total fractional microticks that have not yet been corrected by the insertion or deletion of a microtick from a macrotick. When the absolute value exceeds 1 a microtick is added or removed. vRest Floating-point number indicating the — fractional portion of vRatioMicroMacro. Wakeup, Startup, and Reintegration Introduction

This section describes the FlexRay wakeup and startup mechanisms. Before the startup can be performed, the cluster has to be awake, so the wakeup has to be completed before startup can commence.

First a simplified description of both processes is given. The intent of these descriptions is to provide an overview of the process to facilitate a basic understanding. The technical details are intentionally deferred to later in the chapter.

Afterwards, the wakeup is described in more detail. Two examples are provided to give insights into the combined effort of the Hosts and communication controllers of the cluster in performing the wakeup.

After the wakeup section, the startup is described, first for FlexRay cluster in one of the time-triggered protocol modes, then for FlexRay cluster using the byteflight protocol mode or the event-triggered protocol mode extension.

FlexRay Wakeup and Startup—A Functional Description

This section explains the principal workings of the FlexRay wakeup and startup procedure using high-level flow charts and textual description. Later in this chapter the wakeup and startup processes are defined using state machines, giving an exact definition of those details that were left intentionally out of this section.

Wakeup

FIG. 47 shows a global structure of the Wakeup. At any point in time some nodes (possibly all but one) in the FlexRay cluster may be in a power-saving mode. At least one of those nodes that are awake may want to initiate a startup of the whole cluster. However, before a node can communicate with the other nodes, they must be awake, so the wakeup process must precede the startup process.

The protocol defines a wakeup pattern that, if sent over the bus without error, causes all other nodes to wake up. The communication controller provides the Host a procedure to transmit this pattern on its channels. To limit the dangers of disturbing ongoing communication, the communication controller is only allowed to transmit this pattern on one of its possibly two connected channels at a time.

The Host initiates the wakeup process, whereupon the communication controller monitors its channels for meaningful communication consisting of frames, wakeup symbols, or CAS symbols. The result of this monitoring determines further wakeup behavior. If nothing meaningful is received, the wakeup pattern is transmitted; otherwise the communication controller aborts the wakeup attempt with an error message to the Host. The transmission of the wakeup pattern is aborted if a collision is sensed during the transmission. In this case the communication controller monitors the channel(s) again to determine the reason for the collision.

The FlexRay protocol does not support partial networks, i.e., networks in which some nodes are awake and some nodes are asleep. This implies that the wakeup process attempts to wake all nodes on all available channels before startup is initiated. It also implies that a cluster that is already communicating is already fully awake and does not require any further wakeup procedures.

Wakeup Channel Monitoring

FIG. 48 shows a structure of the Wakeup Channel Monitoring. For easier presentation, the process of listening for frames and wakeup symbols has been depicted serially, while these processes should actually run concurrently.

The ‘Wakeup channel monitoring’ phase ensures that no ongoing communication is disturbed by the transmission of the wakeup pattern. A listen time is defined, during which the communication controller tries to detect meaningful communication on its connected channels.

If frames are received, the wakeup is immediately aborted. A ‘received frame’ within this context is considered to have occurred if the S_SuccessfulHeaderReception event occurs for one of the configured channels. Since other nodes are already communicating with one another, no wakeup is necessary (whoever initiated the cluster startup ensured that all available channels are awake). The same applies if a wakeup symbol is received on the channel that the communication controller is attempting to awaken.

The reception of a CAS symbol prolongs the listen phase. As is described in the following sections, a frame can be expected to follow soon after the CAS if it really was a CAS symbol and not noise, so the reception of that frame is relied upon to trigger the abort. This reduces the sensitivity of the process to noise because noise perceived as a CAS symbol does not abort the process.

When the listen phase is over, the communication controller waits for at least one channel to become idle. This reduces the risk of interrupting communication that is just received. It cannot be required that both channels in a two-channel system be idle since then a faulty, noisy channel could prevent the system wakeup. Most symbols and frames, especially during the startup phase where communication is more sparse and thereby more easily overlooked than during later phases, occur on both channels at the same time. E.g. the CAS symbol is transmitted simultaneously on both channels. Requiring at least one channel to be idle prevents the wakeup from beginning to transmit while such a symbol is received on both channels but before it is recognized. The communication controller allows only a predefined number of attempts to transmit the wakeup pattern. If this number is exceeded, the wakeup process is aborted.

Wakeup Pattern Transmission

FIG. 49 shows a structure of a Wakeup Pattern Transmission. The wakeup pattern consists of several repetitions of the wakeup symbol. The wakeup symbol (defined above) consists of an active and an idle period. The communication controller listens during the idle period for channel activity. If this activity exceeds a threshold, the transmission is aborted. This mechanism resolves collisions between several nodes beginning to transmit the wakeup pattern at nearly the same time. This threshold is chosen to ensure that at least one node continues transmitting the pattern. While the wakeup pattern itself is collision resilient and is still recognizable when two such patterns collide, it is this sensing in the idle period that makes the wakeup mechanism robust against any number of collisions.

If such a collision is sensed, the communication controller returns to the ‘channel monitoring’ phase. There, a collision with another wakeup pattern can be verified and signaled to the Host.

After successful transmission of the wakeup pattern or the abort of the wakeup attempt, the communication controller returns to its reset state and awaits instructions from the Host.

FlexRay Startup—Time-Triggered Protocol Mode

Startup assumes all nodes in the cluster are awake (at least in the error-free case). Only nodes connected to all available channels may be configured as sync nodes (which are allowed to start up the cluster). Thus, in the absence of faults, the transmissions of a sync node are visible to every node in the cluster.

Startup establishes a global timing scheme that—within certain bounds—is the same within all nodes in the cluster. The ability to calculate the proper point in time for transmitting and/or receiving each frame relies on it. Also, the clock synchronization algorithm relies on this basic timing scheme so that all nodes can apply clock correction terms simultaneously (at the end of odd-numbered cycles).

The maximum clock drift that can occur between any two nodes in the cluster within one cycle has to be known in order to configure the necessary listen timeouts.

Until a node enters the protocol operation phase that succeeds the protocol startup phase (see below), its message buffers do not need to be updated. No data frame transmission and reception is possible before that time. FIG. 50 shows a global structure of startup.

Each correctly configured node begins the startup process (after finishing the wakeup process for coldstart capable nodes) by entering the ‘channel monitoring and selection of startup path’ phase. Each node that is allowed to start up the cluster monitors its connected channels and participates in the process of selecting the initiator of the coldstart process. This process is designed to eliminate all but one sync node, which then assumes the responsibility for performing the coldstart. This coldstart initiator traverses the right path in FIG. 50.

All other nodes passively wait for the selected node to initiate communication. The reception of a sync frame with an even cycle counter (indicated by S_ValdEvenStartupFrame) causes them to enter the integration path shown on the left of FIG. 50.

After the designated check has been successful, the node enters normal operation and is allowed to transmit data frames.

Channel Monitoring and Selection of Startup Path

FIG. 51 shows a structure of the Channel Monitoring and Selection of a Startup Path. The ‘startup channel monitoring’ phase is similar to the channel monitoring phase of the wakeup. Each node listens to its connected channels and tries to recognize ongoing communication. If an S_ValidEvenStartupFrame is received, the node enters the integration path. The sync nodes that are allowed to start up the cluster wait for their listen time-out to expire. A received frame (S_SuccessfulHeaderReception) or CAS symbol (S_CASReception) prolongs the time-out. When the time-out expires, the node enters the coldstart path. In case no activity at all is detected, a special timeout expires and thereby enables a fast startup.

Selection of ColdStart Initiator

FIG. 52 shows a structure of the Selection of a ColdStart Initiator. After the expiration of the listen timeout in the channel monitoring phase, the sync nodes configured to do so, transmit a CAS symbol. This CAS symbol resets the listen-timeout of other potential coldstart initiators still in the listening phase, causing them to remain in the monitoring phase. After the transmission, these nodes initialize their communication schedule and await their assigned slot, where they will transmit a sync frame with cycle counter zero. This sync frame will force all nodes in the monitoring phase to enter the integration path.

Several nodes may enter the selection phase nearly simultaneously and transmit their CAS symbol at nearly the same time. This situation is resolved by requiring nodes in this phase to reenter the monitoring phase if they receive a sync frame or a CAS symbol. Due to the unambiguous assignment of slots to the various nodes, all nodes but one (usually the one the earliest slot) will leave this phase after at most three cycles (clock oscillator deviations may require a second or third cycle for collision resolution).

After three cycles the node enters the ‘Communication established’ check.

Check on Successfully Established Communication

FIG. 53 shows a check on a successfully established communication. The coldstart initiator has transmitted three sync frames without being interrupted. Now it can expect the first replies of other sync nodes. It continues transmitting its sync frame in the designated slot.

At the end of each cycle it reviews the sync frames it has received during the current cycle. If it has received more sync frames that do not fit into its communication schedule than sync frames that do, it aborts the startup and reenters the monitoring phase. This behavior prevents the creation of several cliques with disagreeing perceptions of time.

At the end of each odd cycle, the coldstart initiator performs additional tests. If at least one pair of sync frames has been received, it performs the clock synchronization using these pairs (see Chapter “Clock Synchronization”). If the resulting correction values are outside specified bounds, it aborts the coldstart and reenters the monitoring phase. If the values are within the specified bounds, and at least one pair of sync frames has been received, it enters normal operation mode. This ensures that at least two sync nodes agree upon the timing schedule before any data frames may be transmitted. It enables stable clock synchronization for the two nodes and all other nodes that subsequently integrate into the now established communication.

A counter observes how many cycles the coldstart initiator spends in the coldstart path. If too many cycles pass without this node entering the normal operation mode, startup is aborted and the node may not again try to start up the cluster. This prevents faulty nodes from persistently disturbing the startup.

Initial Synchronization

FIG. 54 shows a structure of an initial synchronization. If a node in the monitoring phase receives a sync frame with even cycle counter (S_ValidEvenStartupFrame), it enters the integration path. The node that has transmitted the sync frame automatically becomes the reference node for the receiver.

If this reference node has been the reference node in a previous unsuccessful integration attempt, it is not selected and another sync frame is awaited. If no sync frame from another node is received within a specified amount of time, the previously unsuccessful reference node is given another chance.

The integrating node sets its own cycle counter to the value received in the sync frame and awaits the sync frame of the reference node in the following odd cycle. Using this pair of frames, the integrating node corrects its clock towards the timing of the transmitter of these frames. If no sync frame with an odd cycle counter follows the even-numbered frame that triggered the integration attempt, the node aborts the integration.

Check on Successful Integration

FIG. 55 shows a check on a successful integration. During this check phase, the node is still not allowed to transmit any frames. It now has an understanding of time derived from its reference node. During the subsequent cycle it listens for sync frames from all nodes, not just from its reference node. The node checks the timing information that it has derived from the reference node against all observable communication, considering sync frames only.

At the end of each cycle, it determines if the majority of the observed sync frames are consistent with the timing scheme it has derived. If not, it declares its integration attempt failed and reenters the monitoring phase. Note that it tries to select another sync node as reference node for the ensuing new integration attempt as described above.

At the end of each odd cycle, it performs the offset clock correction as described in Chapter “Clock Synchronization”. The calculated clock correction terms for offset and rate are compared to specified boundaries. The boundaries for the offset correction are more relaxed during the first time the correction is performed after entering this check phase. If either rate or offset correction value is outside the defined boundaries the integrating node aborts the integration attempt and reenters the monitoring phase.

Also at the end of each odd cycle, the node counts the number of slots where it has received even/odd cycle pairs of sync frames. If no pairs have been received the node aborts the integration attempt because sync frames should have been received from the reference node if nothing else. If more than one pair has been received, the node enters the normal operation mode. If the integrating node is allowed to transmit sync frames itself and one pair of sync frames has been received, it also enters normal operation. In normal operation, i.e. during protocol operation phase, the node is allowed to transmit data and sync frames (if not configured otherwise).

Wakeup and Startup Modes—Global Structure

From the CC_SoftReset state, the host shall be able to initiate the cluster wakeup via the transition G1 (see FIG. 56). For wakeup as well as for the distinct startup procedures the communication controller operates in the top-level HW state CC_Normal. Furthermore, from the CC_SoftReset state one of three distinct startup state machines shall be entered depending on how the configuration settings are chosen.

In the time-triggered protocol modes mode, i.e., the time-triggered distributed (TT-D) mode and the time-triggered master-controlled (TT-M) mode, a startup mechanism based on sync frames shall be triggered by the transition G2.

For FlexRay clusters running in TT-D mode a fault-tolerant, distributed startup shall be performed. In TT-M mode a master controlled startup shall be performed, but still all mechanisms build on a time-triggered communication cycle.

For the byteflight (BF) protocol mode and the event-triggered (ET) protocol mode the necessary startup machine transition (G3, G4 or G5, G6 respectively) depends on whether a node is configured as a master node or not.

For the event-triggered protocol mode, the startup behavior is described further on.

TABLE 12 Global Startup State Transitions and Respective Conditions for Execution State Transition Direction Actions taken on Transition from to Condition for Transition Transition G1 CC_SoftReset CC_WakeUpListen soft reset released vWakeupCount, (in the respective vdWakeup and control register) vdWakeupNoise are set AND wakeup mode configured to zero. The wakeup status vector is cleared (vWakeupFrameHeader Received, vWakeupSymbolReceived, vWakeupFailed and vWakeupComplete). G2 CC_StartupListen soft reset released vdStartup, (in the respective control register) vdStartupNoise and AND static, mixed or dynamic mode vColdStartCount are set to zero. configured The startup status (gNumberofStaticSlots greater than vector is cleared or equal one) (A minimum of at (vCCMS, vSMMS, least two static slots is required for vOpViaColdstart, a static or mixed configuration in vColdstartAborted and FlexRay mode; only one static slot vColdstartNoise) is configured in dynamic mode.) Error flags vMRCS and vCCLR are cleared G3 CC_byteflightListen soft reset released (in the respective control register) AND byteflight mode configured AND slave role configured (pMaster not set) G4 CC_Send soft reset released Symbol (in the respective control register) AND byteflight mode configured AND master role configured (pMaster set) G5 describe further on G6 describe further on Transitions W1 and W5 are described in Table 13 and transition A1 is described in Table 14. Cluster Wakeup

This section describes the wake-up path preceding the communication startup.

Any node entering startup that has coldstart capability shall first execute the wakeup procedure. Otherwise it cannot be ensured, that the cluster is awake (or at least that the wakeup has been triggered) before the node begins the startup procedure.

The Host completely controls the wake-up procedure. The communication controller provides the Host the ability to transmit a special wake-up pattern (see above) on each of its available channels. It ensures that ongoing communication on this channel is not disturbed. The communication controller cannot guarantee that all Nodes connected to this channel wake up due to the transmission of the wakeup pattern (For example, the transmission unit of the bus driver might be defective.), since these nodes cannot give feedback until the startup phase. The Host has to be aware of possible failures of the wakeup and act accordingly.

The wakeup procedure enables single-channel devices in a two-channel system to trigger the wakeup, by only transmitting the wakeup pattern on the single channel to which they are connected. Another node then assumes the responsibility for waking the other channel. Any node that has coldstart capability must wake both channels before entering startup. Any node without coldstart capability connected to two channels must wake both channels, if it wants to wake up the cluster.

The wakeup procedure tolerates any number of nodes simultaneously trying to wake up a single channel and resolves this situation such that only one node transmits the pattern. Additionally the wakeup pattern is collision resilient, so even in the presence of one faulty node also transmitting a wakeup pattern, the wakeup can be assured.

Waking One Channel

The wakeup of the FlexRay system has to be initialized by a Host. The Host of a Node may command its communication controller to send a Tx-wakeup pattern on channel vWakeupChannel, while the communication controller itself is in the CC_SoftReset state. The communication controller then enters its wakeup mode and tries to transmit a Tx-wakeup pattern on the configured channel. Finally, it signals back the status of the wakeup attempt to the Host (refer to the wakeup status vector further on in the text).

The wakeup mode of the communication controller involves three states:

-   -   CC_SoftReset     -   CC_WakeupListen     -   CC_WakeupSend         Wakeup State Diagram

The structure of the Communication Controller Wakeup State Machine is shown in FIG. 57.

TABLE 13 Wakeup State Transitions and Corresponding Conditions for Execution. State Transition Tran- Direction Action taken on sition from to Condition for Transition Transition W1 CC_Wakeup CC_Soft Reception of a frame header without Set the flag Listen Reset coding violation corresponding to (S_SuccessfullHeaderReception) on any the exit condition of the configured channels. (refer to the OR Reception of a valid Rx-wakeup symbol wakeup status on channel vWakeupChannel vector described (S_CheckRxWakeupSymbol occurred). further on). OR ( vWakeupCount == gWakeupMax. AND At least one channels is in idle state. AND( Listen-timeout vdWakeup expired (vdWakeup == gdWakeup). OR Listen-timeout with noise vdWakeupNoise expired (vdWakeupNoise == gWakeupNoise * gdWakeup). ) ) W2 CC_Wake W1 not fulfilled. Increase up AND vWakeupCount < gWakeupMax. vWakeupCount by Send AND At least one channels is in idle state. one. AND( Listen-timeout vdWakeup expired (vdWakeup == gdWakeup). OR Listen-timeout with noise vdWakeupNoise expired (vdWakeupNoise == gWakeupNoise * gdWakeup). ) W3 CC_Wakeup CC_Wake Reception of channel activity on either vdWakeup is reset Listen up channel. to zero. Listen W4 CC_Wake Reception of a valid CAS vdWakeupListen is up symbol on either channel reset to zero. Listen (S_CASReception occurred) W5 CC_Wakeup CC_Soft Transmission of Tx-wakeup pattern completed. vWakeupComplete Send Reset is set in the startup status vector W6 CC_Wake Continuous ‘active low’ of vdWakeup and up more than gdWakeupMaxCollision vdWakeupListen Listen detected during an idle are reset to zero. phase of the Tx-wakeup pattern (S_CheckWakeupCollision occurred).

The CC_SoftReset state is part of the overall protocol state diagram. Only in the CC_SoftReset state can the Host configure the communication controller and initialize wakeup on channel vWakeupChannel (G1). After the wakeup, the communication controller returns into the CC_SoftReset state and signals to the Host the result of the wakeup attempt:

-   -   Abort because the communication controller has received a frame         header without coding violation, which is signaled by setting         the vWakeupFrameHeaderReceived flag (W1).     -   Abort because the communication controller has received a valid         Rx-wakeup symbol on channel vWakeupChannel, which is signaled by         setting the vWakeupSymbolReceived flag (W1).     -   Abort due to too many wakeup attempts, which is signaled by         setting the vWakeupFailed flag (W1).     -   The complete transmission of the Tx-wakeup pattern, which is         signaled by setting the vWakeupComplete flag (W5).

The parameter gWakeupMax defines the maximum number of wakeup attempts allowed. The parameter vWakeupChannel defines the channel that the communication controller shall wake.

CC_WakeupListen State

The purpose of this state is to ensure that the transmission of the Tx-wakeup pattern does not disturb existing communication on channel vWakeupChannel.

The counter vWakeupCount is set to zero upon transition G1 from the CC_SoftReset to the CC_WakeupListen state.

Two timers are defined:

-   -   vdWakeup     -   vdWakeupNoise

Both timers are set to zero upon entering the CC_WakeupListen state.

The vdWakeup timer expires upon reaching gdcycle+gdMaxDrift (one cycle length plus a safety margin). The vdWakeupNoise timer expires upon reaching the amount of time, during which the cluster is able to keep the clock synchronization within the maximum specified tolerance band.

The vdWakeup timer is reset, whenever activity is received on either channel.

The vdWakeupNoise timer is reset, whenever a valid CAS symbol is received on any channel (S_CASReception occurred). A CAS symbol is—depending on the bitrate—rather short, so noise could be misinterpreted as a CAS symbol. To prevent an abort of the wakeup procedure due to noise, only the counter is reset when a CAS symbol is received. Only the frame following the CAS symbol will trigger the abort. Furthermore, it could be difficult to distinguish a CAS symbol from the first portion of a Tx-wakeup pattern.

If the communication controller receives a frame header without coding violation on any channel (indicated by S_SuccessfulHeaderReception), it reenters the CC_SoftReset state and sets the vWakeupFrameHeaderReceived flag (W1). A communication controller must not transmit a Tx-wakeup pattern when ongoing communication is detected. The reception of a frame header without a coding violation is sufficiently robust for the detection of ongoing communication.

If the communication controller receives a valid Rx-wakeup symbol on channel vWakeupChannel, it reenters the CC_SoftReset state and sets the vWakeupSymbolReceived flag (W1). (The detection shall be more relaxed than the rigid definition of the Rx-wakeup symbol to take topology effects, collisions and different clock speeds into account.) An Rx-wakeup symbol on the other channel (if available) is ignored.

If either of the timers expires and (vWakeupCount<gWakeupMax) and at least one channel is in idle state, the communication controller enters the CC_WakeupSend state (W2). All meaningful communication during startup is transmitted on both channels at the same time. By requiring one channel to be idle, it is ensured that no such transmission is interrupted by the transmission of the CAS symbol (within the uncertainty of the transmission delay). It cannot be required that both channels were idle, since one channel could be defective and noisy thereby preventing any wakeup and startup attempt.

If either of the timers expires and (vWakeupCount==gWakeupMax) and at least one channel is in idle state, the communication controller reenters CC_SoftReset and sets vWakeupFailed in the wakeup status vector (W1). The wakeup is only aborted after reaching the maximal number of tries when a timer expires. This gives the communication controller time to listen to the network for ongoing communication or wakeup patterns after it stepped back from the CC_WakeupSend state.

CC WakeupSend State

In this state, the communication controller transmits the Tx-wakeup pattern on the configured channel and checks for collisions.

Upon entering the CC_WakeupSend state, vWakeupCount is increased by one.

The Tx-wakeup pattern as described above is sent on the channel vWakeupChannel.

During the idle phases of the Tx-wakeup pattern, the communication controller listens for activity on the bus. If the communication controller receives more than gdWakeupMaxCollision of continuous ‘active low’ during an idle phase (This check is described in detail above and the occurrence of this event is signaled by S_CheckWakeupCollision.), it immediately steps back into the CC_WakeupListen state (W6). Without this listening and aborting, not all collisions would lead to recognizable wakeup symbols (remember that the Tx-wakeup pattern itself is only resilient against collisions of up to two such patterns). The smaller pdWakeupMaxCollision is, the better the collision detection gets, but the EMC robustness degrades. A lower bound on the value might be the equivalent to 400 ns for a 10 Mbit/s system.

After a complete, non-aborted transmission of the Tx-wakeup pattern, the communication controller reenters the CC_SoftReset state and sets the vWakeupComplete flag in the wakeup status vector (W5).

Wakeup Application Notes

Since the Host is closely involved in the wakeup of the FlexRay cluster, in this section the required Host behavior is described. The Host has to coordinate the bus guardian and the communication controller wakeup modes. It has to coordinate the wakeup of a two channels and to decide whether, or not, to wake a specific channel.

Bus Guardian

In systems that have a bus guardian installed, the Host has to command the appropriate bus guardian to enter its wakeup mode before it commands the communication controller to perform a wakeup. After the communication controller returns to the CC_SoftReset state, the bus guardian must be commanded to leave its wakeup mode.

Nodes with Coldstart Capability

Each node that is configured to perform a coldstart must perform a wakeup as described above before continuing with startup. For two-channel clusters it is generally advisable to use the procedure described below.

For FlexRay clusters in TT-D mode this includes all sync nodes that are not configured in a listen only mode. For FlexRay clusters in TT-M mode this includes the Master Node.

Actions of the Host to Initialize the Wakeup

A Host that wants to perform a wakeup of the cluster has first to check its bus driver(s) to see if they have received Rx-wakeup patterns. If the bus driver of a channel did not receive an Rx-wakeup pattern, the Host must try to wake this channel.

Each communication controller that is configured with coldstart capability relies upon its Host to have awakened the cluster prior to letting it enter the startup phase. Only the Host can ensure that the wakeup phase is completed before any startup attempt is performed.

The Host must not wake channels whose bus drivers have received an Rx-wakeup symbol unless startup is not possible without an additional wakeup of those channels. This is done to speed up the wakeup process and to limit the amount of traffic on the channels; thereby, the number of collisions during this phase is reduced.

The Host has to command the bus guardian (if available) of the channel vWakeupChannel to enter its wakeup mode. Then the Host uses the procedure described above to initialize a wakeup of channel vWakeupChannel. The communication controller may return several different status conditions that are described in the following section. Before evaluating these conditions, the Host must command the bus guardian of channel vWakeupChannel to leave its wakeup mode. If the Host does not cause the BG to leave its wakeup mode (BG_WakeUp), the BG leaves it after a fixed, non-configurable amount of time and enters the BG_FailSilent mode.

Reactions of the Host to the Status Flags Signaled by the Communication Controller

This section defines the various status conditions that the communication controller can return to the Host as outcomes of its wakeup attempt and the recommended reactions of the Host. These conditions are generally mutually exclusive, but in two-channel systems an Rx-wakeup symbol could be received on channel vWakeupChannel while a valid frame header is received on the opposite channel at the same time. The wakeup still fulfills its function when the exit conditions are given a precedence and are thereby made mutually exclusive (highest to lowest priority): Transmission complete, a frame header without coding violation has been received, an Rx-wakeup symbol has been received, the allowed number of wakeups has been exceeded.

A Frame Header without Coding Violation has been Received

When a frame header without coding violation is received by the communication controller on either available channel during CC_WakeupListen, the communication controller aborts the wakeup, even if channel vWakeupChannel is still silent.

The Host must not configure the communication controller to perform additional wakeup attempts, since this may disturb ongoing communication. Instead, it shall configure the communication controller to enter the start-up to integrate into the already running cluster.

An Rx-wakeup Symbol has been Received

The communication controller has received an Rx-wakeup symbol on channel vWakeupChannel during its CC_WakeupListen state. This means, that another Node is already waking this channel. To prevent collisions of Tx-wakeup patterns on channel vWakeupChannel, the communication controller aborts the wakeup.

If another channel is available that is not already awake, the Host shall configure the communication controller to wake this channel. Otherwise, it shall configure the communication controller to enter startup.

The Transmission has been Completed

The communication controller has transmitted the complete Tx-wakeup pattern on channel vWakeupChannel.

If another channel is available that is not already awake, the Host shall configure the communication controller to wake this channel. Otherwise, it shall configure the communication controller to enter startup.

The Allowed Number of Wakeup Attempts has been Exceeded

The communication controller was not able to transmit a complete Tx-wakeup pattern because each of its gWakeupMax attempts to transmit it resulted in at least gdWakeupMaxCollision occurrences of continuous ‘active low’ during an idle phase of the pattern. Two possible reasons for this are heavy EMC disturbances on the bus or a babbling node. One cause, not responsible for this abort, is the collision with another Tx-wakeup pattern. Such a collision can be recognized after reentering the CC_WakeupListen state and would be signaled by setting the flag vWakeupSymbolReceived.

Since no complete Tx-wakeup pattern has been transmitted, it cannot be assumed that all nodes have received an Rx-wakeup symbol. The Host may use the retransmission procedure described below.

Waking Two Channels

This section describes how the Host can wake both channels of a two-channel system.

It is forbidden for a communication controller to send a Tx-wakeup pattern on both channels at the same time. (This rule was established to ensure that an erroneous communication controller couldn't disturb ongoing communication by transmitting wakeup patterns on both channels at the same time.) So, if it is necessary to wake both channels, the host must wake them one at a time. The Host can use the procedure for sending a Tx-wakeup pattern on one channel (see above) twice—once for the first channel and after that for the second channel.

For an example of this procedure, see below.

Retransmission of Wakeup Symbols

Some events may prevent a cluster wakeup by a Tx-wakeup pattern without the transmitting communication controller being able to immediately detect it (E.g. an erroneous star that needs significantly more time to start up and to be able to forward messages.). After a defined amount of time, the Host can detect such an error when the cluster does not start up after wakeup as expected, or the Host's own communication controller's attempt to start up the cluster fails.

The Host may then perform a retransmission of the Tx-wakeup pattern. It has to command the bus guardian (if available) of the chosen channel into its wakeup mode. The communication controller has to be brought into the CC_SoftReset state; then the procedure described above can be used to transmit a Tx-wakeup pattern on channel vWakeupChannel. Afterwards, the bus guardian must be commanded to leave its wakeup mode.

Note that this may disturb ongoing communication of other nodes if the node performing the wakeup procedure experiences an incoming link failure.

Transition to Startup

It may be several hundred milliseconds (depending on the hardware used) before all nodes and stars are completely awakened and configured. To perform a startup in the FlexRay time-triggered distributed protocol mode, at least two sync-Nodes are needed. A node is called a sync node if the host has set pSyncNode in the host interface. For a non-sync node, pSyncNode is set to false. The configuration parameter can only be set or cleared in the CC_SoftReset state. The transmission of more than one sync frame by a node within one cycle has to be prevented by the communication controller. For this protocol mode, sync-Nodes shall generally not enter the CC_StartupListen state immediately after performing the wakeup unless the vColdStartInhibit flag is set. A communication controller without the vColdStartInhibit flag set will try to start up the cluster, but may fail, since no other communication controller may be ready to join the communication before the coldstart initiator aborts the startup attempt because it has reached the maximum number of cold start attempts allowed. (This scenario will still result in a successful start-up, as long as some of the other sync nodes are configured to initialize the start-up. The node that has woken the network and failed to start-up will still join the communication started by another node.) The Host must clear this flag after sufficient time has passed to allow the other nodes in the cluster to awaken.

Transmission of Wakeup Symbols During Normal Operation

During normal operation, the Host can set the payload of frames that it transmits to a pattern that mimics two consecutive Tx-wakeup symbols (This applies only for NRZ coding defined above). Note that since the wakeup symbol has a fixed length, the number of bits necessary to construct a payload that is equivalent to two such wakeup symbols depends on the bit rate of the system. It may not be feasible to construct such a payload for every combination of allowed bit rate and static slot length (especially short ones). However, in this case it may still be possible to construct a dynamic frame with this payload if the dynamic segment is sufficiently long to allow it. Depending on the system configuration, it may even be possible to use two consecutive static frames.

EXAMPLES

This section describes in more detail the Host-communication controller interaction for the wakeup in two typical situations. Firstly, it is described, how one Host wakes both channels of a two-channel system. Secondly, it is described, how one node connected to only one channel of a two-channel system wakes this channel and how a sync node (connected to both channels) wakes the other channel.

Since also the transition between wakeup and startup is described, the examples may be more readily understood with a prior understanding of FlexRay startup, which is described in subsequent sections.

Two Channel Wakeup by One Node

FIG. 58 shows a Simple Wakeup. Larger (ms range) amount of times are represented by dotted lines.

This section describes a FlexRay system with two channels configured and operating in time-triggered distributed protocol mode. It is described how one sync-node first wakes the cluster and then performs the startup.

-   -   Node 1 is awake. It has decided to wake up the cluster. Node 2         and Node 3 are in a power-saving sleep mode.     -   The Host of Node 1 (Host 1) checks for wakeup activity by         checking if one of its bus drivers has received an Rx-wakeup         symbol. Since neither of them has, Host 1 must wake both         channels.     -   Host 1 commands BG 1B (the bus guardian of Node 1 and channel B)         to enter its wakeup mode.     -   Host 1 commands CC 1 (the communication controller of Node 1) to         wake up channel B by setting vWakeupChannel to channel B and         setting/clearing the needed bits in the CC-Host interface (for a         more detailed description, see further on in the description).     -   CC 1 enters the CC_WakeupListen state. It does not receive any         activity on either channel. So the timer vdWakeup expires. The         CC 1 enters the CC WakeupSend state.     -   During the CC WakeupSend state, the Tx-wakeup pattern is         transmitted on channel B. During the idle phases of the         Tx-wakeup pattern, CC 1 detects no activity on channel B. After         complete transmission, the CC 1 sets vWakeupComplete and         reenters CC_SoftReset.     -   Host 1 commands BG 1B to leave its wakeup mode.     -   The wakeup pattern has triggered the wakeup receiver of the bus         driver of Node 2 (which is connected only to channel B). Node 2         initializes.     -   Host 1 has meanwhile read the wakeup status vector of CC 1 and         continues waking the other channel.     -   Host 1 commands BG 1A to enter its wakeup mode.     -   Host 1 sets vWakeupChannel to channel A and commands CC 1 to         execute the wakeup mode.     -   CC 1 again enters the CC_WakeupListen state. It does not receive         any activity on either channel. So the timer vdWakeup expires.         The CC 1 enters the CC WakeupSend state.     -   During the CC WakeupSend state, the Tx-wakeup pattern is         transmitted on channel A. During the idle phases of the         Tx-wakeup pattern, CC 1 detects no activity on channel A. After         the complete transmission, the CC 1 sets vWakeupComplete and         reenters CC_SoftReset.     -   Host A commands BG 1A to leave its wakeup mode.     -   The wakeup pattern has triggered the wakeup receiver of the bus         driver of Node 3 (which is connected only to channel A). Node 3         initializes.     -   Host A reads out the wakeup status vector of CC 1 and decides to         continue with the startup, since both channels have been         awakened. It sets the vColdStartInhibit flag and commands CC 1         to enter the CC_StartupListen state.     -   After some time, Node 2 and Node 3 are completely configured.         Neither are sync nodes and each is only connected to one of two         channels. Additionally, their bus drivers signal that they have         received Rx-wakeup patterns, so their Hosts must not perform a         wakeup of their own. Instead, both Hosts command their         communication controllers to begin Startup. Both CC 2 and CC 3         remain in the CC_StartupListen state.     -   Finally Node 1 decides that enough time has passed to allow the         other Nodes in the cluster to wake up and configure themselves.         It clears the vColdStartInhibit flag of its communication         controller and allows it thereby to enter the CC_ColdStartICW         state.

See below for details on the startup procedure.

Wakeup Forwarding by One Node

FIG. 59 shows a Simple Wakeup with Forwarding. Larger (ms range) amount of times are represented by dotted lines.

This section describes a FlexRay system with two channels configured and operating in time-triggered distributed protocol mode. It is described, how first a non-sync node connected to only one channel wakes its channel, and how then a sync node forwards the Tx-wakeup pattern to the opposite channel and initiates the communication.

-   -   Node 1 is awake. It has decided to wake up the cluster. Node 2         and Node 3 are in a power-saving sleep mode.     -   The Host of Node 1 (Host 1) checks for wakeup activity by         checking if its bus driver has received an Rx-wakeup symbol.         Since it has not, Host 1 decides to wake its channel. Since this         node is not a sync node, the Host does not have to wake its         channel before entering the startup. In this example, the         application demands it anyway.     -   Host 1 commands BG 1B (the bus guardian of Node 1 and channel B)         to enter its wakeup mode.     -   Host 1 commands CC 1 (the communication controller of Node 1) to         wake up channel B by setting vWakeupChannel to channel B and         setting/clearing the needed bits in the CC-Host interface (for a         more detailed description, see the following description).     -   CC 1 enters the CC_WakeupListen state. It does not receive any         activity on its channel. So the timer vdWakeup expires. The CC 1         enters the CC_WakeupSend state.     -   During the CC_WakeupSend state, the Tx-wakeup pattern is         transmitted on channel B. During the idle phases of the         Tx-wakeup pattern, CC 1 detects no activity on channel B. After         complete transmission, the CC 1 signals this by setting the         vWakeupComplete flag and reenters the CC_SoftReset state.     -   Host 1 commands BG 1B to leave its wakeup mode.     -   The wakeup pattern has triggered the wakeup receiver of the bus         driver of Node 2 (which is connected to both channels). Node 2         initializes.     -   Host 1 reads the wakeup status vector of CC 1. It notices that         CC 1 completed the transmission and commands CC 1 to enter the         CC_StartupListen state. Node 1 is not a sync Node and has now to         wait for some other Node to initialize startup.     -   Meanwhile, Node 2 has awakened. Node 2 is a sync Node and is         allowed to perform a coldstart, so it must perform a wakeup         before entering startup.     -   Host 2 checks for wakeup activity by evaluating if one of its         bus drivers has received an Rx-wakeup symbol. It notes that the         bus driver of channel B has received an Rx-wakeup symbol and so         only has to wake channel A.     -   Host 2 commands BG 2A to enter its wakeup mode.     -   Host 2 sets vWakeupChannel to channel A and commands CC 2 to         execute the wakeup process.     -   CC 2 enters the CC_WakeupListen state. It does not receive any         activity on either channel. So the timer vdWakeup expires. The         CC 2 enters the CC_WakeupSend state.     -   During the CC_WakeupSend state, the Tx-wakeup pattern is         transmitted on channel A. During the idle phases of the         Tx-wakeup pattern, CC 2 detects no activity on channel A. After         the complete transmission, the CC 2 signals this by setting the         vWakeupComplete flag and reenters the CC_SoftReset state.     -   Host 2 commands BG 2A to leave its wakeup mode.     -   The wakeup pattern has triggered the wakeup receiver of the bus         driver of Node 3 (which is connected only to channel A). Node 3         initializes.     -   Host 2 reads out the wakeup status vector of CC 2 and decides to         continue with the startup. Since some other Node had already         awakened channel B, Host 2 assumes that other Nodes are already         awake and initialized. It clears the vColdStartInhibit flag and         commands CC 2 to enter the CC_StartupListen state.

See below for detailed information on the startup procedure.

Communication Startup and Reintegration

Corresponding to the supported protocol modes, three different mechanisms for communication startup are specified. Clusters operating in the time-triggered distributed (TT-D) mode follow a fault-tolerant, distributed startup strategy; for the time-triggered master-controlled (TT-M) mode this is reduced to a master controlled system behavior (refer to transitions indicated by prefix ‘S’; see FIG. 62). A cluster configured in byteflight (BF) mode or event-triggered (ET) mode performs an event driven, master controlled startup (state transitions with prefix ‘B’ (byteflight; see FIG. 63) and ‘E’ (event driven; see the following description), respectively). The protocol operations related to synchronization of the running communication schedule, integration of further nodes to a running cluster, media access rules, and error handling are different for the configuration alternatives. Therefore, configuration-specific state diagrams are given in the following sections for each of these configurations, including state descriptions and state transitions.

The cluster wake-up must precede the communication startup in order to ensure that all mechanisms defined for the startup work properly. After initial wake-up the whole network behaves like a broadcast medium.

Startup—Time-Triggered Protocol Mode (TT-D and TT-M)

In general, a node may enter communication (i.e., the CC_NormalOperation state) via the coldstart path (CC_ColdStartICW and CC_ColdStartVCW state sequence) initiating the schedule synchronization, or via the integration path (CC_InitSync and CC_IntegrationVCW state sequence) integrating into an existing communication schedule. Only sync nodes are allowed to enter via the coldstart path, and they have to check in advance whether there is already channel activity, or not (see below).

In order to establish a global media access schedule, the initial synchronization of the periodic TDMA schedule must be coordinated among all connected communication nodes. Since any sync node is permitted to initiate schedule synchronization, simultaneously started and conflicting attempts by different sync nodes must be resolved. Each node initially transmits a Collision Avoidance Symbol (CAS, see above) specifically for this purpose, before initiating the periodic schedule. This symbol represents a kind of arbiter, which is used to resolve initial collisions of nodes simultaneously attempting to set up the communication schedule.

Both non-sync nodes and sync nodes start passive integration via the integration path as soon as they receive sync frames from which to derive the TDMA schedule information. During integration the node has to adapt its own clock to the global clock (rate and offset) and has to make its cycle time consistent with the global schedule observable at the network. Afterwards, these settings are checked for consistency with all available network nodes. Only if these checks are passed, can the node leave the integration phase and actively participate in communication.

Several modes are supported that restrict the node's ability to communicate or to initiate startup actively (see below). These modes are configurable by the host and are explained within in their respective sections.

Startup Timeouts

A sync node shall maintain two different timers supporting two timeout values, vdStartup and vdStartupNoise. The expiration of either of these timers causes the node to leave the initial sensing phase (CC_StartupListen state) with the intention of starting up communication. Even though the following description is based on the assumption that these timers increment their values (starting with a reset value of zero), it is allowable for the implementation to choose another realization (e.g. counter decrement).

The node local listen-timeout vdStartup shall have the same length (gdStartup) for each node in the system that is configured to send an initial CAS during startup (sync node). The upper bound gdStartup limits the listen time used by a node to determine if there is already communication between other nodes or at least one sync node actively requesting the integration of others.

Due to the initial clock drift between the set of nodes that are already actively communicating (transmitting sync frames), and the node that is attempting to integrate, the listen-timeout must consider the maximum accumulated drift over the length of one cycle. Therefore the time-out interval gdStartup shall be constrained by the following inequality (gdStartup is derived internally from the configuration parameters gdCycle and gdMaxDrift. In addition, the upper boundary for the listen timeout, vdStartupNoise, is a multiple of gdStartup and is configurable using the parameter gStartupNoise.): gdStartup≧gdCycle+gdMaxDrift

The maximum allowable drift between any two clocks in the network is an important system parameter and is known at design time. This ‘worst case’ period has to be covered by configuring gdMaxDrift (unit: macroticks) accordingly.

While counting is based on macrotick granularity, the reset of the timer vdStartup shall be performed asynchronously to the macrotick clock. The timer vdStartup shall be reset (vdStartup=0) upon entering the CC_StartupListen state.

Further reset conditions for the timer vdStartup are defined as follows (see also FIG. 60):

-   -   1. If communication channel activity (Any signal edge detectable         at the receiver (i.e., a signal edge, which has passed the         glitch filter) is referred to as “channel activity” (channel         state machine has entered the active state).) is detected on one         of the configured pChannels channels while the node is in the         CC_StartupListen state, the listen-timeout vdStartup shall be         reset.     -   2. As long as the channel status of one of the configured         pChannels channels is active the timer is continuously reset.         The timer shall resume counting once the channel idle state is         reached for all pChannels channels and the node is still in the         CC_StartupListen state.

Once the listen-timeout vdStartup expires (vdStartup=gdStartup), neither an overflow nor a cyclic restart of the timer shall be performed. The status has to be kept for further processing by the startup state machine (see Table 14).

At the same time the listen-timeout vdStartup is started for the first time (transition from CC_SoftReset to the CC_StartupListen state), a second timeout vdStartupNoise shall be started with vdStartupNoise=0. This additional timeout is used to improve reliability of the startup procedure in the presence of noise.

While counting is based on macrotick granularity, the reset of the timer vdStartupNoise shall be performed asynchronously to the macrotick clock. The timer vdStartupNoise shall be reset upon entering the CC_StartupListen state.

Further reset conditions for the timer vdStartupNoise and its behavior are defined as follows (see also FIG. 61):

-   -   1. The transition from channel idle to channel active shall not         influence the timer. The node has to receive a certain pattern         (s. below) in order to reset the timer vdStartupNoise.     -   2. If S_SuccessfulHeaderReception or S_CASReception occur for         any channel while the node is in the CC_StartupListen state, the         listen-timeout vdStartupNoise shall be reset.

Once the listen-timeout vdStartupNoise expires (vdStartupNoise=gStartupNoise*gdStartup), neither an overflow nor a cyclic restart of the timer shall be performed. The status has to be kept for further processing by the startup state machine (see Table 13).

Since the timeout vdStartupNoise won't be reset if channel activity is sensed (see FIG. 61), this timeout defines the fallback solution that guarantees that a node will try to start up the communication cluster even in the presence of noise. On the other hand, by having defined certain reset conditions, the synchronization of the coldstart entry is still guaranteed. The expiration of vdStartupNoise and the resulting entry into the coldstart path is captured in the variable vNoise (vNoise is set to ‘true’).

Listen-Only Mode

A FlexRay node shall support a listen-only mode. In listen-only mode, the node shall be able to receive all frames after successful integration to the running communication; i.e. the node is fully synchronized and performs the clock synchronization in order to keep this status. In comparison to the normal operation mode (CC_NormalOperation state) the node does not actively participate in communication, i.e. neither symbols nor frames are transmitted.

Setting vListenOnly to true while in the CC_SoftReset state configures the listen-only mode. vListenOnly cannot be set to true after leaving the CC_SoftReset state, but can be cleared at any time.

This mode supports communication diagnosis (‘monitoring’) as well as dedicated wake-up strategies, which require host interaction (vListenOnly subsequently cleared) in order to actively participate in communication after wake-up.

In listen-only mode, sync nodes behave like non-sync nodes during startup. Specifically, this applies to the prerequisites for transitioning from CC_IntegrationVCW to CC_PassiveOperation. Passing the validation check requires that at least two different sync nodes are already synchronized and able to communicate. Please refer to the description of the validation check described below.

ColdStart-Inhibit Mode

A FlexRay node shall support a coldstart inhibit mode. In coldstart inhibit mode the node shall be prevented from initializing the TDMA communication schedule. If the host has set vColdStartInhibit, the node shall not be allowed to initialize the cluster communication after having checked on existing communication, i.e. entering the coldstart path is prohibited. The node shall be allowed to integrate to a running cluster or to acknowledge another node, which initially tries to start the cluster communication.

Coldstart inhibit mode vColdStartInhibit can be set in the CC_SoftReset state only. vColdStartInhibit cannot be set after leaving the CC_SoftReset state, but can be cleared at any time. vColdStartInhibit can be mapped to the gColdStartMax configuration parameter, which utilizes the zero value to keep the node from starting the network on its own initiative (refer to the chapter “host interface”). It has to be checked whether the parameter gColdStartMax can be accessed during run time, i.e., after leaving CC_SoftReset state, as this is required for the “coldstart inhibit” function.).

Once the node is synchronized, vColdStartInhibit shall not restrict the node's ability to receive frames or to transmit frames.

Startup State Diagram—Time-Triggered Protocol Mode (TT-D and TT-M)

FIG. 62 shows a Startup State Diagram—Time-Triggered Protocol Mode (TT-D and TT-M)

TABLE 14 State Transitions and Corresponding Conditions for Execution State Transition Tran- Direction Action taken on sition from to Condition for Transition Transition S1 CC_Startup CC_ColdStart node is configured as a sync node Reset vdInitial Listen ICW (pSyncNode == true; ColdStartPhase to gColdStartMax > 0) zero. AND vColdStartCount < gColdStartMax Immediately AND vListenOnly is false transmit CAS AND vColdStartInhibit is false symbol and start AND not S2 cycle timing. Start AND ( transmitting the at least one channel is in sync frame channel idle state according to the slot AND at least one of the following schedule. timers expired: Increment listen-timeout vdStartup vColdStartCount by (vdStartup == gdStartup) one. listen-timeout with noise If vdStartupNoise vdStartupNoise expired has expired, the auxiliary variable ) vNoise is set S2 CC_Startup CC_Init Reception (The frame reception Set vRefSync to Listen Sync comprises the detection of channel fFrameID of idle state after the frame) of an S_ValidEvenStartup S_ValidEvenStartupFrame on one of Frame pChannels channels AND ( vRefSync == 0 (no integration history available) OR fFrameID is different from vRefSync OR TT-M mode enabled ) S3 CC_Startup vdCycleWithHistory expired Reset vRefSync to Listen (vdCycleWithHistory == gdStartup) zero. S4 CC_Startup reception of a frame header on one Reset Listen of pChannels channels vdStartupNoise to ( S_SuccessfulHeaderReception zero. occurred) OR reception of a valid CAS symbol on one of pChannels channels (S_CASReception occurred) S5 CC_Startup reception of channel activity on any Reset vdStartup to Listen channel zero. S6 CC_ColdStartup CC_Startup reception of a valid CAS symbol on vdStartup and ICW Listen one of pChannels channels vdStartupNoise are (S_CASReception occurred) reset to zero. OR reception of a frame header on one If vRefSync is not of pChannels channels zero, reset vdCycle- (S_SuccessfulHeaderReception WithHistory to zero. occurred) Set the flag OR ( vColdStartAborted end of current cycle (derived or from local cycle time) vCCMS, respectively. AND vColdStartCount is equal to Stop timing and gColdStartMax transmitting the ) Note: Due to this definition it is sync frame. possible that a node stops current startup process (re-enter CC_StartupListen from CC_ColdStartICW), even though there hasn't been any possibility for other nodes to answer until then. S7 CC_ColdStart not S6 Start clock VCW AND end of current cycle synchronization. (derived from local cycle time) Increment AND vdInitialColdStartPhase expired vColdStartCount by (vdInitialColdStartPhase == one. gdInitialColdStartPhase) S8 CC_ColdStartup CC_Startup ( vdStartup and VCW Listen end of current cycle vdStartupNoise are (derived from local cycle time) reset to zero. AND vColdStartCount is equal to If vRefSync is not gColdStartMax zero, reset vdCycle- AND not S9 WithHistory to zero. ) OR ( If gColdStartMax end of current cycle was reached, the (derived from local cycle time) flag vCCMS is set. AND vInvalidSyncCount[ch] ≧ If the majority was vValidSyncCount[ch] for any missed for channel ch validation, the ) OR ( vSMMS flag is set. end of current cycle If the rate or offset (derived from local cycle time) correction value AND |vOffsetCorrection| > exceeded its limit, pOffsetCorrectionOut the vCCLR flag is ) OR ( set. end of current cycle Stop timing, clock (derived from local cycle time) synchronization and AND |vRateCorrection| > transmitting the pRateCorrectionOut sync frame. Note: It is assumed that the vOffsetCorrection is set to zero for cycles with even cycle counter value [(vCycle MOD 2)=0] by the clock ) synchronization unit S9 CC_Normal end of current cycle Enable the Operation (derived from local cycle time) transmission of data AND (vCycle MOD 2) = = 1 frames. AND vInvalidSyncCount[ch] < The flag vValidSyncCount[ch] for all ch vOpViaColdstart is AND |vOffsetCorrection| ≦ set. pOffsetCorrectionOut If vNoise is set, the AND |vRateCorrection| ≦ flag vColdstartNoise pRateCorrectionOut is set. AND ( The flags vMRCS TT-M mode enabled and vCCLR are OR vSyncPairs is at least one cleared. ) S10 CC_Init CC_Startup S_ValidOddStartupFrame with vdStartup and Sync Listen fFrameID = vRefSync too late vdStartupNoise are OR S_ValidOddStartupFrame with reset to zero. fFrameID = vRefSync too early If vRefSync is not Note: During the CC_InitSync state, zero, reset vdCycle- the node tries to catch the WithHistory to zero. corresponding The flag vMRCS is S_ValidStatupFrameOdd, which set. belongs to the initial S_ValidEvenStartupFrame. Besides the check on the matching frame identifier, the derived correction value for the rate adoption must not exceed certain limits. The parameter pRateCorrectionInitOut determines these boundaries, and the terms ‘too late’ and ‘too early’ relate to this definition. S11 CC_Integra- end of current cycle Start clock tion (derived from local cycle time) synchronization. VCW AND (vCycle MOD 2) == 1 The flag vOffsetOut is cleared. S12 CC_Integration CC_Startup ( vdStartup and VCW Listen end of current cycle vdStartupNoise are Listen (derived from local cycle time) reset to zero. AND vInvalidSyncCount[ch] ≧ If vRefSync is not vValidSyncCount[ch] for any ch zero, reset vdCycle- ) OR ( WithHistory to zero. end of current cycle If the majority was (derived from local cycle time) missed for AND (vCycle MOD 2) == 1 validation, the AND vOffsetOut == true vSMMS flag is set. (an offset correction value If the rate or offset greater than correction value pOffsetCorrectionOut has exceeded its limit, already been accepted once) the vCCLR flag is AND |vOffsetCorrection| > set. pOffsetCorrectionOut If the transition was ) OR ( triggered due to the end of current cycle vSyncPairs value, (derived from local cycle time) the flag vMRCS is AND (vCycle MOD 2) == 1 set. AND |vOffsetCorrection| > Stop clock pOffsetCorrectionInitOut synchronization. ) OR ( end of current cycle (derived from local cycle time) AND (vCycle MOD 2) == 1 AND |vRateCorrection| > pRateCorrectionOut ) OR ( end of current cycle (derived from local cycle time) AND (vCycle MOD 2) = = 1 AND value of vSyncPairs not big enough (refer to section 0) ) S13 CC_Normal not S12 Enable the Operation AND end of current cycle transmission of data (derived from local cycle time) frames. AND (vCycle MOD 2) == 1 The flags vMRCS AND vInvalidSyncCount[ch] < and vCCLR are vValidSyncCount[ch] for all relevant cleared. ch (A channel with vInvalidSyncCount[ch] == vValidSyncCount[ch] == 0 is disregarded for validation analysis) AND vSyncPairs is big enough (refer to section 0) AND vListenOnly is false AND |vOffsetCorrection| ≦ pOffsetCorrectionOut AND |vRateCorrection| ≦ pRateCorrectionOut S14 CC_Integration CC_Passive not S12 The flags vMRCS VCW Operation AND end of current cycle and vCCLR are (derived from local cycle time) cleared. AND (vCycle MOD 2) == 1 AND vInvalidSyncCount[ch] < vValidSyncCount[ch] for all relevant ch AND vSyncPairs is big enough (refer to section 0) AND vListenOnly is true AND |vOffsetCorrection| ≦ pOffsetCorrectionOut AND |vRateCorrection| ≦ pRateCorrectionOut S15 CC_Passive CC_Normal end of current cycle Enable the Operation Operation (derived from local cycle time) transmission of data AND vListenOnly is false frames. A1 All CC_SoftReset soft reset initiated States SoftRes (in the respective control register) CC_StartupListen State

A FlexRay node shall enter the CC_StartupListen state from the CC_SoftReset state when the communication controller is ready to attempt communication startup or enter a running network. If the communication controller is capable of initiating a startup attempt, the Host shall first ensure that the cluster is awake before letting the communication controller enter the CC_StartupListen state.

When entering the CC_StartupListen state from CC_SoftReset or re-entering from any other state of the startup state machine other than the CC_StartupListen state itself, sync nodes shall (re-)start their listen-timeout vdStartup and their listen-timeout with noise vdStartupNoise (see above).

The global cluster constant gColdStartMax defines the number of cycles a node shall be permitted to attempt a coldstart, i.e. the number of cycles a node may reside in coldstart path. Once vColdStartCount is equal to gColdStartMax the node shall not enter the coldstart path (This could be achieved by preventing the restart of the listen-timeouts vdStartup and vdStartupNoise.). vColdStartCount is only reset upon entering the CC_StartupListen state from the CC_SoftReset state.

Non-sync nodes shall not enter the coldstart path, because these nodes are not allowed to initiate communication on their own. This could be achieved by several means, e.g. for non-sync nodes gColdStartMax is configured to zero, or the listen-timeouts vdStartup and vdStartupNoise are not maintained.

Upon the reception of an S_ValidEvenStartupFrame the integration path shall be entered via the CC_InitSync state. Furthermore, vRefSync must be zero (see strategy defined in order to prevent a node from repetitively choosing a faulty node as a reference). fFrameID shall be stored to vRefSync, in order to store the identifier of the reference frame, and thereby a representation of the corresponding sync node for further processing (see below).

If at least one of the channels is in channel idle state, at least one of the listen-timeouts vdStartup or vdStartupNoise has expired and the entry condition to the integration path is not fulfilled, the node shall enter the CC_ColdStartICW state.

A node that failed to integrate to the reference node that was selected to derive initial rate and offset information, shall not utilize the same node for an integration attempt during the next communication cycle. Therefore, a node shall maintain a history of reference nodes it has attempted to use in order to avoid repetitive selection of the same reference node. It must be ensured that a node in the CC_StartupListen state selects a sync node different from the former reference node if present.

If an integration attempt fails with a selected reference node the reference node shall not be permanently excluded from the list of potential reference nodes. Due to a transient disturbance the integration might have failed even though the reference node operated fault-free (A corrupted sync frame might prevent the transition in CC_InitSync state or CC_IntegrationVCW state). Therefore, the following strategy shall be applied after an integration attempt has failed (see below).

-   -   A node entering CC_StartupListen shall reset and start a timer         with the timeout value vdCycleWithHistory, if vRefSync is         nonzero. This timer shall encompass the same time period         gdStartup as the vdStartup timeout.     -   The timeout vdCycleWithHistory shall not be reset due to channel         activity in the CC_StartupListen state     -   Upon the expiration of timeout vdCycleWithHistory, vRefSync         shall be cleared. This setting (vRefSync=0) prevents the restart         of vdCycleWithHistory     -   The node shall only enter integration path (via the CC_InitSync         state), if the fFrameID of a received S_ValidEvenStartupFrame is         not equal to the ID stored in vRefSync. Since there is only one         sync node available in TT-M mode, it is counterproductive to         attempt to sync to a different node.

In TT-M mode, a non-sync node shall not perform the above-defined strategy. In TT-M mode, a single sync node, i.e. the master exists. All non-sync nodes and their synchronization are fully dependent on the master node. Therefore, this node is never excluded as a potential reference. When entering the CC_StartupListen state from any other state, vRefSync is cleared (i.e., set to zero).

When re-entering the CC_StartupListen state from any state, the rate correction value shall be reinitialized with pMicroOverheadperCycleNom.

CC_ColdStartICW (Initial Check Window) State

Only sync nodes shall be allowed to enter the coldstart path via the CC_ColdStartICW state. The phase, for which a sync node is in the CC_ColdStartICW state, shall be used for the following purposes:

-   -   It has to be ensured that a single sync node is going to start         the communication cluster. Therefore, other sync nodes have to         be prevented from entering the coldstart path. When multiple         nodes enter simultaneously the CC_ColdStartICW state, a         resolution mechanism ensures that all but one return to         CC_StartupListen state.     -   In the CC_ColdStartICW state the coldstart initiating node is         expected to have exclusive access to the channels in the         fault-free case. Other nodes that are integrating based on the         sync frame reception of the coldstart initiator always follow a         defined procedure that ensures that for initial cycles in the         integration path these nodes stay passive. Consequently, the         node initiating the coldstart should not receive any responses         while in the CC_ColdStartICW state. Therefore, any frame         reception during the CC_ColdStartICW state is due to another         node having entered coldstart path at the same time (refer to         bullet above) or to an error scenario.

In the CC_ColdStartICW state, a sync node shall transmit an initial CAS symbol and shall then transmit its configured sync frame periodically to enable the startup of the entire network. By starting the first communication cycle after CAS transmission, the cycle counter is initialized to zero; thus the first sync frame is transmitted with fCycleCount equal to zero. By transmitting the CAS symbol, other sync nodes are prevented from entering the coldstart path. If more than a single sync node transmits the CAS symbol simultaneously, those nodes all enter the CC_ColdStartICW state simultaneously. However, their cycle timing is inherently synchronized so this scenario is resolvable during the next cycles while in CC_ColdStartICW state.

The reception of a valid CAS symbol (S_CASReception occurred) or a frame header (indicated by S_SuccessfulHeaderReception) on any channel shall cause the node to re-enter CC_StartupListen state immediately.

In the CC_ColdStartICW state a node shall not transmit normal data frames, which are frames without sync bit set.

A node shall remain in the CC_ColdStartICW state for a certain period determined by the initial coldstart phase (gdInitialColdStartPhase). A timer vdInitialColdStartPhase shall be reset and started, when CC_ColdStartICW is entered. This timer shall cover the initial slot used for CAS transmission as well as three complete communication cycles (refer to the definition of gdInitialColdStartPhase in the following part of the description). Thereby, gdInitialColdStartPhase determines the time a node stays in the CC_ColdStartICW state before entering CC_ColdStartVCW.

Upon the transition into another state the timer vdInitialColdStartPhase shall be stopped.

A node in time-triggered distributed (TT-D) mode with an “incoming link failure” shall stop transmission after a predefined interval of time. Thereby other sync nodes are enabled to take over responsibility of starting the communication for the cluster.

For this feature the additional counter vColdStartCount shall be maintained.

-   -   With the transition into the CC_ColdStartICW state the variable         vColdStartCount shall be incremented by one.     -   With each new cycle-start in the CC_ColdStartICW state,         vColdStartCount shall be incremented by one.     -   At the end of each cycle, vColdStartCount is compared to the         allowed maximum gColdStartMax. If vColdStartCount is equal to         gColdStartMax, the node shall re-enter the CC_StartupListen         state. In this case, the node that initiates the coldstart has         not been able to achieve communication with another node         (transition to CC_NormalOperation state) within gColdStartMax         cycles.     -   Once this condition had become true, the sync node shall not be         able to enter the coldstart path again. Only the host can reset         this status (by forcing the transition to the CC_SoftReset         state).

A node in time-triggered master-controlled (TT-M) mode shall not maintain the vColdStartCount counter.

CC_ColdStartVCW (Validation Check Window) State

In the CC_ColdStartVCW state, the node shall maintain periodic transmission of its sync frame on cycle basis—but no other frames shall be scheduled for transmission. In addition, the node shall perform a validation check at the end of each cycle in order to assess the network image perceived for the current cycle. Depending on the result of the validation check, the node

-   -   shall remain in the CC_ColdStartVCW state, if no response has         been received at all (and vColdStartCount is smaller than         gColdStartMax),     -   shall step back to the CC_StartupListen state, if the response         does not fit to the node-local communication schedule,     -   shall enter normal operation (the CC_NormalOperation state), if         the response is in accordance with the node-local communication         schedule.

This list applies for sync nodes in time-triggered distributed (TT-D) mode. For FlexRay clusters operating in time-triggered master-controlled (TT-M) mode, the coldstart initiator is the only node configured to send sync frames. Therefore, this node shall not wait for any response and shall perform the transition into the CC_NormalOperation state at the end of the cycle.

By transmitting the sync frame, the coldstart initiator requests other nodes to join into the given communication schedule. Once these nodes (At a minimum, the joining of one further sync node is required for TT-D protocol mode.) become active, the coldstart initiator shall leave the coldstart path by entering normal operation, i.e. the protocol operation phase (POP). In order to transfer a coldstart initiator in TT-D mode into the CC_NormalOperation state, the response of other active nodes must pass certain validation criteria. The term ‘response’ and the validation check rules are described in detail below.

Two different mechanisms shall contribute to the validation check.

-   -   First, received sync frames must be in accordance to the         node-local communication schedule     -   Furthermore, the correction terms of the clock synchronization         must not exceed the configured boundaries.

To prepare for the validation check, the node shall observe and assess the communication over one cycle. Two event counters per channel (vValidSyncCount[ch] and vInvalidSyncCount[ch]) shall be administrated in order to support decision-making. In accordance with the static segment acceptance criteria (refer to Chapter ‘Frame Processing’ above), a clear distinction between several possible cases can be made for each slot. These slot scenarios shall be judged and counters shall be incremented according to the following rules:

if (S_ValidStaticFrame with sync bit set is received on channel ch) vValidSyncCount[ch]++ ; end; elseif [(an S_CorrectFrame with sync bit failed the static segment acceptance due to S_PayloadLengthStaticError, S_FrameIDError or S_CycleCountError on channel ch) and (no sync frame with fFrameID has already been taken into account for counter increment during current cycle)] vInvalidSyncCount[ch]++; end;

The validation check counters shall be initialized for all configured pChannel channels upon each new cycle start as follows:

-   -   vValidSyncCount[ch]=1;     -   vInvalidSyncCount[ch]=0;

The node shall consider itself to operate correctly and shall therefore initialize the counters vValidSyncCount[ch] accordingly (pre-set to one).

The validation check shall be passed, if vValidSyncCount[ch] is greater than vlnvalidSyncCount[ch] for all configured channels. The transition to CC_NormalOperation shall be only permitted, if the check is passed with vValidSyncCount[ch]>1 on at least one of the pChannel channels.

With the transition to CC_ColdStartVCW and with each new cycle start in CC_ColdStartVCW, the variable vColdStartCount shall be incremented by one. At the end of each cycle, vColdStartCount shall be compared to the allowed maximum gColdStartMax. If vColdStartCount is equal to gColdStartMax, the node shall re-enter the CC_StartupListen state.

In CC_ColdStartVCW, the node shall execute the global clock synchronization for offset and rate according to the regular rules. CC_ColdStartVCW is the latest point in time the clock synchronization including measurement and correction phase has to be active. The node could perform clock synchronization already in the ColdStartICW state. This might be advantageous for the TT-M protocol mode and the establishment of the two-cycle based rate measurement phase. According to the definition of the regular rate measurement phase, all sync frames shall be registered and pair-wise (sync frames with same frame identifier) evaluated for clock synchronization. The offset measurement phase shall be applied in accordance to the regular scheme, too. This means that for each cycle with an odd cycle counter value the related sync frames shall be used to determine next offset correction term. The sync frames received from nodes that have integrated upon the coldstart attempt are delayed by two times the overall (network) propagation delay. This has to be considered for the setting of the offset correction term boundary (anyway).

The node in the CC_ColdStartVCW state requires at least one additional matching pair of sync frames suitable for rate measurement (same frame identifier, consecutive occurrence in ‘even/odd’ cycle order), in order to fulfill one of the necessary prerequisites for entering CC_NormalOperation. Upon reception of two valid, matching frames (S_ValidStaticFrame) in even/odd cycle order, the node in CC_ColdStartVCW shall increment the counter vSyncPairs. As long as the node does not receive a response, it performs the clock correction based on one “pair of matching sync” frames, namely its own transmissions (this is taken into account by using the value 0 as ‘measurement sample’). The introduction of vSyncPairs is done in order to ease the description of several distinctions to be made in the specification. As an auxiliary variable, it is not required that this parameter is used for an implementation of a FlexRay protocol controller. With the beginning of each rate measurement phase in CC_ColdStartVCW state, the counter vSyncPairs shall be reset to zero.

In addition to the prerequisite that necessary sets of measurement samples are available (vSyncPairs is greater than zero), the quality of the resulting correction terms for clock synchronization shall be assessed. The node is only permitted to execute transition into the CC_NormalOperation state if the correction terms for both rate and offset are within the configured limits

-   -   |vOffsetCorrection|≦pOffsetCorrectionOut     -   |vRateCorrection|≦pRateCorrectionOut

If one of the correction terms violates the limit settings, the node shall re-enter the CC_StartupListen state.

CC_InitSync State

A node shall enter CC_InitSync after having received an S_ValidEvenStartupFrame on one of the configured pChannel channels in the CC_StartupListen state. In the CC_InitSync state, the node shall not schedule any transmission.

The node variable vRefSync shall contain the frame identifier of the sync frame that has been used to enter the integration path. The sync node corresponding to this reference frame is called the reference node.

In the CC_InitSync state an initial rate correction value shall be determined in order to adjust the local macrotick timing to the timing given by the reference node (referred to as “rate adoption”). To accomplish this, the time between the initial occurrence of the reference frame and its next occurrence is measured and the difference from the nominal cycle length shall be applied as the rate correction term.

In order to improve robustness of the entire integration process against temporary disturbances, the reception of S_ValidStartupFrame is tracked for each channel separately. That means that if the initial sync frame has been received on channel A and the next sync frame on this channel is missing, the node shall remain in the CC_InitSync state if the rate adoption can still be based on the other channel, i.e. on channel B. This requires the correct reception of a valid pair of S_ValidStartupFrame (starting with S_ValidEvenStartupFrame) on the second channel. In no case a pair of frames shall be constituted out of measurements picked from different channels, i.e. cross-channel measurement is prohibited.

The node shall administer means to ensure that a transition back into the CC_StartupListen state is performed, if

-   -   S_ValidOddStartupFrame is received too early on one of the         channels ch, for which an S_ValidEvenStartupFrame has already         been received     -   no S_ValidOddStartupFrame is received within a defined period on         any of the channels ch for which an S_ValidEvenStartupFrame has         already been received

In essence, the captured initial rate correction value must not exceed a configured limit, which is given by pRateCorrectionInitOut.

Once a valid rate correction term has become available, the node shall run with the corrected rate (direct application of the correction term).

Furthermore, S_ValidOddStartupFrame shall be used to determine the nominal schedule position. This operation shall be based on the received identifier fFrameID. The node shall set its local cycle time accordingly, i.e., it shall synchronize the micro- and macrotick counters to the first BSS (falling edge) of the received sync frame. The cycle counter value fCycleCount of the received sync frame shall be extracted and used to initialize the local cycle counter.

In this manner, the local schedule is established according to the information derived from the reference node. The node shall follow the local schedule until the end of the current cycle without transmitting actively.

Any further reception shall be ignored and neither rate nor offset measurements shall be performed. At the end of the cycle, the node shall transit into CC_IntegrationVCW state.

CC_IntegrationVCW State

In the CC_IntegrationVCW state, the node shall not schedule any transmission.

In CC_IntegrationVCW the node shall confirm the settings copied from the reference node with the overall network communication scheme. For this purpose the node shall perform a cycle-based validation check similar to the check defined for the CC_ColdStartVCW state (see above). Since the node still behaves passively, the initialization of the administered counters differs from that for a node in CC_ColdStartVCW (which transmits a sync frame and thus participates actively in the validation check).

The validation check counters shall be initialized for all configured pChannel channels upon each new cycle start as follows:

-   -   vValidSyncCount[ch]=0;     -   vInvalidSyncCount[ch]=0;         Counter increment shall be performed according to the following         rules:

if (S_ValidStaticFrame with sync bit set is received on channel ch) vValidSyncCount[ch]++; end; elseif [(an S_CorrectFrame with sync bit failed the static segment acceptance due to S_PayloadLengthStaticError, S_FrameIDError or S_CycleCountError on channel ch) and (no sync frame with fFrameID has already been taken into account for counter increment during current cycle)] vInvalidSyncCount[ch]++; end;

The validation check shall be considered to be passed if vValidSyncCount[ch] is greater than vInvalidSyncCount[ch] for all channels except those for which vValidSyncCount[ch]==vInvalidSyncCount[ch]==0. If both the vInvalidSyncCount and the vValidSyncCount are equal to zero for all configured channels, the validation check fails.

The transition into CC_NormalOperation can only take place if the validation check has been passed, but additionally further conditions must be satisfied (see clock correction term assessment and next paragraphs, respectively). The validation check shall run concurrently with these additional checks until the validation check itself fails or a state transition due to another condition is executed.

When the node enters CC_IntegrationVCW, a regular measurement phase for the next rate correction term shall be started. According to the definition of the regular rate measurement phase, all sync frames shall be registered and pair-wise (sync frames with same frame identifier) evaluated for clock synchronization. The offset measurement phase shall be applied in accordance to the regular scheme, too. This means that for each cycle with an odd cycle counter value the related sync frames are used to determine next offset correction term.

An integrating sync node requires at least one matching pair of sync frames suitable for rate measurement (same frame identifier, consecutive occurrence in ‘even/odd’ order) in order to fulfill one of the necessary prerequisites to enter CC_NormalOperation state. Using this pair of sync frames, the node can acknowledge an existing node in CC_ColdStartVCW or simply integrate to a synchronized cluster. The number of matching pairs of sync frames shall be accumulated in vSyncPairs.

The counter vSyncPairs shall be evaluated at the end of an odd cycle.

-   -   For sync nodes that do not operate in listen-only mode         (vListenOnly is false) vSyncPairs needs to be at least one,         otherwise no integration shall be possible. In that case, the         node shall re-enter the CC_StartupListen state. This         characterizes the scenario, where the original reference node         does not maintain proper sync frame transmission for the entire         integration phase.     -   This holds also for nodes in TT-M mode, which are going to         integrate to the ‘master’-driven schedule. The parameter         vSyncPairs needs to be at least one; otherwise no integration         shall be possible. In that case, the node shall re-enter the         CC_StartupListen state.     -   If a sync node is configured as a listen-only node (vListenOnly         is true), it has to fulfill the same condition as non-sync nodes         in TT-D protocol mode. These nodes need to receive at least two         matching pairs of sync frames suitable for rate measurement         (same frame identifier, consecutive occurrence). Only if there         is already a communication established comprising at least two         sync nodes (nodes in the CC_NormalOperation state) can non-sync         nodes (or sync nodes in listen-only mode) join in. For these         nodes vSyncPairs needs to be at least two, otherwise no         integration shall be possible. The node shall re-enter the         CC_StartupListen state, if vSyncPairs is zero.

With the beginning of each rate measurement phase in the CC_IntegrationVCW state, the variable vSyncPairs shall be reset to zero.

In addition to the prerequisite that necessary sets of measurement samples are available (vSyncPairs is large enough, see above), the quality of the resulting correction terms for clock synchronization must be acceptable. A node shall be allowed to join active communication (transition into the CC_NormalOperation state), only if the correction terms for both rate and offset are within the configured limits

-   -   |vOffsetCorrection|≦pOffsetCorrectionOut     -   |vRateCorrection|≦pRateCorrectionOut.

If one of the correction terms violates the limit settings, the node has to re-enter CC_StartupListen.

The only exception to this rule is for the first time an offset correction value is available in the CC_IntegrationVCW state. In this special case the correction value vOffsetCorrection may exceed the configured limit pOffsetCorrectionOut, which is applied during regular clock synchronization. The initial offset correction value shall be compared against the limit pOffsetCorrectionInitOut.

-   -   |vOffsetCorrection|≦pOffsetCorrectionInitOut

If this more relaxed requirement can be met, the node shall remain in the CC_IntegrationVCW state, but shall not transit into the CC_NormalOperation state.

After the application of the initial offset correction term (and the check against the pOffsetCorrectionInitOut limit) in the CC_IntegrationVCW state, the next offset correction term has to meet the regular pOffsetCorrectionOut limit. That means the described exception is only made once, i.e., when the first offset correction term is available.

In order to ensure proper processing, a flag vOffsetOut shall be set to true once the initial offset correction term check has been performed. The introduction of vOffsetOut is done in order to ease the description in the specification. As an auxiliary variable it is not required that this parameter is used for an implementation of a FlexRay protocol controller. This flag shall be always evaluated, if a new offset correction term should be checked against the configured limit settings. The flag vOffsetOut is initialized to false, if CC_IntegrationVCW is entered from the CC_InitSync state.

The combination of all these checks ensures that the node only becomes an active transmitter if the local time base (including the cycle counter and the clock synchronization parameters) is consistent with the global time as represented by the majority of active sync nodes in the system.

CC_NormalOperation State

As soon as the node that transmitted the first CAS symbol (resolving the potential access conflict and entering startup via coldstart path) and one additional node have entered the CC_NormalOperation state, the startup phase is finished for a cluster in TT-D protocol mode.

In TT-M protocol mode, the single sync node enters the CC_NormalOperation state without any communication counterpart. This is due to its master role in the time-triggered master-controlled mode.

In the CC_NormalOperation state, all configured messages will be scheduled for transmission. This includes all data frames as well as the sync frame.

CC_PassiveOperation State

In the CC_PassiveOperation state a node shall not transmit any of its configured frames. Nevertheless, the node shall not stop all activities—it shall perform clock synchronization based on the received sync frames, the reception of messages and the full support of the host interface.

In addition, the CC_PassiveOperation state is used to support the ‘listen only’ protocol feature, where nodes are fully synchronized and receive all available frames (including receive buffer update), but shall not transmit anything. This mode shall be indicated by vListenOnly, which can be set by the host in the CC_SoftReset state only. As soon as the host clears vListenOnly, the CC_NormalOperation state shall be entered at the beginning of the next cycle.

Startup—byteflight Protocol Mode (BF)

-   -   A correctly configured sync master communication controller         (pMaster is true) shall enter the startup sequence via the         transition from CC_SoftReset to CC_byteflightMaster.     -   A single node should be configured as the sync master node,         which must send a status symbol on all gChannels channels. For         the sync master node pChannels must be equal to gChannels.     -   A correctly configured slave node communication controller         (pMaster is false) shall enter the startup sequence via the         transition from CC_SoftReset to CC_byteflightListen.     -   All slave nodes shall synchronize to the status symbol         transmitted by the sync master node. If that node does not         start, the system does not start up.     -   Slave nodes start their communication cycle on both channels         with the reception of the first valid status symbol on one of         the pChannels channels.

For a detailed description of the byteflight protocol mode, please refer to M. Peller, J. Berwanger, and R. Greissbach, byteflight Specification, version 0.5, BMW Corporation 1999, available at http//www.byteflight.com.

Startup State Diagram—byteflight Protocol Mode (BF)

FIG. 63 shows a Startup State Diagram of the byteflight Protocol Mode (BF)

TABLE 15 State Transitions and Corresponding Conditions for Execution Action State State Direction taken on Transition from to Condition for Transition Transition B1 CC_byteflightListen CC_byteflightSlave reception of a valid status symbol at one of pChannels channels AND vListenOnly is false B2 CC_byteflightPassive reception of a valid status symbol at one of pChannels channels AND vListenOnly is true (‘Listen-only’ mode is an invalid configuration for the master node!) B3 CC_byteflightSlave CC_byteflightListen network idle time reached (vMacrotick == gdCycle − gdNIT; based on local timers) B4 CC_SendSymbol CC_byteflightMaster transmission of the status symbol finished B5 CC_byteflightMaster CC_SendSymbol end of current cycle (derived from local cycle time) B6 CC_byteflightPassive CC_byteflightListen network idle time reached (vMacrotick= = gdCycle-gdNIT; based on local timers) A1 All States CC_SoftReset soft reset initiated (in the respective control register) CC_SendSymbol State

A single node that has been configured as sync master (pMaster is set) shall send a status symbol. With the end of the transmission the timers (of the receiver unit) shall be started according to the definitions in the byteflight specification (see M. Peller, J. Berwanger, and R. Greissbach, byteflight Specification, version 0.5, BMW Corporation 1999, available at http://www.byteflight.com) and the node shall enter the CC_byteflightMaster state.

When a node enters the CC_SendSymbol state while a frame reception is ongoing the reception process is stopped.

CC_byteflightMaster State

A node shall send and receive messages in the CC_byteflightMaster state according to its configuration. Upon entering the CC_byteflightMaster state, i.e. after the transmission of the status symbol, the startup phase is completed. The master node does not need any acknowledgement from other nodes.

CC_byteflightListen State

All slave nodes (pMaster is false) shall wait in the CC_byteflightListen state for the reception of a valid status symbol. All configured pChannels channels shall be independently monitored. The transition into CC_byteflightSlave and therefore the synchronization of both channels to the master shall be done on reception of the first valid status symbol. After initialization of the wait timers, all configured channels shall operate asynchronously with respect to the required frame mini-slotting on each of the pChannels channels.

CC_byteflightSlave State

Slave nodes shall synchronize to a valid status symbol and transmit and receive messages in the CC_byteflightSlave state according to their configuration.

CC_byteflightPassive State

In CC_byteflightPassive a node shall not transmit any of its configured frames. The node shall not stop all activities, but shall continue performing synchronization to status symbols (via the CC_byteflightListen state) and the reception of messages.

The CC_byteflightPassive state is used to support the ‘listen only’ protocol feature, where the node shall be fully synchronized and shall receive all available frames (including receive buffer update), but shall not transmit anything. This mode shall be indicated by vListenOnly, which can be set by the host in the CC_SoftReset state only. As soon as the host clears vListenOnly, the CC byteflightSlave state shall be entered with beginning of the next cycle.

Since the communication controller performs the transition to CC_byteflightListen state with every communication cycle, it is still synchronized to the master node. Therefore, the node is allowed to directly re-enter CC_byteflightSlave from CC_byteflightListen (at the beginning of the next cycle), if the host sets vListenOnly to false.

Startup—Event-Triggered Protocol Mode (ET)

The node's behavior during startup is described further on in the description.

Startup Examples—Time-Triggered Protocol Mode (TT-D)

For all startup sequences described in this chapter the assumption is made that the correction terms for clock synchronization exactly match the limit settings of the quality assessment criterion (see above). Therefore, the node is allowed to proceed directly into normal operation (CC_NormalOperation state) after having performed the offset measurement, correction phase, and regular rate measurement phase the first time.

Startup without Collisions

The scenario illustrated in FIG. 64 depicts three nodes with two of them configured to initiate the startup actively (sync nodes A and B). Node C is not configured to schedule any sync frames and therefore is not allowed to enter CC_ColdStartICW. The first cycle counter value received by nodes B and C is in the sync frame sent by node A and it is even.

Node A enters CC_ColdStartICW and transmits the initial CAS before any other node. Triggered by the related channel activity, node B restarts its listen-timeout vdStartup. On the reception of the CAS symbol, the listen-timeout vdStartupNoise is restarted. With the first sync frame (fFrameId=3) is sent by node A all other nodes enter CC_InitSync. At this point Node A becomes the reference node (vSyncRef=3) and the measurement phase for initial rate correction term is started. The next occurrence of node A's sync frame stops the rate measurement phase. Nodes B and C directly determine and apply the rate correction term to their local clock rate (i.e. to their local macrotick generation unit). In addition, the actual schedule position is determined based on the reference frame ID, and the micro- and macrotick timers are synchronized using the falling edge of the leading BSS of the received sync frame.

Nodes B and C follow the current schedule until cycle end and then transition into the CC_IntegrationVCW state. Still these nodes behave passively, i.e., they do not participate the communication schedule with their own frames. After one complete rate measurement period (2 cycles) and the corresponding offset measurement and correction phase (during the second cycle), the sync node B is allowed to enter normal operation. The validation checks evaluated in the CC_IntegrationVCW state are passed because on the reception of the reference sync frame vValidSyncCount[ch] is incremented, while vInvalidSyncCount[ch] remains unchanged. Consequently, with the start of next cycle, node B enters CC_NormalOperation and starts to transmit messages according to its configuration. On reception of the sync frame pair sent by another node (node B), which is synchronized to its own, the node that initially sent the CAS (node A) then enters CC_NormalOperation at the start of next communication cycle (after a whole rate measurement period has been concluded). In CC_NormalOperation all configured frames are scheduled for transmission. As soon as the node that initially sent the CAS and one other node have entered the CC_NormalOperation state, the startup phase is concluded.

Node C enters CC_NormalOperation in the same cycle as node A, as soon as it performs the regular rate measurement phase based on 2 (or more) pairs of corresponding sync frames.

Startup with Initial Collision

FIG. 65 shows a Startup with a collision on the CAS symbol. The scenario illustrated in FIG. 65 depicts three nodes with all of them configured to initiate the startup actively (sync nodes). A collision during startup results when two sync nodes leave the CC_SoftReset state at the same, or nearly the same time. In this case, two nodes (nodes A and B) enter CC_ColdStartICW simultaneously and send their initial CAS at the same, or nearly the same time. Both nodes are then prepared to send their first sync frame. The node with the sync frame having the lower identifier sends its frame first (node B; fFrameID=1). On reception of this sync frame, the other node (node A), which currently resides in the CC_ColdStartICW state, returns to CC_StartupListen and awaits the next S_ValidEvenStartupFrame. The figure depicts the case where a node A integrates in the sixth cycle after the cycle in which the collision occurred.

Startup with Nodes Failed Due to the Validation Check

FIG. 66 shows a Startup with Validation Check in CC_IntegrationVCW Failed. The scenario illustrated in FIG. 66 depicts nodes B and C starting integration to the reference node (node A). While nodes B and C are in the CC_IntegrationVCW state the reception of the sync frame transmitted by the reference node fails at both nodes. Thus, the validation check at both nodes fails, too. At the end of this cycle both nodes have to re-enter the CC_StartupListen state. Since vRefSync is different from 0 (vRefSync=3), the first sync frame from the former reference node (node A) is ignored. Because no other sync frame occurs during gdCycleWithHistory, vRefSync is cleared at the end of this cycle. With the next occurrence of the sync frame sent by node A (vRefSync is set to 3 again), node B and C start another integration attempt. Via the integration path, both nodes finally synchronize on timing of node A. Meanwhile, Node A remains in the CC_ColdStartVCW state for the entire period because it does not detect a valid response.

Requirements for Hardware States

Introduction

This chapter describes the HW states whose support is required by the CC, BG, electrical and optical BD, and the active star. Additionally, some desirable optional transitions are described. The state names are prefixed with a two/three-letter acronym corresponding to the hardware component to which the state pertains (i.e., CC, BG, BDe or BDo). State transition names contain one of two prefixes as follows:

-   -   State transitions with prefix ‘V’ corresponding to certain         voltage levels     -   State transitions with prefix ‘L’ indicate states transitions         corresponding to logical conditions

The remainder of this chapter consists of sections corresponding to each of the FlexRay hardware components. Each of these sections consists of two subsections; a descriptive overview of the component's states followed by a more formal behavioral description in the form of a state diagram accompanied by a table detailing the transitions in the diagram.

Voltage Levels

-   -   In general three different voltage levels and corresponding HW         states have to be distinguished:     -   PowerOff—The supply voltage is not available or is below a         pre-defined level. Consequently, some integrated circuits are         not able to keep their pins in a defined state, e.g. tri-state.         The semiconductor manufacturer has to guarantee that during         power up/power down no disturbances occur or has to specify the         affected pins and their behavior.     -   PowerOn—The supply voltage level is high enough to guarantee a         defined state of the pins, where no disturbances occur.     -   Operating/Normal—The supply voltage level allows full operation         (note: Operating/Normal is a substate of PowerOn).         HW States of the CC         Overview

The following overview describes the CC behavior in various states. Conditions for entering and exiting these states are described in the table following the subsequent state diagram.

Support for monitoring of the voltage levels (brown-out detection) is only required for standalone controllers. This allows monitoring to be done by external monitoring hardware.

CC_PowerOff State

-   -   The voltage is below a pre-defined threshold for proper         operation     -   Halt of all CC internal clocks     -   The CC must not drive any pins         CC_PowerOn State     -   The voltage level is above a threshold to guarantee a defined         state of the pins         CC_HWReset State     -   All controller clocks halt immediately     -   The CC must not drive any pins         CC_Operating State     -   The CC supports regular communication function         CC_Awake State         CC_SoftReset State     -   Immediately halt all CC internal clocks except those that are         needed for operating the host interface.         CC_Normal State     -   Regular communication shall be supported         CC_ShutdownComplete State     -   When this state is present communication is inactive         CC_Standby State     -   The power consumption of the electrical CC is significantly         reduced compared to CC_Normal     -   All CC clocks off except those that are needed for wakeup         detection     -   Configuration data will remain unchanged     -   Communication Controller (CC) State Diagram         FIG. 67 shows a Communication Controller (CC) state transition         diagram. Table 16 is a CC state transition table.

TABLE 16 CC state transition table. Action State Transition Direction taken on Transition From State To State Conditions for Transition Transition V1 CC_PowerOff CC_PowerOn CC supply voltage rises above CC_U1 V2 CC_PowerOn CC_PowerOff CC supply voltage drops below CC_U2 L1 CC_HWReset CC_Operating CC external reset After hard reset signal is inactive (power-up reset or (AND) Supply voltage is via dedicated reset opt. greater than CC_U3 pin) all initialization for at least CC_t_(V3) data are cleared L2 CC_Operating CC_HWReset External reset Disable ability to signal is active drive pins, all clocks (OR) Supply voltage halt immediately opt. drops below CC_U4 for at least CC_t_(V4) L3 CC_Operation CC_SoftReset A CC_Reset is Immediately halt all requested by the CC internal clocks host except those that are needed for operating the host interface. All configuration data shall be retained. L4 CC_SoftReset Initialization is finished L5 CC_SoftReset CC_Normal CC_SoftReset is The interrupt status deactivated by the shall be cleared host (AND) CC optional soft opt. checks are passed L6 CC_SoftReset CC_Standby CC_SoftReset is Optional deactivated AND Optional soft checks did fail L7 CC_Normal CC_ShutdownComplete Current Communication is communication inactive round is finished AND Host requests a shutdown (e.g. by setting the Shutdown Request bit) L8 CC_Awake CC_Standby Host issues a CC The ongoing frame Sleep Command transmission or (OR) Severe failure reception will be opt. condition being finished and the detected by the configuration data error management shall be retained of the CC (failure conditions are specified in Chapter “Error Signaling and Error Handling”) L9 CC_Standby CC_Awake Host issues a CC CC shall signal a Wakeup Command wakeup interrupt to OR The CC detects the host activity on any of the RX pins

-   -   The constants CC_U1, CC_U2, CC_U3, CC_U4, CC_t_(v3) and         CC_t_(v4) are product specific and have to be defined in the CC         product specification.     -   Note: CC_U1<CC_U3, CC_U2<CC_U4         HW States of the Electrical Bus Driver (BD)         Overview

The following overview describes the electrical BD behavior in various states. Conditions for entering and exiting these states are described in the table following the subsequent state diagram.

Support for monitoring of the junction temperature is optional.

BDe_PowerOff State

-   -   The voltage is below a pre-defined threshold for proper         operation     -   The BD must not drive any pins (e.g., no reverse current).         BDe_PowerOn State     -   The voltage level is above a threshold to guarantee a defined         state of the pins         BDe_Operating State     -   The BD supports regular communication function         BDe_Normal State     -   Regular communication shall be supported         BDe_Standby State     -   The power consumption of the electrical BD is significantly         reduced compared to BDe_Normal     -   The BD is not capable of transmitting regular messages     -   The BD's wakeup monitoring function is active.         BDe_Sleep State     -   The BD does not support regular communication     -   The BD enters low power consumption mode, e.g. all clocks         stopped and only low power wakeup receiver active. The power         consumption is significantly reduced compared to BDe_Normal     -   The BD's wakeup monitoring function is active         BDe_BusOff State     -   The BD's channel output is in high impedance state, e.g. it         doesn't drive the idle level on the bus (is floating instead)         BDe_BusNormal State     -   The BD outputs regular bus levels for communication         BD State Diagram (Electrical BD)         FIG. 68 shows a bus driver (BD) state transition diagram for an         electrical BD. Table 17 is a BD state transition table for an         electrical BD. For the optical bus guardian states refer to FIG.         69.

TABLE 17 BD state transition table (electrical BD). Action State Transition Direction taken on Transition From State To State Conditions for Transition Transition V1 BDe_PowerOff BDe_PowerOn BD Supply voltage rises above BDe_U1 V2 BDe_PowerOn BDe_PowerOff BD Supply voltage drops below BDe_U2 V3 BDe_BusOff BDe_BusNormal BD Supply voltage rises above BDe_U5 for at least BDe_t_(v5) V4 BDe_BusNormal BDe_BusOff BD Supply voltage drops below BDe_U6 for at least BDe_t_(v6) L1 BDe_Normal BDe_Standby Host commands change to BDe_Standby State (e.g. via SPI command) L2 BDe_Standby BDe_Normal Host commands change to BDe_Normal State (e.g. via SPI command) OR BD has detected a valid Wakeup event (local or via bus) L3 BDe_Operating BDe_Sleep Host commands The transmitter change to BDe_Sleep will be disabled, State (e.g. via SPI signaling to the command) host OR No databus activity detected for more than BDe_t₁ OR BD Supply voltage drops below BDe_U4 for at least BDe_t_(V4) (OR) BD junction opt. temperature raises above BDe_K_(T1) ° C. L4 BDe_Sleep BDe_Operating BD has detected a The transmitter valid Wakeup event will be released, (local or via bus) signaling to the AND BD Supply voltage is host above BDe_U3 for at least BDe_t_(V3) (AND) BD junction opt. temperature is below BDe_K_(T1) ° C.

-   -   The constants BDe_U1, BDe_U2, BDe_U3, BDe_U4, BDe_U5, BDe_U6,         BDe_t₁, BDe_t_(v3), BDe_t_(v4), BDe_t_(v5), BDe_t_(v6) and         BDe_K_(T1) are product specific and have to be defined in the BD         product specification.     -   Note: BDe_U1<BDe_U3, BDe_U2<BD2_U4         HW States of the Optical BD         Overview

The following overview describes the optical BD behavior in various states. Conditions for entering and exiting these states are described in the table following the subsequent state diagram.

BDo_PowerOff State

-   -   The voltage is below a certain threshold for proper operation     -   The CC must not drive any pins         BDo_Normal State     -   The BD supports regular communication         BDo_Sleep State     -   The BD does not support regular communication     -   The BD is in low power consumption mode, e.g. all clocks stopped         and only low power wakeup receiver active     -   The BD's wakeup monitoring function is active         BD State Diagram (Optical BD)         FIG. 69 shows a bus driver (BD) transition diagram for an         optical BD. Table 18 is a BD state transition diagram for an         optical BD.

TABLE 18 BD State Transition Table (optical BD). Action State Transition Direction taken on Transition From State To State Conditions for Transition Transition V1 BDo_PowerOff BDo_PowerOn BD Supply voltage raises above BDo_U1 V2 BDo_PowerOn BDo_PowerOff BD Supply voltage drops below BDo_U2 L1 BDo_Normal BDo_Sleep Host commands change to BDo_Sleep State OR No databus activity detected for more than BDo_t₁ L2 BDo_Sleep BDo_Normal Host commands change to Bdo_Normal State OR BD has detected a valid Wakeup event (local or via bus) The constants BDo_U1, BDo_U2 and BDo_t₁ are product specific and have to be defined in the BD product specification. HW States of the BG Overview

The following overview describes the BG behavior in various states. Conditions for entering and exiting these states are described in the table following the subsequent state diagram.

Support for monitoring of the voltage levels (brown-out detection) is only required for stand-alone controllers, whereas the monitoring can also be done by an external monitoring hardware.

BG_PowerOff State

-   -   The voltage is below a certain threshold for proper operation     -   Halt of all BG internal clocks     -   The BG must not drive any pins         BG_PowerOn State     -   The voltage level is above a threshold to guarantee a defined         state of the pins         BG_HWReset State     -   All clocks halt immediately     -   The BG must not drive any pins         BG_Operating State     -   The BG supports regular function         BG_Awake State         BG_SoftReset State     -   Enabling of the BD transmitter for an ongoing frame transmission         will be hold, afterwards immediately halt of BG internal clocks         except those that are needed for operating the host interface         and disabling of the BD.         BG_Normal State     -   Regular function is supported         BG_Standby State     -   The power consumption of the BG is significantly reduced         compared to BG_Normal     -   All BG clocks off except those that are needed for operating the         host interface     -   Configuration data will be held

An explicit shutdown support for the BG is not required.

BG State Diagram

FIG. 70 shows a Bus Guardian (BG) state transition diagram. Table 19 is a BG state transition table.

TABLE 19 BG State Transition Table. Action State Transition Direction taken on Transition From State To State Conditions for Transition Transition V1 BG_PowerOff BG_PowerOn BG Supply voltage raises above BG_U1 V2 BG_PowerOn BG_PowerOff BG Supply voltage drops below BG_U2 L1 BG_HWReset BG_Operating CC external reset After hard reset signal is inactive (power-up reset or (AND) Supply voltage is via dedicated reset opt. greater than BG_U3 pin) all initialization for at least BG_t_(V3) data are cleared L2 BG_Operating BG_HWReset External reset disable ability to signal is active drive pins, all clocks (OR) Supply voltage halt immediately opt. drops below BG_U4 for at least BG_t_(V4) L3 BG_Operating BG_SoftReset A BG_Reset is The ongoing requested by the guarding action will host be finished and the configuration data shall be retained L4 BG_SoftReset Initialization is finished L5 BG_SoftReset BG_Normal BG_Reset is The interrupt status deactivated by the shall be cleared host (AND) BG optional soft opt. checks are passed L6 BG_SoftReset BG_Standby Soft reset is Opt. deactivated AND BG optional soft checks did fail L7 BG_Awake BG_Standby Host issues Sleep Command L8 BG_Standby BG_Awake Host issues Wake- up Command

-   -   The constants BG_U1, BG_U2, BG_U3, BG_U4, BG_t_(v3) and         BG_t_(v4) are product specific and have to be defined in the BG         product specification.     -   Note: BG_U1<BG_U3, BG_U2<BG_U4         HW States of the Active Star         Overview

The following overview describes the Active Star behavior in various states. Conditions for entering and exiting these states are described in the table following the subsequent state diagram.

ST_PowerOff State

-   -   The voltage is below a certain threshold for proper operation     -   The active star must not drive any pins         ST_PowerOn State         ST_Normal State     -   The voltage regulator is active         ST_Sleep State     -   The voltage regulator is off         Active Star State Diagram         FIG. 71 shows an Active Star state transition diagram. Table 20         is an Active Star state transition table.

TABLE 20 Active Star State Transition Table. Action State Transition Direction taken on Transition From State To State Conditions for Transition Transition V1 ST_PowerOff ST_PowerOn ST Supply voltage raises above ST_U1 V2 ST_PowerOn ST_PowerOff ST Supply voltage drops below ST_U2 L1 ST_Normal ST_Sleep ST did not detect and message-like patterns for more than ST_t_(S1) L2 ST_Sleep ST_Normal ST has detected a valid wake-up symbol/pattern

The constants ST_U1, ST_U2 and ST_t_(S1) are product specific and have to be defined in the star product specification.

Error Signaling and Error Handling

Error Signaling

This chapter describes the error signaling mechanisms of FlexRay protocol. These mechanisms are intended to enable the host application or any other higher level software to learn about the presence of unexpected protocol conditions. In some cases, the host may want to take particular action when being notified of certain types of errors. This protocol specification, however, makes no requirement for the host application to react to any of the error conditions described in this chapter.

Error signaling refers to the presentation of filtered and/or unfiltered protocol error condition information from the Communication Controller to the host.

Frame Reception and Validation

Several error signaling mechanisms described in this chapter make use of the status of the reception process of various frames by the frame processing portion of the protocol engine. Refer to the above description for the details of these mechanisms and the signals they provide to the Error Signaling/Error Handling mechanisms.

Symbol Reception and Validation

Several error signaling mechanisms described in this chapter make rely on the detection of various protocol symbols by the symbol processing portion of the protocol engine. Refer to the above description for the details of these mechanisms and the signals they provide to the Error Signaling/Error Handling mechanisms.

Error Signals and Error Counters

This section describes the error signals and error counters of the FlexRay Protocol. Error signals are used to indicate a detected fault to the host. Error counters are used to count faults, and information related to the number of faults is passed on to the host. In all cases the error counters are not allowed to be incremented past their maximum value, i.e., the counters shall not “wrap around” back to zero, but rather shall remain at their maximum value.

Table 21 and Table 22 list the error signals and error counters of the FlexRay protocol. The following sections provide detailed descriptions of the various signals and counters.

TABLE 21 Error Signals and Error Counters for FlexRay Operating Mode Abbreviation Frame and Channel Status/Error Signals Channel Status and Error Information CSEI Frame Status and Error Information FSEI General Error Signals Coldstart Count Maximum Signal CCMS Missing Rate Correction Signal MRCS Missing Offset Correction Signal MOCS Clock Correction Limit Reached CCLR Reference Frame too Early RFEE Reference Frame Lost RFLE Bus Guardian Schedule Monitor Error BGME Error Counters Clock Correction Failed Counter CCFC

TABLE 22 Error Signals for byteflight Operating Mode Error Signals Abbreviation SOC too Early SOCE SOC Lost SOCL Illegal Pulse ILLPIF Frame Status and Error Information (FSEI)

A FlexRay Communications Controller shall provide a classification of the slot status per channel for each slot that is booked to receive a frame. A slot is booked to receive a frame if a filter (concerning frame ID, cycle counter and channel—see the following description) for this slot is set.

Table 23 lists the possible status and error information for a booked slot. The determination of these statuses is based on the presence or absence of certain frame reception status signals as defined in the sections above.

TABLE 23 Error Signals Related to FSEI Set condition: Frame processing Frame Status and produces any of the following Static Dynamic Error Information signals Segment Segment Byte Coding S_HeaderCodingError Applies Applies Error/CRC Error S_InvalidHeaderCRCError S_FrameCodingError S_InvalidFrameCRCError S_InvalidDTSError S_ChannelIdleCodingError Slot Mismatch S_FrameIDError Applies Applies Cycle Counter S_CycleCountError Applies Applies Mismatch Length Mismatch S_InvalidFrameLengthError Applies — S_PayloadLengthStaticError S_InvalidFrameLengthError — Applies Null Frame S_ValidStaticFrame and the Applies — fNullFrameIndicationBit is set in the frame. Empty Slot At the end of a booked Applies — slot no error signal (i.e., S_HeaderCodingError, S_InvalidHeaderCRCError, S_FrameCodingError, S_InvalidFrameCRCError, S_InvalidDTSError, S_ChannelIdleCodingError, S_FrameIDError, S_CycleCountError, S_InvalidFrameLengthError, S_PayloadLengthStaticError) and no valid frame signal (i.e., S_CorrectFrame or S_ValidStaticFrame) was signaled from frame processing and frame processing is currently in the FR_Idle state Transmission Conflict S_TransmissionConflictError Applies Applies Transmission Conflict is Only detected if the node tries to send a frame while it receives. The error signal belongs to the slot ID of the sent frame. If a receive buffer is configured to use the “pick first valid” style of channel filtering (see below), the following additional information on the status of the channel that was not selected for payload storage shall be summarized in the FSEI:

TABLE 24 Additional FSEI Error Signals for “Pick First Valid” Channel Filtering Frame Status Set condition: Frame processing and Error produces any of the following Static Dynamic Information signals Segment Segment Receive Error on S_HeaderCodingError Applies Applies Second Channel S_InvalidHeaderCRCError S_FrameCodingError S_InvalidFrameCRCError S_InvalidDTSError S_ChannelIdleCodingError S_FrameIDError S_CycleCountError S_InvalidFrameLengthError S_PayloadLengthStaticError Empty Slot on At the end of a booked Applies — Second Channel slot no error signal (i.e., S_TSSError, S_HeaderCodingError, S_InvalidHeaderCRCError, S_FrameCodingError, S_InvalidFrameCRCError, S_InvalidDTSError, S_ChannelIdleCodingError, S_FrameIDError, S_CycleCountError, S_InvalidFrameLengthError, S_PayloadLengthStaticError) and no valid frame signal (i.e., S_CorrectFrame or S_ValidStaticFrame) was signaled from frame processing and frame processing is currently in the FR_Idle state S_InvalidDTSError applies only during frame reception in the dynamic segment. Each slot booked to receive a frame has a corresponding FSEI. The FSEI shall be reset to zero when the CC performs the state transition L5 or L6 of the HW state machine (see the previous chapter). The FSEI's shall begin to be updated once a CC successfully passed the protocol startup phase (see above).

The FSEI is always updated once the receive frame processing is finished (see above). The received data content shall only be provided to the data storage corresponding to the booked slot if none of the above listed error information was set (if channel filter “pick first valid” is configured, at least one channel's FSEI lists no error information). In all other cases, only the current FSEI shall be provided to the data storage.

It shall be possible during configuration of the CC to define a subset of the FSEI components [Byte Coding/CRC Error, Slot Mismatch, Cycle Counter Mismatch, Length Mismatch, Null Frame, Empty Slot, Transmission Conflict, Receive Error on Second Channel, Empty Slot on Second Channel] to be the trigger condition for an interrupt to the host. This subset applies to all booked slots.

Channel Status and Error Information (CSEI)

A FlexRay Communications Controller shall provide an accumulated classification of the slot status of all frames received on a given channel. This implies that a FlexRay CC that supports communication on two channels shall provide two such sets of information. The Channel Status and Error Information (CSEI) summarizes the status of all frames received on the communication channel, including those frames which are not booked and therefore have no corresponding data or status storage in the CHI. Table 25 lists the contents of the CSEI and describes the mapping of the frame and symbol processing status symbols described above.

TABLE 25 Error Signals Related to CSEI Symbol Static Dynamic Error Condition Window Segment Segment Byte Coding S_HeaderCodingError — Applies Applies Error/CRC Error S_InvalidHeaderCRCError S_FrameCodingError S_InvalidFrameCRCError S_InvalidDTSError S_ChannelIdleCodingError Slot Mismatch S_FrameIDError — Applies Applies Cycle Counter S_CycleCountError — Applies Applies Mismatch Length Mismatch S_InvalidFrameLengthError — Applies — S_PayloadLengthStaticError S_InvalidFrameLengthError — — Applies Unaccepted Unexpected symbol reception Applies Applies Applies Symbol (in symbol window or even outside) Together with S_TSSError S_InvalidDTSError applies only during frame reception in the dynamic segment. The CSEI is readable by the host via the Controller Host Interface (CHI). All components of the CSEI shall be reset (for example, all components set to zero) when the CC performs the state transition L5 or L6 of the HW state machine (see above). The components of the CSEI shall begin to be updated once a CC successfully passes the protocol startup phase (see above).

The components of the CSEI are updated upon the completion of the frame processing of each communication slot (see Chapter ‘Frame Processing’). The components of the CSEI shall also be updated at the completion of symbol processing (see Chapter ‘Symbol Processing’).

If a CSEI component is already set due to an earlier update, the component shall remain set. This allows the CSEI to report the aggregate status of all frames on the communication channel. All components of the CSEI shall be reset by a host read operation.

It shall be possible during configuration of the CC to define a subset of the CSEI components [Byte Coding Error/CRC Error, Slot Mismatch, Cycle Counter Mismatch, Length Mismatch, Unaccepted Symbol] to be the trigger condition for an interrupt to the host. This subset applies to all channels.

Coldstart Count Maximum Signal (CCMS)

The Coldstart Count Maximum Signal (CCMS) shall be set to indicate that the CC has reached the maximum number of allowed coldstart retries (see specification of coldstart in Chapter ‘Wakeup, Startup, and Reintegration’). The CCMS follows the value of vCCMS. CCMS shall be reset to zero when the CC performs the state transition L5 or L6 of the HW state machine (see Chapter ‘Requirements for Hardware States’). The CCMS is set to one only during protocol startup phase if vCCMS was set (see Chapter ‘Wakeup, Startup, and Reintegration’). Once set to one, the CCMS remains set until the CC performs the state transition L5 or L6 of the HW state machine next time.

Clock Related Error Signals and Counters

Startup Majority Missed Signal (SMMS)

The Startup Majority Missed Signal (SMMS) shall be set to indicate that the CC has received a set of sync frames during startup that did not result in a majority of the sync frames agreeing with the local view of the system time (see Chapter ‘Wakeup, Startup, and Reintegration’). The SMMS follows the value of vSMMS. The SMMS shall be reset to zero when the CC performs the state transition L5 or L6 of the HW state machine (see Chapter ‘Requirements for Hardware States’). The SMMS is set to one if vSMMS was set in protocol startup phase.

Once set to one, the SSMS remains set until the host clears this signal.

Missing Rate Correction Signal (MRCS)

The Missing Rate Correction Signal (MRCS) indicates the inability to calculate a clock synchronization rate correction value due to the lack of any matching pairs of sync frames in the even and odd communication cycles. The MRCS follows the value of vMRCS. MRCS shall be set if vMRCS was set by the clock synchronization mechanism (see Chapter ‘Clock Synchronization’). In the dynamic media access mode the set condition is given if the node has not received an even and an odd reference frame. Since the reference frame provides all timing information in a system operating in the dynamic media access mode, the node providing the reference frame in such a system will never indicate an MRCS error.

The signal shall remain set to one until the clock synchronization algorithm is able to compute a valid rate correction term and therefore resets vMRCS.

The MRCS shall be set to zero when the CC performs the state transition L5 or L6 of the HW state machine (see Chapter ‘Requirements for Hardware States’).

During protocol startup phase MRCS shall be set to one if the signal vMRCS was set by startup (see Chapter ‘Wakeup, Startup, and Reintegration’). For non-sync nodes and for a sync node in listen-only mode this signal indicates that a second pair of matching sync frames is missing. The MRCS remains set to one until the host clears this signal or the protocol startup phase was passed successfully.

It shall be possible during configuration of the CC to define that MRCS is a trigger of an interrupt to the host.

Missing Offset Correction Signal (MOCS)

The Missing Offset Correction Signal (MOCS) indicates the inability to calculate an offset correction value due to a lack of sync frames in an odd communication cycle by the clock synchronization mechanism (see Chapter ‘Clock Synchronization’). The MOCS follows the value of vMOCS. MOCS shall be set if vMOCS was set by the clock synchronization mechanism (see Chapter ‘Clock Synchronization’). In the dynamic media access mode this occurs if the node does not receive a reference frame in an odd cycle. The node providing the reference frame will never indicate an MOCS error.

The signal remains set to one until the clock synchronization algorithm can compute a valid offset correction term and therefore resets vMOCS.

The MOCS shall be set to zero when the CC performs the state transition L5 or L6 of the HW state machine (see Chapter ‘Requirements for Hardware States’).

During protocol startup phase, the MOCS shall remain at its initial value. No update of this signal is possible until the node successfully exits protocol startup phase.

It shall be possible during configuration of the CC to define that MOCS is a trigger of an interrupt to the host.

Clock Correction Limit Reached (CCLR)

The Clock Correction Limit Reached (CCLR) indicates an inability to apply a clock synchronization rate or offset correction because the computed correction has exceeded the limiting values. The CCLR follows the value of vCCLR. The CCLR shall be set to one if the limit checks on the rate and offset correction values indicate either or both of these parameters are in the red region and vCCLR was set (see Section 0). The CCLR signal shall remain set to one until the node is able to compute rate and offset correction terms that are both in the green area and therefore the clock synchronization mechanism resets vCCLR to zero. The CCLR error signal shall also be set to zero when the CC performs the state transition L5 or L6 of the HW state machine (see Chapter ‘Requirements for Hardware States’).

Note that the red/green region determinations are performed after taking into account any external clock corrections provided by the host (see Section ‘External Clock Synchronization (Optional)’). Because of this, the vCCLR is based on the aggregate of the internal and external clock correction terms (if any). As a result, a system that would not normally experience CCLR due to internal clock synchronization (for example, the reference node in a system operating in the dynamic media access node) may still experience such errors as a result of external rate correction.

During protocol startup phase, the CCLR will be set to one if the vCCLR is set during protocol startup phase (see Chapter ‘Wakeup, Startup, and Reintegration’). CCLR signal remains set to one until the CC can compute valid rate and offset correction values and the protocol startup phase was passed successfully and therefore vCCLR was reset to zero (see Chapter ‘Wakeup, Startup, and Reintegration’). CCLR can be reset to zero by the host before the end of protocol startup phase was reached.

It shall be possible during configuration of the CC to define that CCLR is a trigger of an interrupt to the host.

Clock Correction Failed Counter (CCFC)

The Clock Correction Failed Counter (CCFC, range [0 . . . 15]) allows the host to monitor the duration of the inability of a node to compute clock correction terms after the CC passed protocol startup phase. t shall be incremented by one at the end of any odd communication cycle where either MOCS or MRCS is set. The CCFC shall be reset to zero at the end of an odd communication cycle if neither the MOCS nor the MRCS are active. The CCFC stops incrementing at 15 (i.e., incrementing the counter at its maximum value shall not cause it to “wraparound” back to zero). The CCFC shall be reset to zero when the CC performs the state transition L5 or L6 of the HW state machine (see Chapter ‘Requirements for Hardware States’).

Summary

The following tables summarize the conditions and applicability of the various clock-related error signals and counters

TABLE 26 Clock Synchronization Error Signals and Counters During CC_Normal Operation and CC_Passive Operation After an Triggered Every Even/Odd Error by/Increment Communication Communication signal/counter condition Cycle Cycle Clock Correction Failed MRCS or/and MOCS — Applies Counter (CCFC) Missing Rate vMRCS set by clock — Applies Correction Signal synchronization (MRCS) Missing Offset vMOCS set by clock — Applies Correction Signal synchronization (MOCS) Clock Correction Limit vCCLR set by clock — Applies Reached (CCLR) synchronization

TABLE 27 Clock Synchronization Error Signals and Counters During Protocol startup phase After an Triggered Every Even/Odd Error by/Increment Communication Communication signal/counter condition Cycle Cycle Clock Correction Failed not updated during — — Counter (CCFC) protocol startup phase Missing Rate vMRCS set by — Applies Correction Signal startup (MRCS) Missing Offset not updated during — — Correction Signal protocol startup (MOCS) phase Clock Correction Limit vCCLR set by Applies Applies Reached (CCLR) startup Startup Majority vSMMS set by — Applies Missed Signal (SMMS) startup Bus Guardian Schedule Monitor Error (BGME)

The Bus Guardian Schedule Monitor Error (BGME) is used to signal that the CC has detected that the static segment transmission pattern enforced by the bus guardian does not match the static segment transmission pattern configured into the communication controller. The BGME follows the value of the vBgsmError parameter defined in the description of the BG Schedule Monitoring (see Section ‘BG Schedule Monitoring Service’).

The BGME shall be set to zero when the CC performs the state transition L5 or L6 of the HW state machine (see Chapter ‘Requirements for Hardware States’). The BGME shall be set to one whenever vBgsmError=TRUE (see specification in Chapter ‘Bus Guardian Interface’). (For the behavior during protocol startup phase, please refer to Chapter ‘Bus Guardian Interface’ as well).

BGME shall be set to zero as soon as the host acknowledges the BG schedule mismatch by an active acknowledgement via the signal vBgsmErrorAck (see Chapter ‘Bus Guardian Interface’).

Certain systems do not make use of the BG Schedule monitoring service. There is no requirement for the CC to provide a mechanism to allow this service to be disabled—non-applicable results must be ignored by the host.

It shall be possible during configuration of the CC to define that BGME is a trigger of an interrupt to the host.

TABLE 28 Error Signals Related to BG Schedule Monitoring Error Static Dynamic signal/counter Triggered by Segment Segment Bus Guardian Schedule VBgsmError = TRUE Applies Applies Monitor Error (BGME) Error Signals Related to SOC/ILLPIF (byteflight Mode)

The following error signals may be used to allow the host to monitor the status of the periodic SOC symbol and to detect the occurrence of illegal pulses instead of SOC symbols for systems operating in the byteflight media access mode.

In byteflight mode the byteflight master CC controls the communication schedule by its SOC symbol and therefore the following error signals are not applicable to a node operating as the byteflight master.

SOC Early

This error signal shall be set if the end of a correct SOC (symbol passed the check set “ValidSOC”) occurs before gdCycleMin. This error signal is reset by a host read operation.

SOC Lost

This error signal shall be set if the end of a valid SOC does not occur before gdCycleMax (no symbol passed the check set “ValidSOC” before gdCycleMax). This error signal is reset by a host read operation.

Illegal Pulse Error (ILLPIF)

This error signal shall be set if either of the following conditions are met

-   -   gdCycleMin has not expired since the last valid SOC symbol         (symbol passed check set “ValidSOC”) and a sequence of logic “0”         with a duration of between 21*gdBit and 29*gdBit or a duration         of more than 31*gdBit has been received, OR     -   gdCycleMin has expired since the last correct (valid) SOC symbol         (symbol passed check set “ValidSOC”) and some bus activity was         recognized other than a valid SOC symbol.

This error signal is reset by a host read operation.

TABLE 29 Error Signals related to SOC/ILLPIF in byteflight mode Byteflight Static Dynamic Error signal Triggered by mode Segment Segment SOC Early ValidSOC before Applies — — gdCycleMin SOC Lost GdCycleMax without Applies — — ValidSOC ILLPIF Illegal Pulse before Applies — — gdCycleMin ILLPIF Illegal Pulse instead Applies — — ValidSOC Error Handling

Error handling denotes the behavior of the lower protocol layers when irregular protocol conditions have been detected. Depending on the nature and duration of the error condition, the protocol controller enters certain states to deal with such conditions. In some cases, higher layer program command activity is required for the protocol controller to resume normal operation.

The error handling concept described in this document is intended to ensure communication between non-affected nodes can be maintained in the presence of a lower layer protocol error in a single node. It is also intended to maintain communication when a host behaves in a non-optimal way in the absence of an error in the local lower layer protocol.

Protocol Error States

The error handling mechanisms described here are aimed maintaining communication as long as possible even in the presence of errors.

The error handling is based on three error states with an associated fault hypothesis and an associated strategy for the next steps (behavior) of the CC (see Table 30). These error states correspond to a traffic light model [green, yellow, red].

TABLE 30 Protocol Error States [Green, Yellow, Red] State Activity Green CC: full operation. CHI: error signals might be set indicating a detected fault (Errors have been detected, but they are still consistent with the fault hypothesis implicit in the green state.). Frame processing: Normal operation. BG: remains synchronized with the CC. Fault Hypothesis: CC external faults, such as electromagnetic interference, are assumed to be much more probable than CC internal faults. The BG is assumed to be functional and would prevent schedule violation of its CC. Strategy: The strategy is to stay fully synchronized and support the cluster wide clock synchronization. No immediate effect on protocol operation by a detected error assumed. The host is just informed of any error condition(s) by error signaling. Yellow CC: reduced operation - no frame transmission and no active contribution to the cluster wide clock synchronization. CHI: error signal(s) set indicating a detected fault. Frame processing: The CC stops transmitting frames, but received frames are still processed. Clock synchronization mechanisms are continued based on received frames. BG: Remains synchronized as the CC continues to provide the ARM, MT, and BGT signals. Fault Hypothesis: An external or internal (CC-related) fault is assumed to be present. The fault causing the error was non-fatal - only partial defects in registers, memory or CC logic is assumed. The clock synchronization of the CC may not be working correctly. As a consequence, it is possible that both the CC and its BG could follow an incorrect macrotick over several cycles and therefore the BG no longer prevents schedule violations of its CC. Strategy: The CC shall process incoming frames but shall stop sending frames. Once the CC reaches clock agreement with other CCs it may resume normal operation without host intervention. Red CC: Operation halted - no receive frame processing and clock synchronization processing shall take place. All signals to the bus driver and bus guardian are set to their defined states. CHI: error signaling for detected error(s). Access to the CHI shall be possible for the host. Frame processing: All signals to the bus driver and the bus guardian shall be frozen at their last states. BG: BG will enter FailSilent state due to lack of transitions of the ARM, MT, or BGT signals. Fault Hypothesis1: An internal (CC related) fault has happened, e.g. internal parameter check(s) failed. Fault Hypothesis2: The CC was not able to self-rescue based on the yellow fault hypothesis and a fatal fault shall to be assumed. Strategy: CC shall disable any transmissions. A reset from the host is required to resume operation. Overview of Transitions in the FlexRay Error State Machine

The following sections and tables summarize the required relations between the error signals, the values of the error counters and the transitions within the protocol error states [green, yellow, red]. The states reflect the FlexRay error handling based on the three-state fault hypothesis of the protocol. Section ‘Error Handling for TT-D and TT-M Protocol Modes’ covers the transitions during protocol operation for the Time-Triggered Distributed Protocol Mode and Time-Triggered Master-Controlled Protocol Mode, and section ‘Error Handling for Protocol Operation in byteflight Protocol Mode’ covers the transitions during protocol operation in the byteflight Protocol Mode.

Error Handling for TT-D and TT-M Protocol Modes

This section describes the central error handling mechanism for FlexRay nodes operating in the static, mixed, and dynamic media access modes. The protocol error state is set to green when the CC performs the state transition L5 or L6 of the HW state machine (see Chapter ‘Requirements for Hardware States’), independent of the configured FlexRay mode (static, dynamic, or mixed).

If the CCFC value is less than gMaxWithoutClockCorrectionPassive (range [1 . . . 7]) then the error state shall be in green state, unless some other error causes a yellow or red state.

If the CCFC becomes equal to gMaxWithoutClockCorrectionPassive the fault hypothesis of yellow state shall be assumed (unless some other condition would cause the error state to be red). The clock correction might not work correctly and therefore the CC shall not send any frames. It is possible that also the BG is not synchronized to the cluster's schedule. As long as CCFC does not reach gMaxWithoutClockCorrectionFatal (range [≧gMaxWithoutClockCorrectionPassive . . . 15]) the CC remains in the yellow error state. If CCFC becomes reset again (see section 0), the green state shall become active, unless some other error causes a yellow or red state. The CC was able to resynchronize and is fully operational.

If the CCFC becomes equal to gMaxWithoutClockCorrectionFatal the fault hypothesis of the red state shall be assumed. The CC was not able to resynchronize to the cluster. The CC shall only be reset by its host. The parameter gMaxWithoutClockCorrectionFatal is considered to be a user-defined threshold that is used to control the change of fault hypothesis and sets the threshold of when to change from yellow state into red state. If the node is configured with gMaxWithoutClockCorrectionPassive=gMaxWithoutClockCorrectionFatal then the node shall enter the red state as soon as the CCFC equals their common value. This configuration may be desirable for certain types of systems.

If the CCLR is set (see section 0) the CC shall immediately enter the red protocol error state. The CC shall remain in the red state until the host resets the CC.

During protocol startup phase the CCLR shall not influence the error handling mechanism.

The transitions described above are used in all FlexRay media access modes. The dynamic mode has some special situations, however. In the dynamic mode only one static slot with the purpose of sending the reference frame is defined and therefore the system operates in a master/slave configuration. All CCs acting as slaves in the cluster have to accept the reference frame and its content as the sole data source for their clock synchronization algorithms. This results in a clock synchronization algorithm that is based upon the receipt of just one sync frame (see Chapter ‘Clock Synchronization’). The mechanism itself, including rate and offset correction calculation, can deal with this (i.e., the single sync node case is just a special case of the general clock synchronization algorithm). Therefore nodes operating in the dynamic media access mode shall use the same clock synchronization error handling mechanisms as would be used in the other media access modes. An MRCS on such a system means that the even and/or odd reference frame was missing and no rate correction value could be calculated. An MOCS means that no odd reference frame was received and no offset correction term could be calculated. The CCFC shall be incremented according its specification in section ‘Clock Correction Failed Counter (CCFC)’, and therefore the error state machine shall follow the behavior defined above. Special attention shall be given to the configuration of the values for gMaxWithoutClockCorrectionPassive and gMaxWithoutClockCorrectionFatal. As defined, a slave will stop sending any data frame as soon as it enters the yellow state.

The same is true for the limit checks at the slaves. If the reference frame deviates too much from the slave's local view of the global time and invalid correction activity (in rate and/or offset) becomes necessary, the CCLR signal shall be set and the protocol error state machine shall move into the red state.

As the master CC controls the timing of the complete cluster by its reference frame no error handling activity concerning CCFC shall influence the master CC during normal operation (see Chapter ‘Clock Synchronization’). The error handling of the master node shall only be influenced by the CCLR signal if external clock synchronization is applied. The external rate and/or offset correction values might result in a limit violation of the rate and offset correction values (see Chapter ‘Clock Synchronization’).

Table 31 summarizes the transitions for the static, mixed and dynamic media access modes.

TABLE 31 Error Management State Machines Transitions for Time-Triggered Distributed Protocol Mode and Time-Triggered Master-Controlled Protocol Mode State Transition Direction Transition From State To State Conditions for Transition F1 CC_SoftReset Green Soft reset released (L5 or L6 of Chapter ‘Requirements for Hardware States’) F2 Green Yellow ( CC in “Protocol Operation Phase”  AND End of odd Cycle (after clock correction calculation)  AND CCFC = gMaxWithoutClockCorrectionPassive  AND CCFC < gMaxWithoutClockCorrectionFatal  AND CCLR is not set ) F3 Red CC in “ CC in “Protocol Operation Phase”  AND End of odd Cycle (after clock correction calculation)  AND ( CCLR set  OR CCFC = gMaxWithoutClockCorrectionFatal ) F4 Yellow Red CC in “Protocol Operation Phase”  AND End of odd Cycle (after clock correction calculation)  AND ( CCLR set  OR CCFC = ) gMaxWithoutClockCorrectionFatal F5 Green ( CC in “Protocol Operation Phase  AND End of odd Cycle (after clock correction calculation)  AND CCFC has been set to zero  AND CCLR is not set ) FIG. 72 shows an error management state transition diagram for the time-triggered distributed protocol mode and for the time-triggered master-controlled protocol mode. Error Handling for Protocol Operation in byteflight Protocol Mode

This section describes the central error handling mechanism for byteflight mode.

Each time the host gives the “clear command” while the CC is in configuration state the protocol error state is set to green. By the definition of in the byteflight specification (see M. Peller, J. Berwanger, and R. Greissbach, byteflight Specification, version 0.5, BMW Corporation 1999, available at http://www.byteflight.com), the reception of an SOC is always the trigger to start a new communication cycle and the CC starts operation (protocol startup phase is finished).

If a communication cycle is still ongoing and an SOC is received (SOC before gdCycleMin), a new communication cycle has to be started (the master sent the SOC and therefore has to be accepted by all nodes). The CC remains in the green state.

If a communication cycle is already finished and the next SOC is missing (gdCycleMax has passed), the CC does not start a new communication cycle until the SOC is detected. Within that time, the CC remains passive (yellow state).

If an ILLPIF is detected instead of an SOC (between gdCycleMin and gdCycleMax) or even during an ongoing communication cycle, the CC enters the yellow state. The detection of an SOC causes the CC to switch into green state anyway.

Table 32 summarizes the transitions for byteflight mode.

TABLE 32 Error Management State Machines Transitions for byteflight Protocol Mode State Transition Direction Transition From State To State Conditions for Transition B1 CC_SoftReset Green Soft reset released (L5 or L6 of Chapter ‘Requirements for Hardware States’) AND byteflight mode configured (gNumberofStaticSlots equal to zero) B2 Green Green SOC before gdCycleMin B3 Yellow GdCycleMax reached without SOC  OR Illegal Pulse before gdCycleMin  OR ( Illegal Pulse after gdCycleMin AND Illegal Pulse before gdCycleMax ) B4 Yellow Green SOC received

FIG. 73 shows an error management state transition diagram for the byteflight protocol mode.

Protocol Error State Signal

The host shall have the possibility to read the current protocol error state (PESS, range [Green, Yellow, Red]) at any time.

It shall be possible during configuration of the CC to define that a change within PESS is a trigger of an interrupt to the host.

Controller Host Interface

Introduction

Purpose and Scope

The purpose of this chapter is to describe the conceptual structure and required functions and properties of the controller host interface that handles the control and data flow between the host processor and FlexRay controller protocol engine.

The scope of is chapter reaches from the host processor interface to the protocol engine interface. FlexRay protocol functions are not described.

Definitions, Acronyms and Abbreviations

This chapter and the following Chapter contain a number of requirements but also introductions, comments, explanations, etc. All requirements are documented in following format:

-   -   Requirement 1<text for requirement one>

Text in a different format does not constitute a requirement and is therefore not subject to conformance testing.

-   CHI elements—are the seven elements of the CHI: Host processor     interface, control data handling, status data handling, message data     handling, configuration data handling, CHI services, protocol engine     interface -   Configuration data—is used to program a FlexRay communication     controller in order to communicate with other FlexRay controllers.     Configuration data has a constant impact on the behavior of protocol     implementation during NormalOperation unless changed by the host.     This characteristic distinguishes the configuration data from the     control data that has only temporal impact during NormalOperation.     Moreover the host processor is the only source for configuration     data. -   Controller state—is the superset of protocol state and other states     of the controller which are not determined by the protocol state     machine (e.g. HardReset state, Configuration, Standby, etc.) -   Interrupt—is an event triggered by a FlexRay controller and     propagated to the host processor by a dedicated communication link     in order to indicate that a specific condition has become true in     the FlexRay controller. Note that in interrupts are generated by the     CHI element Host interrupt service but its propagation to the host     processor is controlled by the CHI element Status data handling. -   Message memory—is memory that contains information contained in a     received frame or a frame that was or will be transmitted. -   Message status memory—is memory that contains status information     about a received or transmitted frame. -   Message control field—is a field the host can use to control the use     of a message memory. -   Message data—is a subset of data contained a FlexRay frame. It does     not include FrameID nor FrameCRC. It includes the following data:     ReservedBits, NMIndicationBit, PayloadLength, HeaderCRC, CycleCount,     FData[0 . . . 254]. -   NormalOperation—is the state where the controller can participate in     or initiate the cluster communication by receiving or transmitting     frames. This state includes the listen-only mode. -   Status data—is all kind of data the controller determines without     interaction with the host by receiving information from the FlexRay     Physical Layer or Bus Guardian or by controller internal mechanisms. -   Slot-channel tuples—determine the allocation of transmission     bandwidth on a specific channel and slot for transmission in the     static segment. This is necessary as two controllers may share a     single slot—one for each channel. -   Data blocks—are sets of data bytes which belong together, namely the     fNMVector, fData, fFrameID, fHeaderCRC, vStatusVector,     vInterruptStatusVector -   Static frame—is a frame with fFrameID smaller or equal to     gNumberOfStaticSlots -   Dynamic frame—is a frame with fFrameID larger than     gNumberOfStaticSlots -   Application requirements—a set of requirements determined by a     concrete application or a group of similar applications -   CC Configuration state—a state where the host can configure the     FlexRay controller. Neither transmission nor reception is possible     during this state. This state is not left unless the host explicitly     requests the FlexRay controller to exit it. -   HardReset state—the state entered automatically by the FlexRay     controller after power has been turned on or after activation of a     dedicated hard reset trigger. After initialization of registers and     memories with default values the FlexRay controller automatically     transits to the CC configuration state. -   Controller state—is the combination of the protocol state with all     states of state machines operating in parallel in a controller     implementation. -   Passive state—a state where the FlexRay controller does not transmit     any data but keeps receiving data. It also continues to perform the     clock synchronization. -   Freeze state—a state where the FlexRay controller does neither     transmit nor receive data, clock synchronization is stopped and all     data accessible for host through the CHI remains constant unless a     change is performed by host itself.     Overview of the CHI     Conceptual Architecture

The controller host interface (CHI) manages the data and control flow between the host processor and the FlexRay protocol engine.

Conceptually the CHI consists of seven CHI constituent components. These are the host processor interface and the protocol engine interface, the four data handling units—status data handling, control data handling, message data handling and configuration data handling—, and the CHI services. Note that the hardware architecture of a controller implementation can be quite different than this conceptual architecture.

FIG. 74 illustrates the conceptual architecture of the controller host interface and its seven components. The components are described in Sections ‘Host Processor Interface’ through ‘Protocol Engine Interface’ and in Section ‘CHI Services’.

Host Processor Interface

The host processor interface provides the host processor with control means and gives it access to data held in the four CHI data handling units. In general, FlexRay does not enforce a particular way of how this interface is realized. It can be realized in different ways, for example, as a parallel processor bus or as serial communication link such as SPI.

Configuration Data Handling

The configuration data handling unit contains the functions and memory required to handle and store the communication controller related configuration data. The configuration data written by the host processor is used to derive all configuration parameters required by the protocol engine. The protocol engine has to use protocol parameters as provided by this CHI element. The configuration data handling unit may also conduct sanity checks of the configuration data.

FlexRay distinguishes between two subsets of configuration data:

-   constant configuration data—may only be changed while the FlexRay     protocol is in the CC configuration state, it remains constant     during NormalOperation. The ability of the host to modify this data     is disabled as long as transmission and/or reception on at least one     communication channel is enabled. -   variable configuration data—must be set by the host in the CC     configuration state unless initialized with valid default values by     the FlexRay controller. This data can be modified by the host at any     time when the hard reset condition is not given e.g. also when     NormalOperation is active.

Note that configuration data has a constant impact on the behavior of protocol implementation during NormalOperation unless changed by the host. This characteristic distinguishes constant as well as variable configuration data from control data that has only temporal impact during NormalOperation. Moreover, the host processor is the only source for configuration data, but control data may be affected by the protocol engine as well (e.g., interrupt indicators are set by the protocol engine but reset by the host).

Control Data Handling

This CHI element processes control commands from the host processor. This CHI element also handles control commands for other CHI elements, e.g. for CHI services.

Status Data Handling

This CHI element collects status data from the protocol engine and CHI services, processes it and provides it to the host processor on request. It handles status data of messages. It propagates interrupt requests triggered by the Host interrupt service to the host processor interface. It contains memory to store status data.

Message Data Handling

This CHI element transfers message data and provides it to the host processor interface as well as to the protocol engine interface. It contains memory to store message data.

Memory associated with one message's data is called a message buffer. A message buffer that is configured to store data for frames to be transmitted is called a transmit buffer. A message buffer that is configured to store data for received frames is called a receive buffer.

Note that this CHI element does not handle status data of messages.

-   -   Requirement 1: The FlexRay controller may not modify a transmit         buffer's content during NormalOperation nor during Configuration         State. Note that the protocol engine may append the padding         pattern to the payload section of frames to be transmitted which         contain more payload data than can be stored in the         corresponding transmit buffer. This does not modify the transmit         buffer's content.         Protocol Engine Interface

The protocol engine interface provides the protocol engine with a means of control and gives it access to data held in the four CHI data handling units. Moreover it allows the protocol engine to interoperate with the CHI services. This interface is not visible to the host.

-   -   Requirement 2: The protocol engine interface shall provide         atomic data read operations, so that once a read operation is         initiated the transferred data is guaranteed not to be changed         until the read operation has concluded.     -   Requirement 3: The protocol engine interface shall provide         atomic data write operations, so that during a write operation         to a memory cell of a CHI element no other CHI element can read         an inconsistent value from or write to this memory cell.

Note that the previous two requirements are necessary but not sufficient. For further message data handling requirements see below.

CHI States

FIG. 75 shows various Controller Host Interface (CHI) States.

CHI state transition triggers (Transitions W1 and W5 are described in Table 13):

-   vConfigure in {TRUE, FALSE} -   vWakeUp in {TRUE, FALSE} -   vNormalOperation in {TRUE, FALSE} -   vFreeze in {TRUE, FALSE} -   vStandby in {TRUE, FALSE}

CHI state description:

-   HardReset state: Reached after the hard reset of the controller was     triggered. Initializes controller with a default state. -   Configuration state: Puts protocol engine in Configure state.     Enables host processor to change configuration data. Sets all CHI     state transition triggers to FALSE. -   WakeUp state: Sets vWakeup to FALSE. Puts protocol engine in     WakeUpListen state. The protocol engine may transit to WakeUpSend     state. State transitions to Configure state are described in Chapter     ‘Wakeup, Startup, and Reintegration’. -   NormalOperation state: Sets vNormalOperation trigger to FALSE. On     entry initializes controller internal states according to     configuration, then triggers startup in protocol engine. Note that     this state contains all protocol states where the protocol engine     has an interaction with other FlexRay nodes via the FlexRay bus.     Protocol state changes can be requested within this state, e.g. the     protocol engine can be requested to transit to Passive state in     order to prepare further state transitions (e.g. shutdown, standby,     etc.). -   Standby state: Sets vStandby trigger to FALSE. Puts controller in a     low power mode. The minimal required functionality is that CHI is     able to detect when the host sets the vConfigure trigger. -   Freeze state: Sets vFreeze trigger to FALSE. Stops any interaction     of the protocol engine with other FlexRay nodes. All protocol     parameters including the complete protocol state are frozen. This     mode allows the host processor to perform diagnosis.     CHI Services

FIG. 76 shows vaious interactions of CHI services with CHI elements. CHI services receive data from the protocol engine about received and transmitted communication elements as well as about the protocol and error status. They may use data stored in the status, control, message or configuration interface.

CHI services may affect data stored in the status, control or message interface. They may not affect data stored in the configuration interface.

CHI services do not affect the protocol engine's operation, neither directly nor indirectly through one of status, control or message data handling elements.

General Requirements

-   -   Requirement 4: It shall be assured that the concurrent operation         of CHI elements cannot cause deadlocks.     -   Requirement 5: In case of concurrent access of different CHI         elements to shared CHI elements the host processor interface and         the protocol engine interface shall have priority over other CHI         elements.     -   Requirement 6: In case of concurrent access of the host         processor interface and the protocol engine interface to shared         CHI elements the protocol engine interface shall have priority.         An exception is Requirement 7 (Rationale: Necessary in order to         assure that timeliness of all protocol engine operations.).     -   Requirement 7: In case the host processor requests a protocol         state change to FreezeState or to ConfigurationState through         RequestStateChange it has priority over the protocol engine         interface.     -   Requirement 8: The data bandwidth of communication within the         CHI shall be fast enough to support 100% bus utilization on each         of its channels during NormalOperation of the protocol engine.         Note that this requirement addresses only the internal         communication of the CHI, so it is not affected by performance         limitations of the implemented host processor interface.         Assumptions and Dependencies

All assumptions and dependencies are documented where they apply. There are no additional general assumptions or dependencies.

Host Processor Interface

The following set of requirements must be met by every instantiation of the host processor interface.

-   -   Requirement 9: The host processor interface shall provide an         atomic data read operation from memory cells such that once a         read operation is initiated by the host the transferred data is         guaranteed not to be changed until the read operation has         concluded.     -   Requirement 10: The host processor interface shall provide an         atomic data write operation such that during a host processor         write operation to a memory cell of a CHI element no other CHI         element can read an inconsistent value from this memory cell.

Note that the previous two requirements are necessary but not always sufficient for consistent data access, e.g. for message buffer access further mechanisms are necessary (see section ‘Message Data Handling Interaction’).

-   -   Requirement 11: The host processor interface shall provide at         least one dedicated interrupt signal.     -   Requirement 12: The host processor interface shall trigger an         interrupt request to the host processor via the interrupt signal         whenever requested by the status data handling.

It is also possible to provide a FlexRay communication controller with multiple host processor interfaces. If a FlexRay controller implementation supports multiple instances of host processor interfaces (e.g. a parallel bus and a serial communication link or different multiple parallel busses) then the following additional two requirements apply:

-   -   Requirement 13: A mechanism shall be provided that allows the         selection of exactly one host processor interface instance         before the communication between FlexRay controller and host         processor begins.     -   Requirement 14: A change of this selection shall become         effective only by putting the FlexRay controller in HardReset         state. If the selection changes during other states (except         PowerOff state or Standby state.) it may not result in a change         of the host processor interface.         Configuration Data Handling Interaction         Relationship Between Configuration Data and Protocol Parameters

In a FlexRay controller the configuration data will usually be comprised of a set of registers and memories. However there is not necessarily a one-to-one mapping between this set and the protocol parameters it determines. This is the case because there are protocol parameters, which can be derived from other protocol parameters. Moreover, a FlexRay controller may require parameters in a different representation than specified further on (Example: pSamplePeriod [ns]=gdBit [ns]/pSamplesPerBit)).

Configuration Data Handling Requirements

Interaction with the configuration data handling must meet the following requirements

-   -   Requirement 15: Configuration data shall not be changed by the         FlexRay controller except as result of the activation of hard         reset trigger or after power has been applied.

It is assumed that the host in any case will have means to determine whether a mechanism such as “HardReset” have modified configuration data. Moreover, no protocol mechanism will ever change any configuration data under any circumstance.

-   -   Requirement 16: After activation of the hard reset or after         power on the configuration data shall be initialized by         configuration data handling with default configuration values         assuring that the FlexRay controller does not transmit data on         the FlexRay bus. When the host processor requests a state change         to NormalOperation without changing any configuration data no         data may be transmitted on the FlexRay bus independent of the         resulting protocol state. Rationale: This is a fail silence         requirement for the case of a fault causing a hard reset or         power up where the host would not write any configuration data.     -   Requirement 17: Configuration data shall be designed in a way         that all protocol parameters are determined unambiguously.     -   Requirement 18: Configuration data shall be designed in a way         that all protocol parameters are determined with at least the         resolution given further on. The resolutions and units of all         configuration data shall be done in a way that all this         resolution is achieved for all valid configurations.     -   Requirement 19: It shall be assured that the FlexRay controller         never transmits more than one sync frame per communication         cycle, even when the host has attempted to configure the FlexRay         controller to do so. The FlexRay controller shall employ special         measures to prevent this from happening.     -   Requirement 20: At least the following parameters shall be         determined by constant configuration data:         -   1. All cluster constants (This covers several parameters,             e.g. gdStartup, gStartupNoise, etc.)         -   2. All node constants (This covers several parameters, e.g.             pdWakeupPattern, etc.)         -   3. Timing parameters         -   4. In case pSyncNode is TRUE the value of pSyncSlot         -   5. Frame identifiers, transmission channels and cycle             counter filters of all static frames that may be transmitted             (Note that this deals only with configuration data and             determines which slot-channel tuples are allocated for             transmission by one FlexRay Controller. It does not imply             that message memory is provided in the message data handling             element for every slot-channel tuple.)         -   6. Physical layer (optical or electrical), encoding     -   Requirement 21: The host shall have write access to constant         configuration data only when the protocol is in the CC         configuration state. When the protocol is in any other state         this data shall be write protected against access by the host         processor.     -   Requirement 22: Appropriate mechanisms shall be provided that         support changes of variable configuration data during         NormalOperation. These mechanisms shall ensure that the subset         of configuration data to be changed is not used by the protocol         engine during the duration of the change process. Indirectly         this requires a locking mechanism for all cases where an atomic         change is not possible.     -   Requirement 23: Variable configuration data shall be clustered         in configuration subsets of configuration data belonging         together in a way that that an update of one subset cannot cause         an inconsistent configuration during or after the update.     -   Requirement 24: At least the following parameters are determined         by variable configuration data         -   1. Frame identifiers of messages in the dynamic segment         -   2. vColdStartInhibit     -   Requirement 25: The following parameters shall be determined by         exactly one of variable configuration data or constant         configuration data.         -   1. (currently no parameter identified for this category)     -   Requirement 26: The host shall have read access to all         configuration data in all controller states except PowerDown         state and HardReset state.         Control Data Handling Interaction         Control of Protocol Parameters     -   Requirement 27: Means shall be provided to determine and change         the following protocol parameters during NormalOperation state:         -   1. vOffsetCorrectionExtern, vRateCorrectionExtern         -   2. vBgsmErrorAck (Can be discarded if locked parameter is             used for BgsmError)         -   3. vColdStartInhibit             Control Commands for the Host Processor     -   Requirement 28: At least the following control commands shall be         provided to the host processor: (TBD wording)         -   1. ChangeControllerState (handles superset of changes to             protocol engine interface—maybe better ChangeControllerState             to cover non-protocol state changes as well)         -   2. EnableInterrupt (<interrupt_type>)         -   3. DisableInterrupt (<interrupt_type>)         -   4. EnableCHIService (<CHI_service>, <CHI_service_feature>)         -   5. DisableCHIService (<CHI_service>, <CHI_service_feature>)

TABLE 33 ChangeControllerState ChangeControllerState ( <requested_controller_state> ) Purpose Control command for the host processor to requests a change of the controller state Arguments requested controller state <requested_controller_state> [HardReset state, CC Configuration state, NormalOperation state, Freeze state, WakeUp state, Standby state] Return values None Operation Depending on the requested controller state a request is generated to the protocol engine through the ChangeProtocolState interface. The CHI waits for the protocol engine to perform the requested state transition. Subsequently the appropriate CHI state trigger is set to TRUE.

TABLE 34 Impact of Controller State Change on Protocol Engine and CHI (The maximum latency is before entering the state assuming that the requested transition is legal; the maximum latency in the controller state NormalOperation depends on the performance of controller implementation; this assumes that controller internal states must be initialized depending on configuration.) Requested Argument for Maximum controller state ChangeProtocolState CHI state trigger latency Freeze Freeze Sets vFreeze to TRUE 100 ns Configuration Configuration Sets vConfiguration to 100 ns TRUE Standby Freeze Sets vStandby to TRUE 100 ns NormalOperation NormalOperation Sets vNormalOperation to 150 us TRUE WakeUp WakeUpListen Sets vWakeup to TRUE 100 ns Note that Table 34 is not subject to conformance testing. Specific FlexRay controller implementations may have deviating maximum latency values. However, these values must be determined, documented and constant.

TABLE 35 EnableInterrupt/DisableInterrupt (Further interrupt types may be supported but are not required) EnableInterrupt ( <interrupt_type> )/ DisableInterrupt ( <interrupt_type> ) Purpose Enable/disable specific interrupts Arguments interrupt type to enable/disable<interrupt_type> <interrupt_type> [RXInterrupt, TXInterrupt, ErrorSignalingInterrupt] Return values None

TABLE 36 EnableCHIService/DisableCHIService EnableCHIService ( <CHI_service>, <CHI_service_feature> ) DisableCHIService ( <CHI_service>, <CHI_service_feature> ) Purpose Enable/disable optional CHI services and CHI service features Arguments interrupt service; if <CHI_service_feature> equals “ALL” enable/disable complete service with all features <CHI_service> [message_filtering, message_FIFO, network_management, timer, error_signaling, symbol_handling, host_interrupt, optical_diagnosis] CHI service feature to enable/disable; if the CHI service does not have features or all features should be enabled/disabled use “ALL” <CHI_service_feature> [ALL, frame_ID_filtering, channel_filtering, cycle_counter_filtering, message_ID_filtering, receive_FIFO, NM_vector_extraction, NM_function_filtering, media_access_test_symbol_handling, status_symbol_handling, timer_interrupt, error_signaling_interrupt, NM_function_interrupt] Return None values Status Data Handling Interaction

Status data is derived from controller internal state variables which serve as their source. There are two types of status data:

-   -   1. Free status indicators that can change their value whenever         their source values change. Unless differently stated all         indicators below are free status indicators.     -   2. Locked status indicators that change their value if a         specific condition of the source value is fulfilled for a short         time (typically in the range of one to several controller clock         cycles) and keep this value even if the condition is no more         fulfilled.

Some status indicators may be combined in a super state which may not be accessible by one atomic host operation. Likewise for status indicators which are too large to be accessed by an atomic read operation. Dedicated status consistency mechanisms may be required to assure that they can be read consistently by the host processor with a non-atomic sequence of read operations.

-   -   Requirement 29: Free status indicators shall be read-only for         the host processor. Attempts by the host processor to overwrite         free status indicators may not affect them.     -   Requirement 30: Locked status indicators shall be set if a         specific internal state is reached, they shall not be set upon         request of the host processor.     -   Requirement 31: Locked status indicators shall be reset only         upon request of the host processor, they shall not be reset upon         change of the adjacent internal state.     -   Requirement 32: All status indicators shall be reset upon exit         from the CC configuration state.     -   Requirement 33: The current controller state shall be provided         on read request of the host.     -   Requirement 34: The current error status vector shall be         provided on read request of the host.     -   Requirement 35: A mechanism shall be provided that enables the         host to read the protocol state consistently.     -   Requirement 36: A mechanism shall be provided that enables the         host to read the error status vector consistently.     -   Requirement 37: If a host interrupt is generated by the host         interrupt service, and if this interrupt is enabled, it shall be         indicated to the host processor interface.     -   Requirement 38: Interrupts that are disabled shall not be         propagated to the host processor interface.     -   Requirement 39: The status data handling shall provide a         mechanism for the host processor to selectively enable and         disable each interrupt.     -   Requirement 40: A dedicated status indicator shall be provided         for each receive buffer to indicate when a receive buffer is         updated through the PutFrame interface.     -   Requirement 41: The following protocol variables shall be         provided (sets of status data belonging together are combined in         one bullet):         -   1. vColdStartCount         -   2. vValidSyncCount         -   3. vCycle, vMacrotick, vCurrentSlot, vErrorHandlingLevel         -   4. results of BG monitor checks         -   5. results of Media Access Test     -   Requirement 42: The following results of the clock         synchronization algorithm which is performed during NIT of cycle         n shall be provided throughout cycle n+1 and cycle n+2         -   1. vOffsetCorrection, vRateCorrection         -   2. an indicator for impossible rate or offset correction             term calculation         -   3. number of sync frame pairs used for the last clock             correction term calculation     -   Requirement 43: A startup status vector shall be provided         containing         -   1. An indicator set only when vColdStartMax is equal to             gColdStartMax         -   2. An indicator that plausibility check has failed         -   3. An indicator that normal state was entered via coldstart             path         -   4. An indicator that coldstart path has been entered due to             expiration of pStartupNoise     -   Requirement 44: For each receive buffer a corresponding status         vector shall be provided containing at least the following         status information         -   1. Semantically valid frame received         -   2. Syntactically correct null frame received         -   3. Syntactically correct sync frame received         -   4. Empty slot—idle was detected throughout the slot on the             reception channel         -   5. Cycle counter mismatch detected         -   6. Length mismatch detected (PayloadLength in static frame             does not match gPayloadLengthStatic)     -   Requirement 45: The status vector for a receive buffer shall be         updated whenever this buffer is selected by the message         selection process. (Note that this does not imply that the         receive buffer's data is updated as well.)     -   Requirement 46: A locked indicator shall be set on detection of         a wakeup pattern, that is, when the flag vWakeupSymbolReceived         is set.     -   Requirement 47: A locked indicator shall be set when         vWakeupFrameHeaderReceived is set.     -   Requirement 48: A locked indicator shall be set when the flag         vWakeupFailed is set.     -   Requirement 49: A locked indicator shall be set when the flag         vWakeupComplete is set.         Message Data Handling Interaction

The host can book a slot-channel tuple for transmission. Note that the booking does not include further conditions like subscription (e.g. cycle counter filtering) even though transmit buffers may support additional conditions to determine which data is transmitted during the booked slot-channel tuples. The booking of a specific slot-channel must be unique in the cluster. The host can also subscribe a slot-channel tuple for reception. Depending on the FlexRay controller implementation the subscription may include further conditions e.g. a matching cycle counter, etc. Identical subscriptions may coexist in the same cluster.

-   -   Requirement 50: In order for the host to manipulate the content         of message buffers at least the following interface functions         shall be supported (Further interface functions may be supported         to improve efficiency):         -   GetMessage         -   PutMessage

TABLE 37 GetMessage GetMessage ( <message_buffer> ) Purpose Interface function for the host processor to retrieve data from a (receive) message buffer. Arguments Select the message buffer <message_buffer> (values depend on controller implementation) Return values TRUE if the selected message buffer contains valid data, FALSE otherwise <valid_data> [ TRUE | FALSE ] Received message data <message_data> (FrameID, ReservedBits, SyncBit, NMIndicationBit, CycleCount, PayloadLength, HeaderCRC, FData[0..254]) (Does not contain FrameCRC)

TABLE 38 PutMessage PutMessage ( <message_buffer>, <message_data> ) Purpose Interface function for the host processor to change a (transmit) message buffer's content Arguments selected message buffer <message_buffer> (values depend on controller implementation) data to be put in the selected message buffer <message_data> (ReservedBits, NMIndicationBit, PayloadLength, HeaderCRC, FData[0..254]) (Does not contain SyncBit; also FrameID is determined by message buffer's adjacent slot-channel tuple) Return None values

-   -   Requirement 51: The host shall have read access to all message         buffers with valid message data. The Message data may not be         valid while the message buffer is accessed by the protocol         engine.     -   Requirement 52: An indicator shall be provided for each receive         message buffer if it contains data of a semantically valid         frame.     -   Requirement 53: After activation of the hard reset or after         power on this indicator shall be initialized by message data         handling to indicate that the receive message buffer does not         contain data of a semantically valid frame.     -   Requirement 54: A mechanism shall be provided that ensures         access to consistent message data by the host. This means that         while the host is accessing a message buffer's data that data         shall not be changed by other CHI elements.     -   Requirement 55: Transmit buffers shall contain the following         data: ReservedBits, NMIndicationBit, FrameID, PayloadLength,         HeaderCRC, CycleCount, FData[0. . . pMaxPayloadLength-1]     -   Requirement 56: In case of a request through the GetFrame         interface by the protocol engine cPaddingValue shall be set in         FData[pMaxPayloadLength . . . PayloadLength-1] in case         pMaxPayloadLength is smaller than PayloadLength and         <frame_data_found> is TRUE. The padding feature shall be         supported only by controller implementations that have message         buffers which cannot store 254 bytes of payload data. It shall         be possible to inhibit padding by a dedicated configuration         parameter.     -   Requirement 57: A mechanism shall be provided for the host to         commit transmit buffers for scheduling for transmission.     -   Requirement 58: The host shall have write access to transmit         buffers only when they are not scheduled for transmission.     -   Requirement 59: The host shall not have write access to receive         buffers.     -   Requirement 60: Each receive buffer shall provide the following         message data:

ReservedBits, NMIndicationBit, NullFrameIndicationBit, SyncBit, FrameID, PayloadLength, HeaderCRC, CycleCount, FData[0. . . pMaxPayloadLength-1], reception channel. (Note: If the reception channel is determined by configuration data the reception channel is not required to be stored in the receive buffer.)

-   -   Requirement 61: Receive buffers shall be updated by the protocol         engine only with data of semantically valid frames.     -   Requirement 62: The message data of valid frames that are stored         in a receive buffer shall be accessible through GetMessage in         the same sequence as the frames are detected as valid.     -   Requirement 63: For valid static frames received in slot x the         earliest possible access to the message data through GetMessage         shall be within 1 μs after the end of slot x if they are         subscribed.     -   Requirement 64: For valid dynamic frames which end in minislot x         the earliest possible access to the message data through         GetMessage shall be within 1 μs after the end of minislot x if         they are subscribed.         Protocol Engine Interface         Communication with Protocol Engine

TABLE 39 Protocol Engine Interface Interface type Interface function Purpose control RequestStateChange Request a protocol state change interface at the protocol engine data PutFrame Service for the protocol engine interface to process received frames GetFrame Service for the protocol engine that provides frame data for a specific slot and channel. PutProtocolState Service for the protocol engine to process protocol state data PutErrorStatusVector Service for the protocol engine to process the error status vector GetConfigurationData Service for the protocol engine to read configuration data The protocol engine interface is split into a control and a data interface. The control interface is used to request a protocol state change at the protocol engine (see below). The data interface provides services which can be requested by the protocol engine. These services are described further on. RequestStateChange

TABLE 40 RequestStateChange RequestStateChange ( <requested_protocol_state> ) Purpose Request a protocol state change at the protocol engine Arguments requested protocol state <requested_protocol_state> [ PowerUp, Configuration, Wakeup, NormalOperation, Passive, Freeze ] Return values None

Operation: The state change request is propagated to the protocol engine. It is in the responsibility of the protocol engine to react accordingly, e.g. some state change requests have to be followed immediately while others allow to complete an ongoing transmit or receive process. The protocol engine confirms the request by using the PutProtocolState interface to report its transition to the requested state.

PutFrame

TABLE 41 PutFrame PutFrame ( <frame_data>, <RX_channel>, <frame_status> ) Purpose Service for the protocol engine to process received frames Arguments Data content of the received frame <frame_data> ReservedBits, NMIndicationBit, NullFrameIndicationBit, SyncBit, FrameID, PayloadLength, HeaderCRC, CycleCount, FData[0..254] Reception channel <RX_channel> [A | B] Result of the frame checks performed by the protocol engine - any combination of error values is possible <frame_status> [ CorrectFrame | { CRCMismatch, IllegalLength, CycleCountMismatch, FrameIDMismatch, IllegalNMIndicationBit, IllegalSyncBit} ] Return values none

Operation: The data provided by the protocol engine is forwarded to all CHI services and to message data handling. These CHI elements interact with each other to determine

-   -   if the provided data should be stored in the message data         memory—if so determine the storage location     -   if reception of this very message should be indicated to host         processor (e.g. via interrupt)     -   if pMaxPayloadLength is smaller than PayloadLength discard         FData[pMaxPayloadLength..PayloadLength-1], however do not change         PayloadLength (Consequently a message buffer may contain less         FrameData than indicated by PayloadLength.)     -   if and which status data to be updated     -   if there is an impact on control data (e.g. reset an indicator         set by the host if it has read a specific message)     -   if in case of an error indication maybe an interrupt should be         triggered     -   others depending on further CHI services         GetFrame

TABLE 42 GetFrame GetFrame ( <FrameID>, <TX_channel> ) Purpose Service for the protocol engine that provides frame data for a specific slot and channel. Arguments FrameID of the frame to be transmitted; 0 for construction of a special collision avoidance frame during startup <FrameID> [0..cMaxFrameID] Channel to transmit the frame <TX_channel> [A | B] Current cycle counter <cycle_counter> [0..63] Return values TRUE if valid frame data was found, FALSE otherwise <frame_data_found> [ TRUE | FALSE ] TRUE if the configuration data contains at least one message configuration with a matching <FrameID> for transmission on <TX_channel> <slot_is_booked> [ TRUE | FALSE ] Frame data to be transmitted <frame_data> (ReservedBits, SyncBit, NMIndicationBit, PayloadLength, HeaderCRC, FData[0..254]) (Not all data contained in a frame is covered by this data set: FrameID, CycleCount and FrameCRC are known or generated by the protocol engine.)

Operation: The protocol engine requests frame data through this interface for every slot and channel.

If no slot-channel tuple for transmission is contained in the configuration data the value of <slot_is_booked> shall be FALSE and the protocol engine will try to receive a frame.

If a slot-channel tuple for transmission is contained in the configuration data, though, <slot_is_booked> shall be TRUE, and a frame or null frame will be transmitted if <frame_data_found> is TRUE respectively FALSE.

In case both <slot_is_booked> and <frame_data_found> are TRUE message data handling assures that cPaddingValue is set in FData[pMaxPayloadLenth . . . PayloadLength-1] in case pMaxPayloadLength is smaller than PayloadLength.

PutProtocolState

TABLE 43 PutProtocolState PutProtocolState ( <current_protocol_state> ) Purpose Service for the protocol engine to process protocol state data Arguments Current protocol state <current_protocol_state> [PowerUp, Configuration, Wakeup, NormalOperation, Passive, Freeze ] Return values none

Operation: This interface is used by the protocol engine whenever the protocol state changes. This information is provided to all CHI services, status data handling, which interact accordingly to

-   -   Determine if a the state change needs to be reflected in status         data     -   Determine if control data needs to be updated (e.g. reset/set         specific state change or transmission requests     -   Check if interrupt requests should be triggered         PutErrorStatusVector

TABLE 44 PutErrorStatusVector PutErrorStatusVector ( <error_status_yector> ) Purpose Service for the protocol engine to process the error status vector Arguments Current protocol error status vector <error_status_vector> Error status according to Chapter <Error Signaling and Error Handling > Return values none GetConfigurationData

TABLE 45 GetConfigurationData GetConfigurationData ( <requested_protocol_parameter> ) Purpose Service for the protocol engine to read configuration data Arguments identifies which protocol parameter's value shall be provided <requested_protocol_parameter> [ pSyncSlot, . . . ] (This list is implementation specific) Return values value of the requested protocol parameter <protocol_parameter_value> number (The format of the returned value is implementation specific)

Operation: Whenever the protocol engine requires a specific protocol parameter it uses this interface to request the value. The configuration data handling element may extract it directly from the configuration data or calculate the value from the configuration data.

Status Data Handling Interaction

The protocol engine must provide all indicators required for CHI which cannot be generated by one of the CHI elements.

Message Data Handling Interaction

-   -   Requirement 65: A mechanism shall be provided that ensures         access to consistent message data by the protocol engine. This         means that while the protocol engine is accessing a message         buffer's data it may not be changed by other CHI elements         Controller Host Interface Services         Overview

The controller host interface services (CHI services) provide different services to the host processor. Conceptually the CHI services can be seen as an additional service layer that builds on the protocol services provided by the protocol engine.

CHI services of higher complexity like the Message filtering service fall apart in different CHI service features. Specific CHI service features may require other CHI service features as prerequisite.

Each CHI service is classified as either required or optional. All services, i.e. those classified as required as well as those classified as optional, however, must adhere to the requirements defined in this chapter. In addition a CHI service may contain a set of different subservices. Each CHI service feature in turn is also classified as either required or optional. A CHI service is required if it provides at least one required CHI service feature.

A CHI service may also build on other CHI services. In this case a CHI service is required if it provides a dependency for at least one other CHI service.

The CHI services interact with the host processor through the four data handling units. This way the service status is indicated to the host processor and the host processor can control and configure the service. In addition a CHI service can act on message data provided by either the host processor or the protocol engine to the message data handling unit.

Currently eight CHI services are defined. Table 46 lists the eight CHI services along with any potential CHI service features and the respective classifications.

The protocol engine interface propagates all data provided by the protocol engine via PutFrame, PutProtocolStatus, PutErrorStatusVector to all CHI services. Upon this data the CHI services perform all operations and checks necessary to fulfill their functions.

TABLE 46 Required and Optional CHI Services and Features Service name Service feature Classification Comment Message filtering Frame ID filtering Required service Channel filtering Required Cycle counter Required filtering Message ID filtering Optional Message FIFO Receive FIFO Optional service Network NM vector extraction Optional management NM function filtering Optional Requires NM vector extraction service (Currently not required nor described) Timer service — Required Essential for time triggered distributed applications Error signaling — Required service Symbol handling Media access test Required Essential to perform service symbol handling the media access test Status symbol Optional handling Host interrupt Timer interrupt Required Essential for accurate service synchronization of time triggered applications with the global time Error signaling Optional interrupt NM function interrupt Optional Requires network management service Optical diagnosis — Optional service Message Filtering Service

The message filtering service provides a means for retrieving message data from message buffers for transmission, respectively for storing received message data to message buffers, depending on specific filter conditions. In order to provide this service the protocol engine accesses each message buffer via a message filter. Each message filter can assess one or more filter conditions. The message filter checks whether the message data meets the defined filter conditions or not. Message filters may be used with receive buffers as well as with transmit buffers.

Currently filtering conditions are defined for the frame ID, the channel ID, the cycle counter and the message ID.

The following transmit buffer related requirements must be met independently from the filtering condition:

-   -   Requirement 66: In the case of a transmit buffer the buffer         contents shall only be made available to the protocol engine for         transmission if the transmit buffer contains message data that         meets all respective filter conditions.     -   Requirement 67: If multiple filters match then a transmit buffer         shall be selected in a deterministic way.

The following receive buffer related requirements must be met independently from the filtering condition:

-   -   Requirement 68: In the case of a receive buffer the message data         contained in a valid frame shall only be stored in the receive         buffer if the message data contained in the frame meets all         respective filter conditions.     -   Requirement 69: If multiple filters match then a receive buffer         shall be selected in a deterministic way independently of the         protocol state and message data.         Frame ID Filtering

Within Frame ID filtering the filter condition is applied to the frame ID. Frame ID filtering applies to transmit and receive buffers.

-   -   Requirement 70: For transmit buffers the filter shall consider         the respective slot counter for which data is requested by the         protocol engine, for receive buffers the filter shall consider         the frame ID contained in the valid frame. The slot counter is         always associated with a channel ID. A slot is assigned to the         node for a specific channel if both the frame ID filter and the         channel ID filter match for a buffer.     -   Requirement 71: Each filter shall be configured by means of a         frame ID filter value and an optional frame ID filter mask.     -   Requirement 72: Each frame ID filter configuration shall be         determined by static configuration data.     -   Requirement 73: The frame ID filter shall match if the         considered frame ID is equal to the frame ID filter value. If         the filter holds a frame ID filter mask then the frame ID filter         mask shall be applied to the considered frame ID prior to the         comparison with the frame ID filter value.         Channel Filtering

Within channel filtering the filter condition is applied to the channel. Channel filtering applies to transmit and receive buffers.

-   -   Requirement 74: For transmit buffers the filter shall consider         the channel for which data is requested by the protocol engine,         for receive buffers the filter shall consider the channel on         which the valid frame was received. The channel ID is always         associated with a slot counter. A slot is assigned to the node         for a specific channel if both the frame ID filter and the         channel ID filter match for a buffer.     -   Requirement 75: Each filter shall be configurable by means of a         channel filter set that equals one of the following sets: {A},         {B}, {A,B}, { }.     -   Requirement 76: Each channel filter configuration shall be         determined by static or by variable configuration data.     -   Requirement 77: The channel filter shall match if the considered         channel is contained in the channel filter set.         Message ID Filtering

Within message ID filtering the filter condition is applied to the message ID. Message ID filtering applies only to receive buffers.

-   -   Requirement 78: The filter shall consider the message ID         contained in the valid frame only if the payload length of the         frame contains at least one word. If the payload length contains         0 words then the filter shall not match.     -   Requirement 79: Each filter shall be configurable by means of a         message ID filter value and a message ID filter mask.     -   Requirement 80: The message ID filter shall match if the result         after applying the considered message ID to the message ID         filter mask is equal to the message ID filter value.     -   Requirement 81: The message ID filter configuration shall be         determined by constant or by variable configuration data.         Cycle Counter Filtering

Within cycle count filtering the filter condition is applied to the cycle count. Cycle count filtering applies to transmit and receive buffers.

-   -   Requirement 82: For transmit buffers the filter shall consider         the cycle counter for which data is requested by the protocol         engine, for receive buffers the filter shall consider the cycle         count contained in the valid frame.     -   Requirement 83: Each filter shall be configurable by means of a         cycle set. A cycle set C_(b,c) contains all cycle numbers         C _(b,c) ={x|x=(b+n*2^(c))modulo(cCycleMax+1);ninN         ₀;0<=b<2^(c)<=cCycleMax+1}         -   with         -   b: Base cycle         -   c: Cycle repetition         -   b, c in N₀     -   Requirement 84: The cycle counter filter configuration shall be         determined by constant or variable configuration data.     -   Requirement 85: A cycle counter filter shall match if the         considered cycle count is contained in the cycle set C_(b,c).         Allowable Filtering Combinations     -   Requirement 86: Transmit buffers shall allow either a         combination of frame ID filtering and channel ID filtering or a         combination of frame ID filtering, channel ID filtering and         cycle counter filtering.     -   Requirement 87: Receive buffers shall allow either a combination         of frame ID filtering and channel ID filtering, or a combination         of frame ID filtering, channel ID filtering and cycle counter         filtering, or a combination of message ID filtering and channel         ID filtering, or a combination of message ID filtering, channel         ID filtering, and cycle counter filtering. Frame ID filtering         and Message ID filtering are mutually exclusive for receive         buffers, i.e. it is not possible to activate frame ID filtering         and message ID filtering at the same time.     -   Requirement 88: If the configuration of a filter is changed         during runtime while the protocol is in the NormalOperation         state then the filter shall not match until the configuration is         completed.         Message FIFO Service         Description

Message FIFO's are used to store and receive frame contents according to the “first-in first-out” principle. Currently only receive FIFO's are defined.

The receive FIFO stores the content from valid frames received by the protocol engine. The host processor consumes the messages from the FIFO by reading from the FIFO.

Interaction with Protocol Engine Interface

Receive FIFO: Stores the provided message data upon a PutFrame request if no dedicated message buffer can be found and the frame is accepted by optional filters.

Interaction with Configuration Data Handling

Message filters may be configured in static or variable configuration data for select specific message for storage in receive FIFOs. These message filters may accept or reject specific frame Ids or message Ids.

Interaction with Status Data Handling

-   -   Requirement 89: A Boolean free indicator shall be provided to         determine if there are messages stored in the FIFO.     -   Requirement 90: A Boolean locked indicator shall be provided to         determine if the FIFO has lost message data due to overflow.         Interaction with Message Data Handling

Message FIFOs are used to store/retrieve message data only when no dedicated message buffer is configured for a specific message and the frame is accepted by optional filters.

-   -   Requirement 91: The sequence of messages from a specific channel         stored in a receive FIFO shall be identical to the sequence of         these message on the FlexRay bus.

Note that if more than one channel is fed into one receive FIFO, then the message sequence in the FIFO will be consistent with the message sequence for each channel individually, however no specific storage sequence is defined between messages of different channels.

Network Management Service

Description

The Network management service provides means for the host to handle the network management vector that can be transmitted in a FlexRay frame.

Constraints

The network management service is functional only during NormalOperation.

Interaction with Protocol Engine Interface

This CHI service scans each frame provided by the protocol engine through PutFrame. If NMIndicationBit is set it becomes active.

Interaction with Configuration Data Handling

-   -   Requirement 92: The value of NMIndBit in frames to be         transmitted shall be determined by static configuration data.         Interaction with Control Data Handling     -   Requirement 93: If a specific controller implementation supports         interrupt triggering on specific NM events it shall be possible         for the host to disable these interrupts.         Interaction with Status Data Handling     -   Requirement 94: A network management (NM) vector vGloNMVec of         gNetworkManagementVectorLength bytes length shall be provided         during NormalOperation.

It is not required that vGloNMVecis valid in operation modes other than the NormalOperation.

It is up to the application to use only a subset of the gNetworkManagementVectorLength bytes for NM. In this case it is the responsibility of the application to mask the unused bits.

-   -   Requirement 95: An updated vGloNMVecshall be provided at the         beginning of each communication cycle.     -   Requirement 96: The value of a vGloNMVec provided at the         beginning of a communication cycle shall be equal to a logical         OR operation of all fLocNMVec contained in correctly received         frames with the NM indication bit set during the previous         communication cycle. Note that the extraction of fLocNMVec         depends on the use of message identifiers. This may be different         for different frames. If message ID filtering is disabled in the         message buffer to store a received frame the fData[0 . . . 8]         are used as fLocNMVec. If message ID filtering is enabled         fData[2 . . . 10] are used as fLocNMVec. Note that the logical         OR combination applies also for different fLocNMVec values         received on the two channels in the same slot. At the beginning         of the first communication cycle in NormalOperation a NM vector         initialized to 0 shall be provided.     -   Requirement 97: A mechanism shall be provided that either         provides vGloNMVec in a consistent way, or indicates either         explicitly or implicitly if an inconsistent vGloNMVec was read         by the host.

An implicit indication could be the cycle counter value of the communication cycle the NM vector was generated from. The host could read and store this value, read the NM vector and verify if the cycle counter value matches the stored value. If this check fails, the NM vector read is possibly not consistent. If the check succeeds the NM vector is consistent. This is only true if the host takes less than 64 cycles to read the NM vector, because the cycle counter values repeat after 63 cycles.

-   -   Requirement 98: If NMIndicationBit is set but the PayloadLength         of the frame is not large enough to hold the complete NM vector         an error shall be indicated and vGloNMVec shall not be changed.     -   Requirement 99: If NMIndicationBit is set and the         NullframeIndicationBit is set an error shall be indicated and         vGloNMVec shall not be changed         Interaction with Message Data Handling     -   Requirement 100: The message interface shall provide means for         the host processor to determine the values of the NM vector         (fLocNMVec) in frames to be transmitted.

For all received frames provided to the host the message interface shall also provide the values of fNMIndBit and fLocNMVec. fNMIndBit and fLocNMVec represent the values for NM indication bit and NM vector contained in the (received) frame.

Timer Service

Description

This service allows the synchronization of the application with the global time in the FlexRay cluster. Timers may be absolute (specific cycle and macrotick) or relative (to the time when they are started), and they may repetitive or single shot timers.

Interaction with Protocol Engine Interface

Timer events are triggered depending on the latest values of vMacrotick and vCycle.

Interaction with Configuration Data Handling

-   -   Requirement 101: Timer events shall be contained in static or         variable configuration data.     -   Requirement 102: A timer event shall be defined unambiguously so         that the time (cycle number and macrotick) of activation can be         determined.         Interaction with Control Data Handling

Timers as well as the timer interrupt can be enabled or disabled during NormalOperation.

Interaction with Status Data Handling

-   -   Requirement 103: A dedicated interrupt shall be provided to the         host processor that is triggered when a timer has elapsed.         Error Signaling Service         Interaction with Control Data Handling     -   Requirement 104: Error signaling data shall be reset upon exit         of the CC configuration state.         Interaction with Status Data Handling     -   Requirement 105: An locked status indicator shall be provided         that is set when vOffsetCorrection has reached the red region         (vOffsetCorrection>gOffsetCorrectionOut).     -   Requirement 106: A locked status indicator shall be provided         that is set if vBgsmError is TRUE. This status indicator shall         be reset when vBgsmErrorAck is TRUE.     -   Requirement 107: A locked status indicator shall be provided         that is set when a media access test symbol (MTS) was received         during the symbol window         Symbol Handling Service         Description

This service allows to control which symbols are transmitted during the symbol window. Moreover it provides information to the host processor about the symbol received during the symbol window. This service has the following features:

-   -   Media access test symbol handling—is a required feature to         perform the media access test.     -   Status symbol handling—is an optional feature to handle status         normal symbol and status alarm symbol.         Interaction with Protocol Engine Interface

The value of vTXSymbol shall provided on request through the GetConfigurationData interface if the argument is “vTXSymbol”. (TBD—formalize and standardize description)

Interaction with Configuration Data Handling

The length of the symbol window is a cluster constant and therefore determined by static configuration.

Interaction with Control Data Handling

-   -   Requirement 108: Means shall be provided to control the value of         vTXSymbol.         Interaction with Status Data Handling     -   Requirement 109: The value of vRXSymbol shall be provided as         free indicator to the host processor interface.         Host Interrupt Service         Description

This service checks conditions to generate interrupt requests as well as conditions to reset these requests.

Interaction with Protocol Engine Interface

Depending on the interrupts a FlexRay controller implementation supports this CHI service may check conditions for interrupt generation or reset upon data provide through PutFrame, upon the protocol state provided through PutProtocolState and on the error status vector provided by PutErrorStatusVector.

Interaction with Configuration Data Handling

None required.

Interaction with Control Data Handling

-   -   Requirement 110: Means shall be provided to control data         handling to selectively enable and disable every interrupt         generated by this service.         Interaction with Status Data Handling     -   Requirement 111: This CHI service generates a timer interrupt         request upon request of the Timer service.

Depending on the additional interrupts a FlexRay controller implementation supports further interrupt requests are generated.

Interaction with Message Data Handling

Depending on the additional interrupts a FlexRay controller implementation supports upon reception or transmission of specific frames.

Optical Diagnosis Service

Description

This service provides information provided by the optical transceiver indicating if the optical power is below a given threshold.

Interaction with Protocol Engine Interface

-   -   Requirement 112: An interface function PutOpticalDiagnosisFlags         shall be provided.

TABLE 47 PutOpticalDiagnosisFlags PutOpticalDiagnosisFlags ( <flag_A>, <flag_B> ) Purpose Indicate that too low of an optical power is received by the optical transceivers Arguments values of the optical diagnosis flags; TRUE if the optical power is sufficient <flag_A> [TRUE, FALSE ] <flag_B> [TRUE, FALSE ] Return values None Interaction with Status Data Handling

-   -   Requirement 113: One optical diagnosis indicator is provided for         each channel.         Interaction with Message Data Handling

Depending on the additional interrupts a FlexRay controller implementation supports upon reception or transmission of specific frames.

Bus Driver Interface

Introduction

This chapter describes the interface to the electrical FlexRay Bus Driver (BDe). This interface comprises three components, the interface to the FlexRay Communication Controller (CC), the interface to the FlexRay Bus Guardian (BG) and the interface to the host. A description of the BDe operation can be found in FlexRay Electrical Physical Layer Preliminary Functional Specification, v1.0, Philips Corporation, 2002 and in Chapter ‘Requirements for Hardware States’.

Bus Driver—Communication Controller Interface

Overview

The Bus Driver—Communication Controller Interface is shown in FIG. 77. The interface between the BDe and the CC comprises three digital electrical signals, two that are inputs to the BDe from the CC (named TxD and TxEN), and one that is an output from the BDe to the CC (named RxD).

The following description is valid, when the BDe is in BDe_Normal mode.

-   -   TxEN is an input to the BDe from the CC. It is used by the CC to         enable the BDe to drive the Data_0 or Data_1 state onto the         channel.         -   While the CC maintains a logical HIGH state on TxEN, the BDe             signals Idle onto the channel.         -   While the CC maintains a logical LOW state on TxEN, the BDe             drives Data_0 or Data_1 onto the channel (depending on TxD             input, see below), but only if the BG concurrently permits             the BDe to do so (see below). If the BG does not permit             this, the BDe continues to signal Idle onto the channel.     -   TxD is an input to the BDe from the CC used by the CC to         transfer the actual signal sequence to the BDe for transmission         onto the channel. This signal sequence is the signal stream to         be transmitted. With a logical LOW state on TxD the BDe drives         Data_0 and with a logical HIGH state on TxD the BDe drives         Data_1 onto the channel, when the BDe has the permission from         the BG and is enabled by the CC via TxEN.     -   RxD is an output from the BDe to the CC used by the BDe to         transfer the actual received signal sequence to the CC. It is         the received data stream. RxD is driven to a logical LOW state         when the channel signals Data_0. When the channel signals Idle         or Data_1, RxD is driven to a logical HIGH state.

When the BDe is not in BDe_Normal mode, it signals Idle onto the channel.

Bus Driver—Bus Guardian Interface

Overview

The Bus Driver—Bus Guardian Interface is shown in FIG. 78. The interface between the BDe and the BG comprises two digital electrical signals, one input to the BDe (named BGE) and one output from the BDe (named RxEN).

-   -   BGE is an input to the BDe from the BG. It is used by the BG to         permit the BDe to drive the states Data_0 and Data_1 onto the         channel.         -   While the BG maintains a logical LOW state on BGE, the BDe             signals Idle onto the channel.         -   While the BG maintains a logical HIGH state on BGE, the BDe             is permitted to drive Data_0 or Data_1 onto the channel             depending on TxD and TxEN input (see above).

The following description is valid, when the BDe is in BDe_Normal mode.

-   -   RxEN is an output from the BDe to the BG used by the BDe to         indicate whether the channel is in the Idle state or not.     -   While the channel is in the Idle state RxEN is driven to a         logical HIGH state.     -   While the channel signals Data_0 or Data_1 RXEN is driven to a         logical LOW state.

When the BDe is not in BDe_Normal mode, then RxD and RXEN shall be in a logical HIGH state.

Bus Driver—Host Interface

The bus driver host interface is a product specific interface. It enables the host to control the operating modes of the BDe and to read error conditions from the BDe. This interface also has to signal the waking source (local wake-up event or remote wake-up via wake-up symbol on the bus).

The interface may be realized with a serial communication interface (e.g. “SPI”) or using hard wired signals (e.g. dedicated pins for operating mode control and error signaling).

A description of the BDe operating modes is provided in Chapter ‘Requirements for Hardware States’.

Interface Signal Timing

BDe Output Signals: RxD and RxEN

The expected timing of RxD and RxEN is depicted in FIG. 79 (frame transmitted in the static part of the communication cycle).

The Transmission Start Sequence (TSS) that a node receives may be shorter than the TSS that was originally sent. The reason for this is that active stars may truncate a portion of the TSS. RxEN will stay on logical LOW state after the last transmitted bit for the duration of the MediaIdleDetectionTime. (See Chapter ‘Coding and Decoding’ for more information about the TSS and the document FlexRay Electrical Physical Layer Preliminary Functional Specification, v1.0, Philips Corporation, 2002 for the effect of truncation)

A node that transmits a frame can read back its own transmission on RxD if loop back is provided by the BDe. In case that the last bit was transmitted as Data_1 (frames in static and dynamic part, symbols: EIS, SNS, or SAS), only the transmitting node may see a different behavior (depicted in red) of RxD after the end of its own frame or symbol than all other receivers in the network. This happens when common mode chokes are used with a significant stray inductance.

Since the symbols WU, CAS, MTS end on Data_0 the situation is slightly different in these cases. The RxD and RxEN behavior is shown in FIG. 80.

The Transmission Start Sequence (TSS) that a node receives may be shorter than the TSS that was originally sent (see above). This effect might not be compensated by the effect of enlarging the symbol by the MediaIdleDetectionTime. The transmitting node may see, when reading back its own transmission, the behavior that is depicted by the dotted red line, when common mode chokes with a significant stray inductance are used.

BDe Input Signals: TxD and TxEN

The required timing of TxD and TxEN is depicted in FIG. 81.

With the start of the first bit to be transmitted the TxEN is switched to logical LOW state and returned to logical HIGH state at the end of the last bit that was to be transmitted. Edges in TxEN are expected to be synchronous with the first and last edge within the TxD signal.

Bus Guardian Interface

Introduction

This chapter covers conformance requirements that apply to the interface between the communication controller (CC) and de-centralized bus guardian (BG) functional blocks. The decentralized bus guardian protects the communication channel(s) from improper transmissions by a faulty or misconfigured communication controller that attempts to transmit outside of its pre-configured schedule. The bus guardian has independent knowledge of the node's communication schedule and restricts transmission to only those times allowed by the schedule.

This chapter specifies the interface between the bus guardian and the communication controller and gives an overview of the bus guardian scheduling scheme. It also establishes the requirements on the BG and CC behavior with respect to the interface signals between the BG and CC. For a detailed functional specification of the bus guardian please refer to FlexRay Bus Guardian Preliminary Functional Specification, v1.2, Philips Corporation, 2002.

The second part of this chapter contains a specification of the BG schedule monitoring service provided by the communication controller. The purpose of this service is to supervise the bus guardian schedule and inform the host when a mismatch is detected between the communication schedule of the BG and CC.

BG-CC Interface Signals

Table 48 shows a list of bus guardian inputs and outputs at the interface between the bus guardian and the communication controller. The block diagram shown in FIG. 82 describes how bus guardians are connected to a communication controller in a dual-channel FlexRay node. Note that the signals TxEN and BGE are associated with the particular channel. There must be dedicated TxEN and BGE signals for each channel (Refer to FlexRay Requirements Specification, Req. 219 G: The bus guardian must not disable access to more than one channel, i.e., one bus guardian per channel is required.). In addition to the BG-CC interface signals the block diagram also shows the RxEN signal from the bus driver, which is required for local evaluation of the media access test.

BG-CC Interface Signals Overview

TABLE 48 BG - CC Interface Signals (Data direction DIR relative to the bus guardian. ‘I’ represents an input to the BG, ‘O’ represents an output from the BG.) Symbol DIR ACTIVE Description MT I rising edge Macrotick - clock signal from CC BGT I rising edge Bus guardian tick - clock signal from CC ARM I falling edge ARM trigger signal from CC TxEN I LOW Transmit enable signal from CC TxEN = HIGH: transmission inactive TxEN = LOW: transmission active BGE O HIGH Transmission enable signal for Bus Driver BGE = HIGH: transmission enabled BGE = LOW: transmission disabled BG-CC Interface Signals Description MT

The MT signal, generated by the CC, is used as a clock signal for the BG scheduler. The rising edge of the MT signal must be aligned to the start of the CC's internal locally corrected macrotick. The CC shall ensure that any internal macrotick corrections are reflected in the MT signal during the same macrotick (i.e., the MT signal is an accurate representation of the CC's internal locally corrected macrotick clock).

BGT

The BGT signal, generated by the CC, is used for supervision of the MT period. The BGT period is not affected by clock corrections and depends only on the frequency of the CC's crystal oscillator and a frequency divider at the CC.

ARM

The ARM signal is generated by the CC and indicates the start of the communication cycle to the BG. The ARM signal from the CC is generated such that it is synchronous to the MT signal (ARM edges aligned to rising edge of the MT signal). The falling edge of the ARM signal defines the ARM trigger event for BG cycle synchronization. After node startup the BG schedule needs to be synchronized to the CC schedule. This is achieved by means of the first ARM trigger event that is detected by the BG after node startup. Subsequent ARM trigger events are not required for cycle synchronization, but for supervision of the configured cycle length. The BG checks for the regular occurrence of ARM trigger events at the start of each cycle by counting the number of MT periods between ARM trigger events and comparing the result to the expected BG cycle time as calculated below.

BGE

The BGE signal is generated by the bus guardian and controls transmit access to the communication medium. Any transmit access to the medium shall be disabled as long as the BGE signal is in an inactive condition (BGE=LOW). the BGE signal is also provided to the CC as an input signal that is used for supervision of the BG schedule. Please refer to the BG schedule monitoring service described below.

TxEN

The TxEN signal is generated by the CC and indicates that the CC is currently attempting to transmit on the particular channel. This signal shall be evaluated by the BG for supervision of the CC schedule. The BG shall detect a schedule mismatch if the TxEN signal is active while the BGE signal is inactive (Refer to the BG Functional Specification for details of the schedule monitoring features provided by the BG.).

Bus Guardian Scheduling Scheme

FIG. 83 shows an overview of the relation between CC schedule and BG schedule at the communication segment level. For each segment of the CC schedule a corresponding segment of the BG schedule shall be configured. The BG static segment and the BG watchdog disable time are mandatory parts of the BG schedule. The BG static segment must contain at least one static slot. The minimum length of the BG watchdog disable time is 1 MT period.

Parts of the BG schedule that may be used for transmission are separated by inter-slot gaps (ISG). This applies to static slots, the BG dynamic segment, and the BG symbol window. The BG shall enable transmission one macrotick prior to the expected beginning of a transmission and disable it one macrotick after the expected end. Note that a minimum ISG length of 2 macroticks is required in order to fulfill this requirement.

The ISG contains two optional elements gdBGpreEnablePart and gdBGpostEnablePart. Alignment of the BG schedule to the CC action points is achieved by configuration of gdBGpreEnablePart. while configuration of gdBGpostEnablePart allows to increase the safety margin between transmissions.

FIG. 84 illustrates the BG-CC timing during the static segment. Transmit access is enabled gdBGpreEnablePart macroticks after the beginning of a static slot and stays enabled for gdBGStaticSlot+2 macroticks. The static slot is completed by a period of gdBGpostEnablePart macroticks, during which transmission is disabled by the BG.

The BG communication cycle start is defined to be at the beginning of static slot 1. The BG shall assume the ARM trigger events happen at the BG cycle start.

At the beginning of the dynamic segment two possible cases must be distinguished (Refer to section ‘Dynamic Segment’). FIG. 85 shows the BG-CC timing of a configuration with gdActionPointOffset>gdMSActionPointOffset. In this case transmit access is enabled one macrotick prior to the action point at the CC. FIG. 86 shows the BG-CC timing of a configuration with gdActionPointOffset≦gdMSActionPointOffset. In this case transmit access is enabled gdMSActionPointOffset−gdActionPointOffset+1 macroticks prior to the action point at the CC.

In general, transmit access is enabled gdBGpreEnablePart macroticks after the beginning of the dynamic segment, independent from the configuration of gdMSActionPointOffset and stays enabled for gdBGDynSegment+2 macroticks.

FIG. 87 shows the BG-CC timing at the end of the dynamic segment as well as during the BG symbol window and the BG watchdog disable time (WDT). During the BG watchdog disable time supervision of the MT period is disabled. This allows clock offset correction to shorten or lengthen macroticks by an amount that would exceed the configured limits of the macrotick supervision.

The BG may be configured to enable or disable transmission during the BG dynamic segment and the BG symbol window, respectively. Transmit access is enabled gdBGpreEnablePart macroticks after the beginning of the symbol window and stays enabled for gdBGSymbolWindow+2 macroticks. The BG disables transmission during the BG watchdog disable time gdBGWatchdogDisable.

The BG shall support the application of the media access test during the symbol window, i.e. in addition to disabling transmit access a transmit attempt by the CC shall not be detected as schedule violation error. The purpose of the media access test is to check whether the BG successfully disables transmission. The BG supports application of the media access test if transmission during the symbol window is disabled (pBGSymWinEnable=0) and media access test is enabled (pBGMatEnable=1). Table 49 describes the configurable behavior of the BG during the BG symbol window.

TABLE 49 BG Behavior During the BG Symbol Window Media access test BG behavior during BG symbol window enabled If TxEN is active during the BG symbol window the BG does not enter (pBGMatEnable = 1) BG_FailSilent mode and does not report a schedule violation error to the host controller. Local evaluation of the media access test is performed. The BG reports a local media access test error to the host controller if TXEN and RXEN signals are simultaneously active during the BG watchdog disable time. disabled If TxEN is active during the BG symbol window the BG enters (pBGMatEnable = 0) BG_FailSilent mode and reports a schedule violation error to the host controller.

The relation between BG configuration parameters and global protocol parameters is defined by: gdBGStaticSlot+ISG=gdStaticSlot gdBGDynSegment+ISG=gNumberOfMinislots*gdMinislot +(gdActionPointOffset−gdMSActionPointOffset)

The above equation only holds when gNumberOfMinislots !=0; The term (gdActionPointOffset−gdMSActionPointOffset) only applies if gdActionPointOffset>gdMSActionPointOffset. gdBGSymbolWindow+ISG=gdSymbolWindow

The above equation only holds when gdSymbolWindow !=0. gdBGWatchdogDisable=gdNIT gdBGpreEnablePart+1=gdActionPointOffset

The inter-slot gap (ISG) is defined by: ISG=gdBGpreEnablePart+gdBGpostEnablePart+2

Using BG configuration parameters the cycle time is calculated by:

$\begin{matrix} {{{BG}\mspace{14mu}{cycle}\mspace{14mu}{time}\mspace{14mu}({MT})} = {{{gNumberOfStaticSlots}*\left( {{gdBGStaticSlot} + {ISG}} \right)} +}} \\ {{gdBGDynSegment} + {ISG} +} \\ {{gdBGSymbolWindow} + {ISG} +} \\ {gdBGWatchdogDisable} \end{matrix}$

gdBGDynSegment is an optional dynamic segment. (The BG dynamic segment and the corresponding ISG are not part of the BG schedule if gdBGDynSegment=0 is configured.) gdBGSymbolWindow is an optional symbol window. (The BG symbol window and the corresponding ISG are not part of the BG schedule if gdSymbolWindow=0 is configured.)

A summary of configuration parameters related to the bus guardian schedule is shown in Table 50.

TABLE 50 Bus Guardian Schedule Configuration Parameters Name Range Unit Remarks gdBGStaticSlot 0 to 4095 MT Static slot length (This does not include the interslot gap.) gdBGDynSegment 0 to 65534 MT BG dynamic segment length (The BG supports static mode operation if gdBGDynSegment = 0 is configured.) gdBGSymbolWindow 0 to 255 MT BG symbol window length (Configurations without symbol window are supported if gdBGSymbolWindow = 0 is configured.) gdBGpreEnablePart 0 to TBD MT ISG part that precedes a guarded schedule element gdBGpostEnablePart 0 to TBD MT ISG part that follows a guarded schedule element gdBGWatchdogDisable 1 to 255 MT BG watchdog disable time (Part of the BG schedule reserved for the application of clock offset correction.) gdBGArmActive 1 MT Duration of the ARM signal low condition BG-CC Synchronization

The FlexRay bus guardian approach maintains synchronization of the local BG schedule to the global time by basing all BG scheduling operations on a corrected macrotick signal (MT) being provided by the CC. This allows the BG to perform its media access protection function (i.e. restricting transmit access to the configured schedule) while being continuously synchronized to the global clock using the clock synchronization algorithm of the CC.

A second clock signal, bus guardian tick (BGT), used for supervising the period of the MT signal, is provided by the CC. The communication controller shall generate the BGT signal such that its period is independent from the clock correction performed by the CC (For example, the BGT signal could be derived from the application of a programmable prescaler to the oscillator input of the Communication Controller.). The bus guardian shall use the BGT signal to perform a supervision of the duration of the corrected macrotick by checking if the MT/BGT ratio deviates from the nominal ratio by more than a pre-defined configurable limit. Acceptable deviations from the nominal limit may be caused by the clock rate correction algorithm as it increases or decreases the length of certain macroticks to maintain the overall clock rate.

BG-CC Interface Requirements

Table 51 shows the BG-CC interface timing requirements. Note the specified restrictions have been introduced as a result of certain semiconductor technology limitations.

TABLE 51 BG-CC Interface Timing Requirements (These timing requirements are implementation-specific.) Range/ Name Description Value Units gdBGMinMTNom Minimum nominal 1.0 μs MT period gdBGMinMTCorr Minimum corrected 0.5 μs MT period pdBGMTPeriod Configured nominal TBD μs MT period gdBGMinPwMT Minimum MT pulse 0.4 * — width (low or high) pdMTPeriod gdBGMinBGTPeriod Minimum BGT period 0.25 μs pdBGTPeriod Configured BGT TBD μs period gdMinPwBGT Minimum BGT pulse 0.4 * — width (low or high) pdBGTPeriod BG Schedule Monitoring Service Background

The BG schedule monitoring (BGSM) service is a service that is provided by the FlexRay communication controller. The purpose of this service is to assess that the execution of the bus guardian schedule matches the execution of the respective schedule of the CC.

Proposed Functional Specification

Structure

The bus guardian schedule monitor uses the following input signals to perform its function (see FIG. 88): The BGE signal, the rule to be monitored iBgsmRule and the acknowledgement signal vBgsmErrorAck as inputs. The BGSM function produces the output signal vBgsmError. The CC protocol state machine reads the parameters pdBgeStaticDuration, pdBgeDynamicDuration, pdBgeSymbolDuration, pBgsmDynSegDisabled, and pBgsmSymWinDisabled The following constraints apply to these parameters:

-   BGE∈{0, 1}, -   iBgsmRule∈{BGE_X, BGE_ENABLED, BGE_DISABLED}, -   vBgsmErrorAck∈{FALSE, TRUE}, -   vBgsmError∈{FALSE, TRUE}, -   pdBgeStaticDuration[MT]∈{1 . . . TBD}, -   pdBgeDynamicDuration[MT]∈{1 . . . TBD}, -   pdBgeSymbolDuration[MT]∈{1 . . . TBD}, -   pBgsmDynSegDisabled∈{FALSE, TRUE}, -   pBgsmSymWinDisabled∈{FALSE, TRUE}.

FIG. 89 depicts a state machine that describes the operation of the BGSM service.

Interaction of the BG Schedule Monitor with the Protocol Operation

Background

Protocol operation can be separated in two distinct phases: the initial unsynchronized startup phase and the subsequent synchronized operation phase. The two phases differ as follows:

-   -   during the initial unsynchronized startup phase the         communication controller has no knowledge of the system wide         synchronized time, i.e. the slot counter and the cycle counter         are not synchronized.     -   during the synchronized operation phase the communication         controller has knowledge of the system wide synchronized time,         i.e. the slot counter and the cycle counter are synchronized.         Unsynchronized Startup Phase     -   Within the unsynchronized startup phase the BGSM shall execute         the accept all rule, i.e. iBgsmRule is set to BGE_X.         Synchronized Operation Phase

Within the synchronized operation phase the communication schedule is used to access the communication media. A communication schedule consists of the following constituents: the static segment, the dynamic segment, the symbol window and the network idle time (NIT).

Static Segment

The configuration parameter pdBgeStaticDuration defines the duration of the BGE active phase during transmission slots in the static segment. The relationship between pdBgeStaticDuration and other configuration parameters related to the static segment is given by: pdBgeStaticDuration=gdBGStaticSlot+2=gdStaticSlot−gdBGpreEnablePart−gdBGpostEnablePart with: gdBGpreEnablePart=gdActionPointOffset−1 gdBGpostEnablePart=gdStaticSlot−pdBgeStaticDuration−gdActionPointOffset+1 Transmission Slot

-   -   Starting with the first macrotick of the transmission slot the         following rule shall be applied:

if (gdBGpreEnablePart == 0) OR  (gdBGpostEnablePart == 0 AND  previous static slot == enabled) iBgsmRule shall be set to BGE_X; else iBgsmRule shall be set to BGE_DISABLED; end;

-   -   Starting with the second macrotick of the transmission slot the         following rule shall be applied:

if (gdBGpreEnablePart > 1) iBgsmRule shall be set to BGE_DISABLED; end;

-   -   Starting with macrotick gdActionPointOffset of the transmission         slot the following rule shall be applied:

if (gdBGpreEnablePart > 0) iBgsmRule shall be set to BGE_X; end;

-   -   Starting with macrotick gdActionPointOffset+1 of the         transmission slot iBgsmRule shall be set to BGE_ENABLED.     -   Starting with macrotick pdBgeStaticDuration+gdActionPointOffset         the following rule shall be applied:

if (gdBGpostEnablePart > 0) iBgsmRule shall be set to BGE_X; end;

-   -   Starting with macrotick         pdBgeStaticDuration+gdActionPointOffset+1 the following rule         shall be applied:

if (gdBGpostEnablePart > 1) iBgsmRule shall be set to BGE_DISABLED; end; Reception Slot

-   -   Starting with the first macrotick of the reception slot the         following rule shall be applied:

if (previous static slot = = enabled) AND  (gdBGpostEnablePart = = 0) iBgsmRule shall be set to BGE_X; else iBgsmRule shall be set to BGE_DISABLED; end;

-   -   Starting with the second macrotick of the reception slot         iBgsmRule shall be set to BGE_DISABLED.

FIG. 90 shows the interaction in the static segment. FIG. 91 shows the interaction in the static segment for a minimum ISG length.

Dynamic Segment

The configuration parameter pdBgeDynamicDuration defines the duration of the BGE active phase during the dynamic segment. The relationship between pdBgeDynamicDuration and other configuration parameters related to the dynamic segment is given by: pdBgeDynamicDuration=gdBGDynSegment+2=gNumberOfMinislots*gdMinislot−gdBGpreEnablePart−gdBGpostEnablePart (Note: The equation gNumberOfMinislots only holds when gNumberOfMinislots !=0.) with: gdBGpreEnablePart=gdActionPointOffset−1 gdBGpostEnablePart=gdStaticSlot−pdBgeStaticDuration−gdActionPointOffset+1

The following rules apply only to configurations, that contain a dynamic segment (gdNumberOfMinislots !=0). The configuration parameter pBgsmDynSegDisabled indicates if transmission during the dynamic segment shall be enabled or disabled by the BG and controls which set of rules has to be applied.

pBgsmDynSegDisabled=TRUE

-   -   Starting with the first macrotick of the dynamic segment the         following rule shall be applied:

if (last static slot = = enabled) AND  (gdBGpostEnablePart = = 0) iBgsmRule shall be set to BGE_X; else iBgsmRule shall be set to BGE_DISABLED; end;

-   -   Starting with the second macrotick of the dynamic segment         iBgsmRule shall be set to BGE_DISABLED.         pBgsmDynSegDisabled=FALSE     -   Starting with the first macrotick of the dynamic segment the         following rule shall be applied:

if (gdBGpreEnablePart = = 0) OR  (last static slot = = enabled) AND  (gdBGpostEnablePart = = 0) iBgsmRule shall be set to BGE_X; else iBgsmRule shall be set to BGE_DISABLED; end;

-   -   Starting with the second macrotick of the dynamic segment the         following rule shall be applied:

if (gdBGpreEnablePart > 1) iBgsmRule shall be set to BGE_DISABLED; end;

-   -   Starting macrotick gdActionPointOffset of the dynamic segment         iBgsmRule shall be set to BGE_X.     -   Starting with macrotick gdActionPointOffset+1 iBgsmRule shall be         set to BGE_ENABLED.     -   Starting with macrotick pdBgeDynamicDuration+gdActionPointOffset         the following rule shall be applied:

if (gdBGpostEnablePart > 0) iBgsmRule shall be set to BGE_X; end;

-   -   Starting with macrotick         pdBgeDynamicDuration+gdActionPointOffset+1 the following rule         shall be applied:

if (gdBGpostEnablePart > 1) iBgsmRule shall be set to BGE_DISABLED; end;

FIG. 92 shows the interaction in the dynamic segment with the symbol window disabled.

Symbol Window

The configuration parameter pdBgeSymbolDuration defines the duration of the BGE active phase during the symbol window. The relationship between pdBgeSymbolDuration and other configuration parameters related to the symbol window is given by: pdBgeSymbolDuration=gdBGSymbolWindow+2=gdSymbolWindow−gdBGpreEnablePart−gdBGpostEnablePart

The following rules apply only to configurations, that contain a symbol window (gdSymbolWindow !=0). The configuration parameter pBgsmSymWinDisabled indicates if transmission during the symbol window shall be enabled or disabled by the BG and controls which set of rules has to be applied.

pBgsmSymWinDisabled=TRUE

-   -   Starting with the first macrotick of the symbol window the         following rule shall be applied:

if (gdBGpostEnablePart = = 0) AND  (pBgsmDynSegDisabled = = FALSE) iBgsmRule shall be set to BGE_X; else iBgsmRule shall be set to BGE_DISABLED; end;

-   -   Starting with the second macrotick of the symbol window         iBgsmRule shall be set to BGE_DISABLED.         pBgsmSymWinDisabled=FALSE     -   Starting with the first macrotick of the symbol window the         following rule shall be applied:

if (gdBGpreEnablePart == 0) OR  (gdBGpostEnablePart == 0 AND  pBgsmDynSegDisabled == FALSE) iBgsmRule shall be set to BGE_X; else iBgsmRule shall be set to BGE_DISABLED; end;

-   -   Starting with the second macrotick of the symbol window the         following rule shall be applied:

if (gdBGpreEnablePart > 1) iBgsmRule shall be set to BGE_DISABLED; end;

-   -   Starting with macrotick gdActionPointOffset of the symbol window         the following rule shall be applied:

if (gdBGpreEnablePart > 0) iBgsmRule shall be set to BGE_X; end;

-   -   Starting with macrotick gdActionPointOffset+1 iBgsmRule shall be         set to BGE_ENABLED.     -   Starting with macrotick pdBgeSymbolDuration+gdActionPointOffset         the following rule shall be applied:

if (gdBGpostEnablePart > 0) iBgsmRule shall be set to BGE_X; end;

-   -   Starting with macrotick         pdBgeSymbolDuration+gdActionPointOffset+1 the following rule         shall be applied:

if (gdBGpostEnablePart > 1) iBgsmRule shall be set to BGE_DISABLED; end;

FIG. 93 shows the interaction in the symbol window and the network idle time.

Network Idle Time

-   -   Starting with the first macrotick of the network idle time the         following rule shall be applied:

if (gdBGpostEnablePart = = 0) AND  (pBgsmSymWinDisabled = = FALSE) iBgsmRule shall be set to BGE_X; else iBgsmRule shall be set to BGE_DISABLED; end;

-   -   Starting with the second macrotick of the network idle time         iBgsmRule shall be set to BGE_DISABLED.         Host Interaction

Upon detection of a rule violation the communication controller shall signal this violation to the host computer by means of the flag vBgsmError in the host interface.

The flag shall remain set until it is cleared by the host controller.

Comments

Currently it is not foreseen to have the option to deactivate the schedule monitor. Note with systems operating without a BG this implies the vBgsmError will indicate a permanent BG error as soon as the (expected) first mismatch between the configured rule and the BGE signal occurs.

Event Triggered Mode

Introduction

This chapter describes the event triggered communication mode of the FlexRay communication protocol. In contrast to the time triggered communication mode, the repetition interval of the communication cycle may vary in the event triggered communication mode.

Operating Modes

FlexRay supports two operating modes for communication cycle execution (see FIG. 94, in which the FlexRay communication operation modes are shown):

-   -   A time triggered communication mode, where the timebase is         generated either by a distributed clock algorithm or under         control of a communication master     -   An event triggered communication mode

The different operating modes are described below.

Time Triggered Communication Cycles

This mode is described in detail in the media access chapter (see Chapter ‘Media Access Scheme’).

Event Triggered Communication Cycles

In the event triggered communication mode the communication cycle is always initiated by a master node. The master node may initiate the communication cycle based on the input of a number of sources. The management of these sources is under host control via the CHI. The following functionality is the minimum required (see FIG. 95, in which the event triggered communication handling in the host, the CHI and the CC is shown).

-   -   A mechanism that allows the host to initiate a communication         cycle via the CHI. There are many means by which this could be         accomplished. An example is a CHI element that, when written by         the host, would cause the initiation of a communication cycle.         If the host initiates a new trigger during a communication         cycle, a new communication cycle shall be triggered immediately         after the end of the current communication cycle.     -   A configurable timer to initiate periodic communication cycles.         The CHI provides a function to start/stop the timer. If the         timer is enabled a communication cycle is started when the timer         expires.     -   A direct hardware input to the Communication Controller to         trigger the communication cycle by an external hardware pin. The         CHI gives the host the opportunity to configure the direct         hardware input (enable/disable, edge sensitivity, etc.).

All CHI sources can raise the CC Trigger signal (OR function). The protocol engine interface that is required is the CC Trigger Input.

If the CC trigger signal at a dedicated master occurs the communication cycle is initiated by sending an event indication symbol (EIS) within the trigger window. The new cycle is then started after the NIT with frame ID 1 is sent by the master.

8. In the event triggered communication mode bus guardian protection is not required.

The clocks on the master and slave nodes are synchronized by sending and receiving the EIS symbol. The FlexRay protocol does not specifically handle a fault that prevents the communication master from sending the EIS or frame ID 1. There are possible recovery strategies (reconfiguration of the system to use a new master, for example), but these must be implemented at the application level and are not part of the protocol.

The event triggered mode supports two channels. The master controls both channels in a two-channel system. The master sends the EIS and frame ID 1 at the same time on all configured channels. The slave nodes need not be connected to both channels. If a slave is connected to both channels, the channel with a correct EIS symbol in combination with the frame ID 1 wins the arbitration and determines the cycle start on the slave.

The use of an EIS symbol in combination with the frame with ID 1 provides the following advantages:

-   -   Slave nodes can react on a trigger event on the master node with         minimal time delay on the assumption of the FlexRay media access         scheme. Therefore the re-use of the FlexRay media access scheme         is possible.     -   Cycle counter will be incremented in the master and the slave at         the (cycle start). Therefore nearly the same frame acceptance         method can be applied     -   Re-ordering of the messages in the dynamic part can be done         within the NIT         Media Access—Event Triggered Mode

The communication cycle is the fundamental element of the media access scheme within FlexRay. It is defined by means of a timing hierarchy.

Timing Hierarchy

The timing hierarchy consists of four timing hierarchy levels as shown in FIG. 96.

The highest level, the communication cycle level, defines the communication cycle. It contains the static segment, the dynamic segment, the symbol window and the network idle time (NIT). Within the static segment a static time division multiple access scheme is used to arbitrate transmissions as specified in Section ‘Static Segment’. Within the dynamic segment a dynamic mini-slotting based scheme is used to arbitrate transmissions as specified in Section ‘Dynamic Segment’. The symbol window is a communication period in which one symbol out of a defined set of symbols can be transmitted on the network as specified in Section ‘Symbol Window’. The static segment, the dynamic segment and the symbol window form the network communication time (NCT), a period during which network wide communication takes place. The network idle time defines a communication-free period that concludes each communication cycle.

The next lower level, the arbitration grid level, contains the arbitration grid that forms the backbone of FlexRay media arbitration. In the static segment the arbitration grid consists of consecutive time intervals, called static slots, in the dynamic segment the arbitration grid consists of consecutive time intervals, called minislots.

The arbitration grid level builds on the macrotick level that is defined by the macrotick. The macrotick is specified in Chapter “Clock Synchronization”. Specific macrotick boundaries are called action points. These are dedicated instants at which transmissions shall start (in the static segment, dynamic segment and symbol window) and shall end (only in the dynamic segment).

The lowest level in the hierarchy is defined by the microtick that is covered in Chapter ‘Clock Synchronization’.

Communication Cycle Execution

In the event triggered mode the communication cycle is executed under the control of a single master. Each node enters a phase called the cycle gap immediately after the end of the dynamic segment. If there is no dynamic segment the cycle gap begins at the end of the static segment. In the cycle gap the execution of the communication cycle is suspended until an event indication symbol (EIS) is received. The master issues the EIS symbol. Upon reception of the EIS symbol all nodes resume execution of the communication cycle.

FIG. 97 illustrates the execution of the event triggered communication cycle.

Event Indication Symbol (EIS)

The Event Indication Symbol (EIS) is defined in Chapter ‘Coding and Decoding’. The second falling edge is used as the synchronization event (SyncEvent) on master and slave nodes. The EIS symbol is not required to be collision resilient. The trigger condition in the EIS is illustrated in FIG. 98.

Clock Synchronization in Event Triggered Mode

Principle

Communication cycle timing in the event triggered mode is based on the EIS symbol. Since the start of a communication cycle is not predictable (and therefore the duration of a communication cycle is variable) there is no notion of time that can be used by the slave nodes to perform a clock rate correction, the EIS is simply used as a synchronizing event by the slave nodes and all subsequent timing is based on nominal (uncorrected) macroticks based on a timing grid that is set up by the arrival time of the EIS. The following paragraphs define the details of the clock synchronization for master and slave nodes.

Clock Synchronization of the Master Node

After the arrival of the CC trigger event on the master node, the symbol window starts and the master sends the EIS symbol within the symbol window at the beginning of the next microtick. While sending the EIS symbol, the timer vEDMTimer is initialized at the SyncEvent point with the configuration value pdMasterEIStoEndOfNIT (The parameter pdMasterEIStoEndOfNIT is expressed in microticks to minimize timing jitter.), which describes the duration between the SyncEvent point of the EIS and the end of the NIT.

When the timer vEDMTimer expires at the end of phase b (see FIG. 97) the new communication cycle is started, the master initializes the macrotick and microtick counters with 0, and the cycle counter is incremented.

Beginning with the new cycle the master transmits a frame with ID 1. The cycle counter field of this frame is set to the master's local cycle counter.

Clock Synchronization of the Slave Node

If a slave is connected to two channels, the first valid reception of a EIS symbol on one of the two channels will be taken.

When a slave recognizes the reception of a valid EIS symbol, the timer vEDMTimer is provisionally initialized at the SyncEvent point with the configuration value pdSlaveEIStoEndOfNIT, which quantifies the duration between the SyncEvent point of the received EIS symbol and the end of the NIT (The parameter pdSlaveEIStoEndOfNIT is expressed in terms of the SyncEvent of the received EIS, and therefore should include the effects of any fixed network propagation delay. The parameter is expressed in microticks to minimize timing jitter.). The timer vEDMTimer will be committed when the EIS symbol was correctly received. The parameter pdSlaveEIStoEndOfNIT is configured during soft reset. When the timer vEDMTimer expires at the end of phase c (see FIG. 97) the new communication cycle is started, the slave initializes the macrotick and microtick counters with 0, and the local cycle counter is incremented. Afterwards the slave waits to receive the frame with ID 1.

Using this procedure all slave nodes that receive the EIS and the master node switch consistently to the next communication cycle. During the startup phase the process is done in a different way (see below).

If the slave does not recognize the reception of a valid EIS symbol no action is performed. The local time proceeds until the reception of a new EIS symbol and the timing monitoring (see below) will signal an error.

Frame Processing in Event Triggered Mode

Frame Processing of the Master Node

The master node shall process frames using the procedure defined in Chapter ‘Frame Processing’ at the beginning of this document.

Frame Processing of the Slave Node

If no valid frame with frame ID 1 on at least one channel is correctly received in slot 1 after an EIS symbol on a slave node, then no communication will be performed by that slave node during the communication cycle (In this case, “no communication” means that no transmission of frames is possible. Receiving frames can be performed.). This will be indicated by setting S_Trig_Symb_Failure. If at least one valid frame with ID 1 is received in slot 1 on a slave node, then the slave applies the frame checks described above with the exception that the cycle counter checks of slot 1 are handled as described below (In the descriptions below, it is assumed that a frame is only considered valid if all acceptance criteria other than cycle counter matching are met.):

-   -   Single channel connected slaves         -   If the cycle counter of the received frame with Id=1 is not             equal to the local cycle counter then the local cycle             counter shall be changed to the cycle counter received in             frame with ID=1. This will be indicated by an             S_CycleCountError. The frame with ID=1 is accepted normally,             and the remainder of the communication cycle is executed             normally.         -   In all other cases the local cycle counter shall remain             unchanged, the frame shall continue through the acceptance             process, and the communication cycle shall be executed             normally     -   Dual channel connected slave         -   If the cycle counts of all received frames with Id=1 are             identical but not equal to the local cycle counter then the             local cycle counter shall be changed to the cycle counter             received in the frames with ID=1 (If only one frame is             received then it is identical by default.). This will be             indicated by an S_CycleCountError. The frame(s) with ID=1             are accepted normally, and the remainder of the             communication cycle is executed normally.         -   In all other cases the local cycle counter shall remain             unchanged, the frame(s) shall continue through the             acceptance process, and the communication cycle shall be             executed normally

After the first slot, all frames for the remainder of the communication cycle shall be processed using the procedure described in Chapter “Frame Processing” of this document.

Monitoring of Cycle Timing

The FlexRay event triggered mode has two different methods of monitoring the timing of the communication system, depending on whether a node is serving as the master or a slave:

-   -   The timing of the CC trigger is monitored by the master.     -   The cycle-to-cycle timing of the EIS symbol, sent by the master,         is monitored by the slaves.         Monitoring of the CC Trigger by the Master

The timing of the CC trigger is monitored by the master using a CC trigger window defined by two configuration parameters, pdExTrigCycleMin and pdExTrigCycleMax. The timing monitoring refers only to the external trigger source—the trigger sources ‘host trigger bit’ and ‘cycle timer’ do not affect the monitoring. There are three different cases with respect to the arrival of the CC trigger:

-   -   In normal operation the CC trigger appears later than         pdExTrigCycleMin and earlier than pdExTrigCycleMax. No error is         signaled and the start of a new communication cycle is initiated         by the CC trigger. The start of a new CC trigger window is         computed when the CC trigger arrives.     -   If the CC trigger does not appear before pdExTrigCycleMax, an         EXT_TRIG_EIF (CC Trigger Lost Interrupt Flag) error is signaled         after pdExTrigCycleMax. The start of a new trigger window will         be determined only after the actual arrival of a new CC trigger.         As long as no new CC trigger arrives, no new communication cycle         is initiated. It is up to the host to initiate the communication         cycle if needed.     -   If the CC trigger appears earlier than pdExTrigCycleMin, the         EXT_TRIG_EIF (CC Trigger Early Interrupt Flag) error is signaled         immediately. No communication cycle is initiated, and no new         trigger window is determined in this case.

These conditions are depicted in FIG. 99.

Monitoring of EIS Timing by the Slaves

The timing of the reception of Event Indication Symbols is monitored by the slaves through the use on an EIS window defined by two configuration parameters, pdEISSymbCycleMin and pdEISSymbCycleMax. There are three different cases with respect to the arrival of the EIS:

-   -   In normal operation the end of the EIS appears later than         pdEISSymbCycleMin but earlier than pdEISSymbCycleMax. No error         is signaled. The start of a new EIS window is computed when the         end of the EIS arrives.     -   If no valid EIS is received such that the end of the EIS appears         before pdEISSymbCycleMax, an EIS_SYMB_LIF (EIS symbol Lost         Interrupt Flag) error is signaled after pdEISSymbCycleMax. When         an EIS symbol arrives, the slaves continue with a new         communication cycle.     -   If the end of the EIS symbol appears earlier than         pdEISSymbCycleMin the early EIS symbol is ignored, and an         EIS_SYMB_EIF (EIS Symbol Early Interrupt Flag) error is signaled         immediately. The node switches into a passive mode, stopping all         frame transmission and reception. No new EIS window is computed,         and no new communication cycle is initiated. The slave node         waits for another EIS symbol after pdEISSymbCycleMin.

These conditions are depicted in FIG. 100.

Startup and Reintegration—Event Triggered Mode

The following overview describes the CC behavior in the event triggered communication mode. Conditions for entering and exiting these states are described in Table 52.

-   -   State transitions with a prefix of ‘G’ are global transitions         for the FlexRay protocol.     -   State transitions with a prefix of ‘L’ indicate states         transitions corresponding to logical conditions     -   State transitions with a prefix of ‘E’ are transitions specific         to the event triggered communication mode.

If a node integrates into a running system or at startup, the cycle counter from the master is accepted without raising an error indication. The error indication is suppressed until integration is successfully completed.

TABLE 52 State Transitions - Event Triggered Mode State Transition Direction Transition From State To State Conditions for Transition Action taken on Transition L3 CC_Normal CC_SoftReset A CC_Reset is The ongoing frame requested by the transmission or host reception is allowed to proceed to completion and the configuration data shall be retained L4 CC_SoftReset Initialization is finished G5 CC_SoftReset CC_WaitEIS soft reset released Reset timer for EIS (in the respective symbol monitoring control register) AND Event Triggered slave mode is configured G6 CC_WaitEvent soft reset released Reset timer for event (in the respective trigger monitoring control register) AND Event Triggered master mode is configured E1 CC_WaitEIS CC_WaitSlaveNIT Reception of a valid set vEDMTimer to EIS with the end pdSlaveEIStoEndOfNIT, later than set EIS_REC_INT pdEISSymbCycleMin interrupt Reset timer for EIS symbol monitoring E2 CC_WaitEIS Reception of a valid Signal EIS_SYMB_EIF EIS with the end (EIS symbol Early earlier than Interrupt Flag) Error pdEISSymbCycleMin (Note - The EIS timer is not reset by this transition) E3 CC_WaitEIS EIS Timer reaches Signal EIS_SYMB_LIF pdEISSymbCycleMax (EIS symbol Lost without detecting Interrupt Flag) Error a valid EIS (Note - The EIS timer is not reset by this transition) E4 CC_WaitSlaveNIT CC_WaitID1 vEDMTimer expires Reset vMacrotick, (i.e., microtick counter, pdSlaveEIStoEndOfNIT increment cycle has elapsed) counter E5 CC_WaitID1 CC_NormalSlave Reception of a valid frame with ID 1 (This implies that the cycle counter match check has also passed (i.e., the local cycle counter matches the received cycle counter).) E6 CC_NormalSlave Reception of a Signal frame with ID 1 S_CycleCountError which passes all Error frame checks other The received cycle than cycle counter count is applied for the checks local cycle count value E7 CC_WaitEIS The end of slot 1 Signal was reached S_Trig_Symb_Failure without having Error received an acceptable frame ID 1 message (Acceptable means all frame checks (with the possible exception of cycle counter match) are passed.) E8 CC_NormalSlave CC_WaitEIS End of dynamic Reset timer for EIS segment reached symbol monitoring (vMacrotick == gdCycle − gdNetworkIdleTime − gdSymbolWindow; based on local timers) E9 CC_WaitEvent CC_WaitMasterNIT CC trigger appears send EIS symbol later than set EXT_SOR_INT pdExTrigCycleMin interrupt set vEDMTimer to pdMasterEIStoEndOfNIT E10 CC_WaitMasterNIT Trigger bit is set by send EIS symbol host set vEDMTimer to pdMasterEIStoEndOfNIT E11 CC_WaitEvent CC trigger appears Signal EXT_TRIG_EIF earlier than (CC trigger Early pdExTrigCycleMin Interrupt Flag) Error AND Trigger source is (Note - The CC trigger external event timer is not affected by this transition) E12 CC_WaitEvent CC trigger timer signal EXT_TRIG_LIF reaches (CC trigger Lost pdExTrigCycleMax Interrupt Flag) Error before a CC trigger (Note - The CC trigger appears timer is not affected by this transition) E13 CC_WaitMasterNIT CC_NormalMaster vEDMTimer expires Reset vMacrotick, and (i.e., vMicrotick counters, pdMasterEIStoEndOfNIT increment cycle has elapsed) counter, reinitialize error signaling counters, send frame ID 1 in slot 1 E14 CC_WaitMasterNIT CC trigger appears Signal EXT_TRIG_EIF AND Trigger source is (CC trigger Early external event Interrupt Flag) Error E15 CC_NormalMaster CC_WaitEvent End of dynamic Reset timer for event segment reached trigger monitoring (vMacrotick == gdCycle − gdNetworkIdleTime − gdSymbolWindow; based on local timers) E16 CC_NormalMaster CC trigger appears Signal EXT_TRIG_EIF AND Trigger source is (CC trigger Early external event Interrupt Flag) Error State Diagram

FIG. 101 shows a protocol state diagram for the event triggered mode.

Host Interface Requirements—Event Triggered Mode

-   -   Event triggered mode specific requirements:     -   A configuration parameter (e.g. pMasterSelect or consider         reusing pSyncMaster) defines whether the node acts as a master         or as a slave.     -   For the master node three event sources for starting the next         cycle exist: external event, host access, CC internal timer         (normal cycle length). The host decides during runtime which         event source(s) are used.     -   The trigger/event sources external event and CC internal timer         can be enabled/disabled independently. If more than one source         is enabled, the first event arms the CC to send the EIS symbol.         At least one of the triggers sources has to be enabled.     -   Product specific: The behavior of the input signal for the         external source should be configurable with respect to the         trigger type (falling or rising edge) and the assignment to a         trigger pin.     -   Product specific: Upon detection of the trigger event, the         master CC shall capture the macrotick-counter and present this         value to the host.     -   Product specific: Upon reception of the trigger event, the         master CC shall indicate this immediately to the host (Event         Trigger).     -   Product specific: Upon reception of the event indication symbol,         the slaves shall capture their macrotick-counters.     -   Upon reception of the event indication symbol, the slave shall         indicate this immediately to the host (Event Indication Symbol         (EIS) Detected).     -   It is required for the host to be able to change the transmit         buffers during the dynamic segment in the following way:         -   The data of a buffer may be changed.         -   The data and the ID of a buffer may be changed as long as             its order in the list of dynamic IDs is not changed     -   Range of pdExTrigCycleMin: 100 μs . . . 64 ms     -   Range of pdExTrigCycleMax: 100 μs . . . 64 ms     -   Range of pdEISSymbCycleMin: 100 μs . . . 64 ms     -   Range of pdEISSymbCycleMax: 100 μs . . . 64 ms         General Interrupt Register

For the event triggered communication mode the interrupt flags described above are available. Table 53 lists additional interrupt flags that are specific to the event triggered communications mode.

Every interrupt source described in Table 53 shall have an individual enable/disable mechanism.

TABLE 53 Interrupt Registers - Event Triggered Mode General Interrupt Flag Bits Description Channel EXT_SOR_INT 1 External source interrupt — (master only) EXT_TRIG_EIF 1 External Trigger Early — Interrupt Flag, external trigger received before pdExTrigCycleMin (master only) EXT_TRIG_LIF 1 External Trigger Late — Interrupt Flag, external trigger not received before pdExTrigCycleMax (master only) EIS_REC_INT 1 EIS symbol detected A EXT_TRIG_EIF 1 EIS symbol Early A Interrupt Flag, EIS received before pdEISSymbCycleMin EXT_TRIG_LIF 1 EIS symbol Lost Interrupt A Flag, EIS not received before pdEISSymbCycleMax EIS_REC_INT 1 EIS symbol detected B EXT_TRIG_EIF 1 EIS symbol Early B Interrupt Flag, EIS received before pdEISSymbCycleMin EXT_TRIG_LIF 1 EIS symbol Lost Interrupt B Flag, EIS not received before pdEISSymbCycleMax Note: It is possible to use the external source interrupt (EXT_SOR_INT) even if the external source is not used in order to gather information about the occurrence of external source trigger events. Error Management—Master Triggered Mode

For the event triggered communication mode the error management described in Chapter “Error Signalling and Error Handling” applies in general. Only the treatment of frame with ID=1 is different. If a frame does not receive frame ID 1 after a correct EIS symbol, the slave node switches in Error (passive) and stops frame transmission until a next pair of valid EIS+frame Id 1 is received.

The error signaling counters are reinitialized during the transition at the beginning of the new communication cycle.

Controller Host Interface Example

Purpose

This chapter contains an example of a Controller Host Interface (CHI) that meets the Host Interface requirements defined in Chapter ‘Controller Host Interface’ and Chapter ‘Controller Host Interface Services’.

Some of these requirements are applicable to all FlexRay implementations and others are applicable only when specific optional protocol mechanisms are implemented.

Controller Status Registers

This section enumerates the registers that shall be supported by the Communication Controller to provide the host with status information regarding the operation of the controller, and the current value of different CC internal variables. The current controller status shall be provided on read request of the host. The status registers holding internal variables shall be cleared at the state transitions L1, L5 and L6 of the HW state machine (see Section ‘CC State Diagram’) and shall be updated by the CC. The host shall have read-only access to the status information. The host is generally not able to modify the contents of these registers, with the exception of some error flags, that may be cleared by the host.

Product Version Register

The CHI shall provide a 16-bit read-only register to hold the FlexRay Product Version Number. This number identifies the manufacturer, the product and the implemented protocol version in order to allow the user to distinguish between different products. Starting with the MSB, the register shall be used as follows:

-   -   5 bits to identify the silicon manufacturer     -   4 bits for manufacturer defined silicon versions     -   7 bits to identify the implemented protocol version.

The semiconductor manufacturer shall agree this version number with the FlexRay Consortium.

Current Cycle Counter Value

The CHI shall provide a 6-bit register to hold the current cycle counter value (vCycle). The content shall be incremented by CC at start of cycle.

Current Macrotick Value

The CHI shall provide a 16-bit register to hold the current macrotick value (vMacrotick). The content shall be incremented by CC and reset at start of cycle.

Rate Correction Value

The CHI shall provide an 8-bit register to hold the rate correction value (vRateCorrection) applied by the clock sync in the current cycle. (See Section ‘Calculation of the Rate Correction Value’)

Offset Correction Value

The CHI shall provide an 8-bit register to hold the offset correction value (vOffsetCorrection) applied by clock sync in the current cycle. (See Section ‘Calculation of the Offset Correction Value’)

Valid Sync Frames Channel A (VSFC_A)

The CHI shall provide a 5-bit register indicating the number of valid Sync Frames received in the previous cycle. The variable shall only be updated at the end of the static segment with the counter value VSFC_A.

Valid Sync Frames Channel B (VSFC_B)

The CHI shall provide a 5-bit register indicating the number of valid Sync Frames received in the previous cycle. The variable shall only be updated at the end of the static segment with the counter value VSFC_B.

Sync Frames used for Clock Sync

The CHI shall provide a 5-bit register indicating the number of valid Sync Frame pairs used for the calculation of the rate correction terms in the previous cycle. The register shall only be updated at the end of the NIT of the odd cycle with the counter value vValidSyncFrameCount. (See Section ‘Clock Synchronization—General Concepts’)

Missing Rate Correction Signal (MRCS)

The CC shall provide a flag to signal to the host, that no rate correction can be performed because no pairs of (even/odd) Sync Frames were received. The flag shall be reset by the CC after successful rate correction. (See Section ‘Missing Rate Correction Signal (MRCS)’)

Missing Offset Correction Signal (MOCS)

The CC shall provide a flag to signal to the host, that no offset correction can be performed because no Sync Frames were received in an odd cycle. The flag shall be reset by the CC after successful offset correction. (see Section ‘Missing Offset Correction Signal (MOCS)’)

Clock Correction Failed Counter (CCFC)

The CC shall provide a 4-bit counter that is incremented by one at the end of any odd communication cycle where either the Missing Offset Correction error or Missing Rate Correction error are active. The CCFC shall be reset to zero at the end of an odd communication cycle if neither the Offset Correction Failed nor the Rate Correction Failed errors are active. The CCFC stops at 15. (see Section ‘Clock Correction Failed Counter (CCFC)’)

Startup Majority Missed Signal (SMMS)

The CC shall provide a flag to signal to the host that the CC has received a set of sync frames during startup that did not result in a majority of the sync frames agreeing with the local view of the system time (see Section ‘Startup Majority Missed Signal (SMMS)’). The SMMS shall be reset by host interaction or when the CC performs the state transition L5 or L6 of the HW state machine (see Section ‘CC State Diagram’).

Protocol Error State

The CC shall provide 2 bits indicating the current protocol error state. (See Section ‘Protocol Error State Signal’)

Startup Status Vector

The CC shall provide a Startup Status Vector with following status flags:

-   -   vCCMS; Coldstart max reached (vColdStartCount=gColdStartMax)     -   vSMMS, Plausibility check failed     -   vOpViaColdstart; Normal state entered via coldstart path     -   vColdStartAborted; Coldstart aborted because of CAS or Sync         Frame received     -   vColdstartNoise; Coldstart path has been entered due to the         expiration of pColdstartNoise

A logical ‘1’ indicates the truth condition for each status flag.

For details see Section ‘Communication Startup and Reintegration’.

Bus Guardian Schedule Monitoring Error (BGME)

The CC shall provide a flag to signal a bus guardian schedule monitoring violation (vBgsmError) to the host. The flag shall be set by the schedule monitoring mechanism and shall be cleared only by the host. (see Section ‘Bus Guardian Schedule Monitoring Error (BGME)’)

Clock Correction Limit Reached (CCLR)

The CC shall provide a flag to signal to the host, that the Offset Correction Value (vOffsetCorrection) has reached the red region (vOffsetCorrection>gOffsetCorrectionOut). The CC shall only have the capability to set this flag. The flag shall remain set until it is cleared by the host. (See Section ‘Value Limitations’ and Section ‘Clock Correction Limit Reached (CCLR)’).

Media Access Test Warning

The CC shall provide a flag (pMATestWarning) to signal to the host, that the CC has received a Media Access Test Symbol (MTS) during the symbol window. The CC shall only have the capability to set this flag. The flag shall remain set until it is cleared by the host.

Wakeup Status Vector

The CC shall provide a Wakeup Status Vector with following status flags:

-   -   Frame Header Received during Wakeup flag         (vWakeupFrameHeaderReceived). This flag shall be set if due to         the reception of a frame header without coding violation the CC         stops the wakeup.     -   Wakeup Symbol Received flag (vWakeupSymbolReceived). This flag         shall be set if due to the reception of a valid Rx-wakeup symbol         the CC stops the wakeup.     -   Wakeup Failed flag (vWakeupFailed). This flag shall be set if         due to too many wakeup tries the CC stops the wakeup.     -   Wakeup Complete flag (vWakeupComplete). This flag shall be set         if the CC has completed the transmission of the Tx-wakeup.

(see Section ‘Cluster Wakeup’ for details)

Communication Controller Status Vector

The CC shall provide a Communication Controller Status Vector with following status flags indicating the actual operation mode of the CC:

-   -   CC_SoftReset State     -   CC_Normal State     -   CC_ShutdownRequest State     -   CC_Shutdown Complete State     -   CC_Standby State     -   Listen-Only Mode     -   WakeUPListen State     -   StartupListen State     -   ColdStartICW State     -   ColdStartVCW State     -   IntegrationVCW State     -   PassiveOperation State     -   Event Triggered Mode

The CC shall set the status flag when entering the corresponding state or operation mode and shall clear it after leaving it, independent of the settings in the different configuration registers. For details see below and Sections ‘HW States of the CC’, and ‘Startup State Diagram—Time Triggered Protocol Mode (TT-D and TT-M)’.

Configuration and Control Registers

This section enumerates the registers supported by the Communication Controller to allow the host to control the operation of the CC. The host shall have write and read access to all configuration data.

Configuration data shall not be changed by the CC during normal operation. The CC shall reset the configuration data on its transition L1 from the CC_HWReset state (see Section ‘HW States of the CC’).

Module Configuration Register

The Module Configuration Register (MCR) enables the host to configure basic operating modes in the CC. (see Section ‘HW States of the CC’) The MCR shall provide the following control bits:

-   -   Soft Reset     -   When this bit is set by the host, the CC shall immediately enter         the CC_SoftReset State. Any ongoing transmission or reception         shall be aborted and synchronization to the ongoing         communication shall be stopped. When this bit is cleared by the         host, the CC shall enter the Normal State and start the         reintegration or startup. If wake-up is configured, the CC shall         enter the WakeUPListen State after leaving CC_SoftReset. The CC         shall enter the CC_SoftReset State automatically after power on         reset. The host shall configure the CC in this state. When the         host forces the CC into soft reset, the status and error         registers should keep their data unchanged until the soft reset         is terminated. (Transition L5 and L6 of the HW state machine;         see Section ‘CC State Diagram’))     -   Listen-Only Select         -   When this bit (vListenOnly) is set, the CC shall be able to             receive all frames after successful integration to the             running communication. In comparison to the normal operation             mode the node does not actively participate in             communication, i.e. neither symbols nor frames are             transmitted. This bit can be set only in CC_SoftReset State             to true, but can be cleared any time by the host. (See             Section ‘Listen-Only Mode’)     -   Master Select         -   This bit (pSyncMaster) selects the CC as a bus master in the             Master Controlled Operating modes. (See Section 0) The CC             shall send the Event Indication Symbol and the static sync             frame when the bit is set. The CC shall ignore any attempt             to change the status of this bit when not in CC_SoftReset             State.     -   Master Alarm         -   If the Master Select and the Master Alarm bits are set, the             CC shall send an SAS symbol in the byteflight mode. The bit             can be set and reset by the host any time during normal             operation.     -   Shutdown Request     -   When this bit is set by the host, the CC shall enter the         CC_ShutdownComplete state (see Section ‘CC_ShutDownComplete         State’). In this state all internal clocks shall be stopped         after finishing the current communication round. The state can         be left by the host resetting the bit.     -   Standby Request     -   When this bit is set by the host, the CC shall enter the         CC_StandByRequest State. In this state all internal clocks shall         be stopped after the CC has completed any ongoing transmission         and reception. The CC shall leave this state upon the host         resetting the bit or upon wake-up activity being signaled by the         physical layer on the Rx input.     -   Send Wakeup     -   When this bit is set by the host, the CC shall enter         WakeUPListen State when leaving the CC_SoftReset State and send         the Wakeup Pattern. The CC shall ignore any attempt to change         the status of this bit when not in CC_SoftReset State. (See         Section ‘Waking One Channel’)     -   Wakeup Channel Select     -   With this bit (vWakeupChannel) the host selects the channel on         which the CC shall send the Wakeup Pattern (‘0’=channel A,         ‘1’=channel B). The CC shall ignore any attempt to change the         status of this bit when not in CC_SoftReset State. (See Section         ‘Waking One Channel’)     -   Event Triggered Mode Select     -   When this bit is set by the host, the CC shall operate in the         Event Triggered Mode. This bit shall be reset by default (=Time         Driven Mode), and the CC shall ignore any attempt to change the         status of this bit when not in CC_SoftReset State.     -   External Trigger Acceptance     -   When this bit is set by the host, the CC shall accept an         external trigger to send the Event Indication Symbol and the         static sync frame in the Event Triggered Mode, if the CC is         configured as a master (Master Select bit set). The CC shall         ignore any attempt to change the status of this bit when not in         CC_SoftReset State.     -   Message/Frame ID Filtering     -   When this bit (gMsgIdFilter) is set by the host, the CC shall         apply the configured Message ID filtering for all dedicated         receive and FIFO receive mailbox buffers as described in         Section 0. If this bit is not set (by default) the CC shall         apply the Frame ID filtering. The CC shall ignore any attempt to         change the status of this bit when not in CC_SoftReset State. It         should be configured identically in all nodes of a cluster.     -   byteflight Compatibility mode     -   This bit selects the byteflight Compatibility mode when set. The         CC shall ignore any attempt to change the status of this bit         when not in CC_SoftReset State.         FIFO Size     -   The CC shall provide a register to configure the number of FIFO         receive buffers as a part of all available message buffers. The         CC shall ignore any attempt to change the content of the         register when not in CC_SoftReset. (See below).         Timing Parameters     -   The CHI shall provide three registers to configure the timing         parameters TCR1, TCR2, TCR3 required for the byteflight         compatibility mode. These parameters are not used in all the         other operating modes of the CC.     -   TCR1     -   8 bit; to configure the timing parameter pdWx0Rx, a constant         component of vdWaitTime in the dynamic section in the case that         the most recent bus activity was received by the local node; may         be modified only in CC_SoftReset.     -   TCR2     -   8 bit; to configure the timing parameter pdWx0Tx, a constant         component of vdWaitTime in the dynamic section in the case that         the most recent bus activity was transmitted by the local node;         may be modified only in CC_SoftReset.     -   TCR3     -   10 bit; to configure the timing parameter gdWxDelta a multiplier         part of vdWaitTime. The value chosen must be identical for all         nodes in the cluster, and may be modified only in CC_SoftReset.         It shall be calculated as follows:         gdWxDelta=gdMaxPropagationDelay+gdMaxTolerances         Clock Prescaler

The CC shall provide a clock prescaler register consisting of the following three fields:

-   -   Bit Rate Index, 4 bits     -   Sample Clock Prescaler, 4 bits     -   Samples per bit, 2 bits (8 or 10 samples; 01_(b)=8, 10_(b)=10         samples)     -   (See Section ‘Coding and Decoding—Configuration Parameters’ for         details)     -   The CC shall accept modifications of the register only in         CC_SoftReset.         Maximum Oscillator Drift

The CC shall provide a 16-bit register to hold the maximum expected clock deviation of the oscillator during one communication cycle (gdMaxDrift) in microticks, configurable only in CC_SoftReset.

Sample Voting Offset

The CC shall provide a 4-bit register to configure the offset from the start of the voting window (pVotingOffset) that is used to determine the value of a received bit from the start of the bit cell. This offset defines the first sample of the bit that shall be considered for the voting; configurable only in CC_SoftReset. (See Section ‘Bit Value Voting’)

Voting Samples

The CC shall provide a 4-bit register to configure the number of samples in the voting window (pVotingSamples) that are used to determine the value of a received bit; configurable only in CC_SoftReset. (See Section ‘Bit Value Voting’)

Nominal Macrotick Length

The CC shall provide an 8-bit register to hold the nominal (uncorrected) number of microticks per macrotick (pMicroPerMacroNom); may be modified only in CC_SoftReset.

Bus Guardian Tick

The CC shall provide a 4-bit register to configure the length of the Bus Guardian Tick (BGT) to be provided by the CC to the bus guardian in multiples of the CC microtick; configurable only in CC_SoftReset.

Static Slot Length

The CC shall provide an 8-bit register to configure the duration of a static slot (gdSlot) in minislots; may be modified only in CC_SoftReset. The static slot length must be identical in all nodes of a cluster.

Static Frame Data Length

The CC shall provide a 7-bit register to configure the (fixed) frame length (gPayloadLengthStatic) for all frames sent in the static part in double bytes; may be modified only in CC_SoftReset. The static slot length must be identical in all nodes of a cluster.

Number of Static Slots

The CC shall provide a 12-bit register to configure the number of static slots in a cycle (gNumberOfStaticSlots); may be modified only in CC_SoftReset. The static slot length must be identical in all nodes of a cluster.

-   -   Cycle Length

The CC shall provide a 16-bit register to configure the duration of one communication cycle (gMinislotPerCycle) in minislots; may be modified only in CC_SoftReset. The cycle length must be identical in all nodes of a cluster.

Network Idle Time

The CC shall provide an 8-bit register to configure the duration of the network idle time (gdNetworkIdle) at the end of the communication cycle in minislots; may be modified only in CC_SoftReset.

Start of Latest Transmit

The CC shall provide a 16-bit register to configure the maximum minislot value (pdLatestTX) allowed before inhibiting new frame transmissions in the dynamic section of the cycle, expressed in terms of minislots from the beginning of the cycle; may be modified only in CC_SoftReset.

Transmission Start Sequence Duration

The CC shall provide a 4-bit register to configure the duration of the Transmission Start Sequence (TSS) (gdTransmissionStartSequence) in terms of bit times (gdBit); may be modified only in CC_SoftReset, and shall be identical in all nodes of a cluster.

Symbol Window Length

The CC shall provide an 8-bit register to configure the length of the symbol window in minislots; may be modified only in CC_SoftReset.

Media Access Test Cycle Counter

The CC shall provide a 6-bit register to configure the cycle counter value (pMATestCycle) in which the CC shall send the Media Access Test Symbol (MTS) periodically to perform the Media Access Test.

Media Access Test Enable

The CC shall provide a configuration flag (pMATestEnable) to enable the CC to periodically perform the Media Access Test if bit set. The flag shall be reset by default and may be modified only in CC_SoftReset.

External Clock Correction Acceptance

The CC shall provide a configuration flag to allow external clock correction when set. The flag shall be reset by default after power on reset and may be modified only in CC_SoftReset. The CC shall ignore the external clock corrections if this bit is not set.

Maximum Offset Correction

The CC shall provide an 8-bit register to hold the maximum permitted offset correction value (gOffsetCorrectionOut) to be applied during regular clock synchronization algorithm; may be modified only in CC_SoftReset. The CC checks the sum of internal and external offset correction against the gOffsetCorrectionOut parameter. (See Section ‘Correction Term Calculation—Value Limitations’)

Maximum Initial Offset Correction

The CC shall provide an 8-bit register to hold the initial offset correction value (gOffsetCorrectionInitOut) to be applied by the clock synchronization algorithm in the IntegrationVCW state; may be modified only in CC_SoftReset. (See Section ‘CC IntegrationVWC State’)

Maximum Rate Correction

The CC shall provide an 8-bit register to hold the maximum permitted rate correction value (gRateCorrectionOut) to be applied by the internal clock synchronization algorithm; may be modified only in CC_SoftReset. The CC checks the sum of internal and external rate correction against the gRateCorrectionOut parameter. (See Section ‘Correction Term Calculation—Value Limitations’)

Cluster Drift Damping

The CC shall provide a 4-bit register to hold the cluster drift damping value (pClusterDriftDamping) used in clock synchronization to minimize accumulation of rounding errors; configurable only in CC_SoftReset. (See Section ‘Calculation of the Rate Correction Value’)

Bus Guardian Enable Duration for BGSM

The CC shall provide a 12-bit register to configure the duration (pBgenStaticDuration) of the bus guardian enable signal for the transmission phase of a static slot in macroticks. This shall be checked by the CC with the BGE signal produced by the bus guardian; may be modified only in CC_SoftReset. (See Section ‘BG Schedule Monitoring Service’)

Bus Guardian Dynamic Segment Enable Duration for BGSM

The CC shall provide a 16-bit register to configure the duration (pBgeDynamicDuration) of the bus guardian enable signal for the transmission phase of the dynamic segment in macroticks. This shall be checked by the CC with the BGE signal produced by the bus guardian; may be modified only in CC_SoftReset. (See Section ‘BG Schedule Monitoring Service’)

Bus Guardian Symbol Window Enable Duration for BGSM

The CC shall provide an 8-bit register to configure the duration (pBgeSymbolDuration) of the bus guardian enable signal for the transmission phase of the symbol window in macroticks. This shall be checked by the CC with the BGE signal produced by the bus guardian; may be modified only in CC_SoftReset. (See Section ‘BG Schedule Monitoring Service’)

BG Schedule Monitoring in Symbol Window

The CC shall provide a configuration flag (pBgsmSymWinDisabled) to disable bus guardian schedule monitoring during the symbol window when set; may be modified only in CC_SoftReset. (See Section ‘BG Schedule Monitoring Service’)

BG Schedule Monitoring in Dynamic Segment

The CC shall provide a configuration flag (pBgsmDynSegDisabled) to disable bus guardian schedule monitoring during the dynamic segment when set; may be modified only in CC_SoftReset. (See Section ‘BG Schedule Monitoring Service’)

Timer Interrupt Configuration Registers

The CC shall provide two Timer Interrupt Configuration Registers to enable the host to configure two different timer interrupts. Each register shall contain three fields:

-   -   Cycle Set—A 9-bit register is used to specify in which set of         cycles the interrupt shall occur. It consists of two fields, the         Base Cycle [b] and the Cycle Repetition [c]. The set of cycle         numbers where the interrupt is to be generated is determined         from these two fields using the formula         b+n*2^c(n=0,1,2, . . . ):         -   Base Cycle [b]—A 6-bit cycle number used to identify the             initial value for generating the cycle set         -   Cycle Repetition [c]—A 3-bit value used to determine a             constant repetition factor to be added to the base cycle             (c=0 . . . 6).     -   Macrotick Offset—This 16-bit value is the macrotick offset from         the beginning of the cycle where the interrupt is to occur. The         interrupt occurs at this offset for each cycle in the Interrupt         Cycle Set.         Transmitter Generated Padding Switch

In the CC a configuration switch decides whether the transmitter may add missing data bytes if the configured frame data length exceeds the length of the buffer data field. The configuration switch applies to all transmit buffers of the CC. The flag shall be disabled (logical ‘0’) by default, may be enabled (logical ‘1’) only in CC_SoftReset.

Cold Start Max

The CC shall provide an 8-bit register to configure the maximum number of cycles (gColdStartMax) that a cold starting node is permitted to try to start up the network without receiving any valid response from another node; configurable only in CC_SoftReset. If the value is ‘0’ the CC is not allowed to start up the communication.

Cold Start Inhibit

The CC shall provide a configuration flag (vColdStartInhibit) to disable the cold starting of a node during wake-up when set. (See Section ‘ColdStart-Inhibit Mode’)

Max. Without Clock Correction Passive

The CC shall provide a 4-bit register configurable with the number of cycles without performing rate correction (gMaxWithoutClockCorrectionPassive) when the CC shall enter the “Yellow” state. The register can be configured only in CC_SoftReset. (See Section ‘Error Handling for TT-D and TT-M Protocol Modes’)

Max. Without Clock Correction Fatal

The CC shall provide a 4-bit register configurable with the number of cycles without performing rate correction (gMaxWithoutClockCorrectionFatal) when the CC shall enter the “Red” state. The register can be configured only in CC_SoftReset. (See Section ‘Error Handling for TT-D and TT-M Protocol Modes’)

Wake-Up Symbol Definition Registers

The CHI shall provide following registers to configure the parameters needed by the CC to send and receive the wake-up symbol:

-   -   6 bits; to configure the duration of the active low level         (gdWakeupSymbolTxLow) of the wake-up symbol in multiples of bit         times (gdBit); may be modified only in CC_SoftReset.     -   8 bits; to configure the duration of the idle/recessive high         level (gdWakeupSymbolTxIdle) of the wake-up symbol in multiples         of bit times (gdBit); may be modified only in CC_SoftReset.     -   4 bits; to configure the number of repetitions (sequences)         (pdWakeupPattern) of the wake-up symbol; may be modified only in         CC_SoftReset.     -   6 bits; to configure the minimum duration of the active low         level (gdWakeupSymbolRxLow) in multiples of bit times (gdBit)         for the receiver to recognize the symbol as a wake-up; may be         modified only in CC_SoftReset.     -   6 bits; to configure the minimum duration of the idle/recessive         high level (gdWakeupSymbolRxIdleMin) in multiples of bit times         (gdBit) for the receiver to recognize the symbol as a wake-up;         may be modified only in CC_SoftReset.     -   9 bits; to configure the window length within which the symbol         has to be received (gdWakeupSymbolRxWindow) in multiples of bit         times (gdBit) for the receiver to recognize the symbol as a         wake-up; may be modified only in CC_SoftReset.     -   4 bits; to configure the maximum number of times (gWakeupMax)         the CC is permitted to autonomously attempt to send a wake-up         pattern; may be modified only in CC_SoftReset.     -   6 bits; to configure in multiples of bit times (gdBit) the         duration of the active low level on the bus         (gdWakeupMaxCollision) that a CC sending a wake-up pattern shall         accept during the idle phase of the pattern without reentering         the WakeupListen state; may be modified only in CC_SoftReset.         (See Section ‘Cluster Wakeup’0)         Communication Delay Registers

The CC shall provide two 8-bit registers to configure the average delay compensation values for each channel (pDelayCompensationChx) in microticks; configurable only in CC_SoftReset. (See Section ‘Time Measurement’)

Buffer Control Register

The configuration of the message mailbox buffers (as Transmit, Dedicated Receive or FIFO Receive buffer) and host's access to the mailbox message buffers shall be controlled by the use of a Buffer Control Register. (See below for implementation guidelines)

Clock Correction Registers

This section enumerates the registers the Communication Controller shall provide to allow external clock correction by the host. The host shall have write and read access to these registers.

The CC shall have read-only access during normal operation. The CC shall reset the configuration data during power on reset.

External Offset Correction

The CC shall provide an 8-bit register to hold the external clock offset correction value (vOffsetCorrectionExtern) in microticks to be applied by the internal clock synchronization algorithm when the External Clock Correction Acceptance bit is set (See above). The register content is supposed to be written by the host before start of the Network Idle Time (NIT) and it shall be consumed when applied by the CC. (See Section ‘External Clock Synchronization (Optional)’)

External Rate Correction

The CC shall provide an 8-bit register to hold the external clock rate correction value (vRateCorrectionExtern) in microticks to be applied by the internal clock synchronization algorithm when the External Clock Correction Acceptance bit is set (See above). The register content is supposed to be written by the host before start of the Network Idle Time (NIT) and it shall be consumed when applied by the CC. (See Section ‘External Clock Synchronization (Optional)’)

Message Buffers

The communication controller has to provide an implementation specific number of configurable message buffers for data communication with an implementation specific frame length up to the maximum of 254 data bytes. The message buffers shall be configurable to be used as transmit, dedicated receive or FIFO receive buffers.

Each buffer shall include the complete frame header and data field, and shall not include the frame CRC (See Section ‘FlexRay Frame Format’ for details). The CC shall provide suitable mechanisms to grant a secure access to the buffers. Using a suitable mechanism, either the CC or the host shall get access to one particular buffer. A predefined number of buffers shall be configurable during CC_SoftReset only while the others shall be reconfigurable during runtime.

Transmit Buffers

A portion of message buffers shall be configurable as transmit buffers.

There shall be one explicit transmit buffer, which is dedicated to be configured to hold the transmitted Sync frame of a node, if it transmits one, and which can be reconfigured only in CC_SoftReset. This shall ensure that for Sync Frames, the Sync Frame ID, Sync Bit, Payload Length and the corresponding header CRC can be changed only during CC_SoftReset, and that any node transmits at most one Sync frame per communication cycle. The CC shall provide mechanisms that do not allow the transmission of sync frames from other buffers.

For transmit frames in the dynamic segment reconfigurable buffers can be used. The frame ID, the header CRC, and the corresponding Payload Length shall be reconfigurable during runtime.

The CC shall not have the capability to calculate the transmit header CRC. The host is supposed to provide the frame IDs and header CRC's for all transmitted frames.

The CC shall not permit any write access by the host to the Null Frame Indication Bit.

The length field in all messages (static and dynamic) reflects the frame payload data length as defined in the frame format. The CC may use mailbox transmit buffer structures shorter than the actual configured data frame length in the static segment. In this case, the CC shall generate padding bytes—if enabled—to ensure that frames have proper physical length. However, this capability must be enabled via configuration (See above). The padding pattern shall be logical zero. The padding function shall apply only to frames to be transmitted in the static part. In the dynamic part no frame shall be transmitted if the data field in the buffer is shorter than the configured data length.

An indicator shall be provided for each transmit message buffer to indicate if the message was transmitted by the CC, respectively updated by the host. The host shall explicitly set this “Commit” flag when the buffer is ready for transmission. In the “Single-shot Mode” the CC shall reset the flag after transmission has been completed and the host may access the buffer for writing next message into the buffer. This hand-shaking flag shall be reset on the CC's transition from the CC_HWReset state (See Section ‘CC_HWReset State’).

The CC shall not transmit frame data from a buffer that the host is updating. The CC shall not transmit the message data out of the buffer before the host has indicated that the update is completed by setting the “Commit” flag.

Null Frame Transmission

The CHI shall provide for each transmit buffer a flag to allow the host to configure the transmission mode for the buffer. If this bit is set, the transmitter shall operate in the static segment in the so-called “Single-shot Mode”. If this bit is cleared, the transmitter shall operate in the static segment in the so-called “Continuous Mode”.

If a buffer is configured in the “Single-shot Mode”, the configured frame will be sent out by the transmitter only once after the host has set the “Commit” flag. As defined above, the CC resets the flag after transmission. If the host does not set the “Commit” flag before transmit time and there is no other transmit buffer with matching frame ID and cycle counter filter, the CC shall transmit a Null Frame with the Null Frame bit (fNullFrameIndicationBit) set and the payload data set to ‘0’.

If a buffer is configured in the “Continuous Mode”, the CC shall not reset the “Commit” flag after transmission. If the “Commit” flag is set, the frame shall be sent out any time the frame ID and cycle counter filter match. If the host clears the “Commit” flag and there is no other transmit buffer with matching frame ID and cycle counter filter, the CC shall transmit a Null Frame with the Null Frame bit (fNullFrameIndicationBit) set and the payload data cleared.

If a static slot is assigned to the CC, it shall transmit a Null Frame with the Null Frame Indication Bit (fNullFrameIndicationBit) set, and the rest of the frame header and the frame length unchanged (See Section ‘Null Frame Indication Bit’) in any of the following cases:

-   -   There are matching frame IDs and cycle counters, but none of         these transmit buffers has the “Commit” flag set.     -   All transmit buffers configured for the slot have cycle filters         that do not match the current cycle (see below).

Null Frames shall not be transmitted in the dynamic segment.

Receive Buffers

A portion of the CC's message buffers shall be configurable as dedicated receive buffers.

The CC shall transfer only valid received messages from the serial receive message buffer to the dedicated receive buffer with the matching filter configuration (See below).

A receive message buffer shall contain space for all frame elements as defined in Chapter ‘Frame Formats’, except the frame CRC.

The payload length information presented to the host shall reflect the length indicated by the received payload length code, not any other value.

If no frame, null frame, or corrupted frame is received in a slot, the buffer contents prior to the reception shall not be deleted or overwritten. The discrepancy to the configured frame should be signaled to the host using a suitable bit in the corresponding buffer status register.

An indicator shall be provided for each dedicated receive message buffer to indicate if it contains new data (updated by the CC since last read). The host is responsible for clearing this flag after the read operation.

The CC shall not store frame data into a dedicated receive buffer that the host is reading.

The host shall not have write access to the dedicated receive buffers during normal operation. The host shall have write access to the dedicated receive buffers only while configuring the buffer in CC_SoftReset with the needed parameters for the dedicated receive process.

Null Frame Reception

The payload of a received Null Frame shall not be copied into the matching mailbox receive buffer. The reception of the Null Frame shall be signaled to the host by setting an appropriate bit in the receive buffer status register. (See below)

FIFO Receive Buffers

A portion of the CC's message buffers can be configured as FIFO receive buffers.

The CC shall transfer only valid received messages from the serial receive message buffer to the FIFO receive buffer if there is no matching dedicated receive buffer and the header is not rejected by the FIFO Rejection filter (See below).

A FIFO receive message buffer shall contain all frame elements as defined in Chapter “Frame Formats”, except the frame CRC.

An indicator shall be provided to indicate that a message was stored in a FIFO receive buffer by the CC. The indicator shall provide the information ‘FIFO not empty’. The CC shall reset the flag after all messages have been accessed by the host.

The CC shall not store frame data into a FIFO receive buffer that the host is reading. The data shall be stored into the next free FIFO buffer.

Frame Status and Error Information (FSEI)

There shall be dedicated frame status and error information associated with each message buffer. The Frame Status and Error Information contains 8 bits which are summarized in the following Table 54:

TABLE 54 Frame Status and Error Vector FIFO Status/Error Flag Bits Tx Buffer Rx Buffer Buffer Null Frame (static 1 Null Frame Null Frame received Null Frame segment only) transmitted received Empty Slot (static 1 — No bus traffic detected — segment only) Bit Coding/CRC Error 1 — Error detected (bit coding, header — or frame CRC, in static segment only) Length Mismatch 1 — Length Mismatch detected (static — segment only) Slot Mismatch 1 — Slot Mismatch detected — Cycle Counter 1 — Cycle Counter Mismatch detected — Mismatch (static segment) Transmission Conflict 1 Start of Start of Transmission during — transmission ongoing Reception during ongoing reception Empty Slot on second 1 — No bus traffic detected on the — channel other channel (static segment only) Receive Error on 1 — Receive Error detected on the — second channel other channel (static segment only)

The vector content shall be updated at the end of the corresponding slot (defined by the configured Frame ID, See Section ‘Frame Status and Error Information (FSEI)’) by the communication controller and can be checked by the host. The flags shall be set if one of the listed errors is detected by the communication controller during the frame acceptance checks. (See Chapter “Frame Processing”) The vector content shall always show the status of the latest slot, which means that errors from previous cycles shall be overwritten.

The first seven flags refer specifically to the configured channel, on that the frame shall be received (see below), while the other two refer to the other channel.

In searching for Frame ID matches, searching shall commence with the first receive buffer. It shall proceed incrementally through the remaining receive buffers. If more than one receive buffer holds the same Frame ID and cycle counter filter, the error vector shall be updated in the first matching buffer.

Filtering and Masking

Definitions

Frame Filtering

Frame filtering shall be done by checking specific fields in a frame against corresponding configuration constants in the buffer, with the stipulation that the received frame shall only be processed further if the required matches occur. Otherwise, it shall be discarded. Frames shall be filtered on the following frame fields:

-   -   Channel Number     -   Frame Id     -   Cycle Counter     -   Message Id         Frame Filter Mask

The CC shall provide a mechanism to mask the frame filters. The filtering parameters masked by the host shall be disregarded (set to “don't care”).

Filtering Mechanisms

The filtering mechanisms described below shall be applied differently for receive and transmit message buffers

-   -   Receive buffer: In order to store a message the filters for         channel Id, and cycle counter must match. In addition, depending         on the configuration bit gMsgIdFilter (see Section 0) either the         Frame Id (gMsgIdFilter=‘0’) or the Message Id (gMsgIdFilter=‘1’)         must match (but not both).     -   Transmit buffer: A frame shall be transmitted in the time slot         corresponding to the frame ID on the configured channel(s) if         the cycle counter matches the configured cycle filter value.         Channel Filtering

There shall be a Channel Filtering field (2 bits) associated with each buffer. It serves as a filter for a receive message buffer, and as a control field for a transmit message buffer.

Depending on the buffer configuration (see Table 55)

-   -   Receive buffer: received frames shall be stored if they are         received on all the specified in the Channel Filtering Field.         Other filtering criteria must also be met.     -   Transmit buffer: the content of the buffer is transmitted only         on the channels specified in the Channel Filtering Field when         the Cycle Counter Filtering and Frame Id Filtering criteria are         also met.

TABLE 55 Channel Filtering Configuration Config. Config. Tx Buffer Rx Buffer bit A bit B Transmit frame Store valid Rx frame 1 1 on both channels received on channel A or B (pick first valid) 1 0 on channel A received on channel A 0 1 on channel B received on channel B 0 0 no transmission ignore frame Frame ID Filtering

Every Transmit and dedicated Receive message buffer shall contain a frame ID. This frame ID shall be used differently for receive and transmit message buffers.

-   -   Receive message buffers: A received message is stored in the         first receive message buffer where the received frame ID matches         the receive mailbox frame ID, provided gMsgIdFilter=‘0’ and the         other receive filtering criteria are also met. If Message Id         filtering is being used (gMsgIdFilter=‘1’), this filter is not         applied.     -   For Transmit buffers the frame ID in the buffer is used to         determine the appropriate slot for the message transmission. The         frame shall be transmitted in the time slot corresponding to the         frame ID, provided the channel and cycle counter criteria are         also met.         Cycle Counter Filtering

Cycle Counter Filtering is based on the notion of a Cycle Set. For filtering purposes, a match shall be detected if any one of the elements of the set is matched.

-   -   Cycle Set—A 9 bit register is used to specify which cycle         numbers are elements of the set. It consists of two fields, the         Base Cycle [b] and the Cycle Repetition [c]. The set of cycle         numbers belonging to the set shall be determined from these two         fields using the formula         b+n*2^c(n=0,1,2, . . . ):         -   Base Cycle [b]—A 6 bit cycle number used to identify the             initial value for generating the cycle set         -   Cycle Repetition [c]—A 3 bit value used to determine a             constant repetition factor to be added to the base cycle             (c=0 . . . 6).

The operation of the filtering mechanism depends on the configuration of the buffer:

-   -   Receive buffer: The received message is stored only if the         received cycle counter matches an element of the buffer's Cycle         Set. Channel, Frame Id or Message Id criteria must also be met.     -   Transmit buffer: The content of the buffer is transmitted when         an element of the Cycle Set matches the current cycle counter         and the frame ID matches the slot counter value. If the cycle         counter does not match any cycle counter filter criteria from         the configured transmit buffers with matching frame ID, a Null         Frame shall be transmitted in the static segment. (See below).         Message ID Filtering

Message ID filtering applies only for receive message buffers and shall be used by the CC if the message Id filtering is configured (gMsgIdFilter=‘1’) (see above). For message ID filtering the first two data bytes out of the receive buffer shall be used. The received frame shall be stored in the configured receive buffer if the message ID, channel and cycle counter match. The frame ID shall be stored in the buffer, but ignored for filtering.

There shall be no message ID filtering used for frame transmission.

FIFO Filtering

For FIFO filtering there shall be one Rejection Filter and one Rejection Filter Mask available. Each register consists of 39 bits for channel (2 bits), frame ID (12 bits), cycle counter (9 bits), and message ID (16 bits). The two registers shall be reconfigurable only in CC_SoftReset.

A received frame shall be stored in the next free FIFO buffer if the channel, frame ID, cycle counter, and message ID are not rejected by the configured reject and mask reject filter and if there is no matching dedicated receive buffer available.

General Interrupts

Interrupts shall be triggered almost immediately when an error is detected by the controller, a frame is received or transmitted, or a configured timer interrupt is activated. This enables the host to react very quickly on specific error conditions, timers and events. The CC shall support disable/enable controls for each individual interrupt, separately and as a whole.

Tracking status and generating interrupts when a status change occurs shall be two independent tasks. Regardless of whether an interrupt is enabled, or not, the corresponding status should be tracked and indicated by the CC.

At least one hardware interrupt line shall be available to signal an interrupt to the host.

General Interrupt Register

The communication controller shall provide a General Interrupt and Error Indication Register.

TABLE 56 General Interrupt Register General Interrupt Flag Bits Receiver Channel Bit Coding/CRC Error 1 Error detected (bit coding, A header or frame CRC) Slot Mismatch 1 Slot Mismatch detected A Cycle Counter 1 Cycle Counter Mismatch A Mismatch detected Length Mismatch 1 Length Mismatch detected A Unaccepted Symbol 1 Unexpected symbol reception A Symbol Normal 1 Symbol Normal received A Symbol Alarm 1 Symbol Alarm received A Bit Coding/CRC Error 1 Error detected (bit coding, B header or frame CRC) Slot Mismatch 1 Slot Mismatch detected B Cycle Counter 1 Cycle Counter Mismatch B Mismatch detected Length Mismatch 1 Length Mismatch detected B Unaccepted Symbol 1 Unexpected symbol reception B Symbol Normal 1 Symbol Normal received B Symbol Alarm 1 Symbol Alarm received B

The flags shall be set when the communication controller detects one of the listed errors or events. (See Sections ‘Channel Status and Error Information (CSEI)’ and ‘Frame Reception’) If the host checks the vector, it must reset the values so that the CC can update them.

The communication controller shall provide a General Error Interrupt, which shall be triggered when any of the flags is set, provided the corresponding interrupt is enabled.

General Interrupt Enable Register

The CC shall provide for each general interrupt indication flag a General Interrupt Enable flag. The settings in the General Interrupt Enable Register determine which status changes in the General Interrupt Register shall result in an interrupt.

Receive Interrupt Status Register

The communication controller shall provide a Receive Interrupt Status Register to indicate the reception of a valid frame (stored in one of the receive buffers), a Collision Avoidance Symbol (CAS), a Wake-up Symbol, a Media Access Test Symbol (MTS), an Event Indication Symbol (EIS), a Status Normal Symbol (SNS), a Status Alarm Symbol (SAS) or an optical diagnosis signal (when using an optical physical layer). The flags shall be set by the CC when a corresponding event occurs. If enabled, an interrupt is pending while one of the bits is set. If the host checks the vector, it must reset the values so that the CC can update them.

Following read-only bits shall be readable by host:

-   -   Receive Interrupt Flag     -   The flag shall be set by the CC when a frame was received and         stored in one of the dedicated receive buffers.     -   Receive FIFO Not Empty Interrupt Flag     -   The flag shall be set by the CC when a frame was received and         stored in one of the FIFO buffers.     -   Receive FIFO Overrun Interrupt Flag     -   The flag shall be set by the CC when a Receive FIFO Overrun was         detected.     -   Collision Avoidance Symbol Interrupt Flag     -   The flag shall be set by the CC when a CAS was received.     -   Wake-up Symbol Interrupt Flag     -   The flag shall be set by the CC when a Wake-up Symbol was         received.     -   Media Access Test Symbol Flag     -   The flag shall be set by the CC when a MTS was received.     -   Event Indication Symbol Flag     -   The flag shall be set by the CC when an EIS was received.     -   Optical Diagnosis Flag     -   The flag shall be set by the CC when an optical diagnosis signal         was received.     -   Status Normal Symbol Flag     -   The flag shall be set by the CC when a SNS was received.     -   Status Alarm Symbol Flag     -   The flag shall be set by the CC when a SAS was received.     -   Network Management Vector Change Flag     -   The flag shall be set by the CC when the optional NM services         are implemented, and a change in the NM vector occurred. (See         below)         Receive Interrupt Enable Register

The communication controller shall provide a Receive Interrupt Enable Register to enable each of the Receive Interrupt Status Register flags separately. The settings in the Receive Interrupt Enable Register determine which status changes in the Receive Interrupt Status Register shall result in an interrupt.

General Error and Status Interrupt Enable Register

The CC shall provide an interrupt enable flag to individually enable each of the following status and errors:

-   -   Clock Correction Failure; This flag enables an interrupt         whenever one of the following errors occur:         -   Missing Rate Correction Signal (MRCS)         -   Missing Offset Correction Signal (MOCS)         -   Clock Correction Failed Counter (CCFC) stopped at 15         -   Clock Correction Limit Reached (CCLR)         -   The interrupt shall be raised at the end of the cycle after             the listed errors have been checked.     -   Protocol Error State; This flag enables an interrupt whenever         the error state will change from “Green” to “Yellow” or to         “Red”.     -   Startup: This flag enables an interrupt whenever one of the         following events occur:         -   Coldstart max reached         -   Coldstart path has been entered due to the expiration of             pStartupNoise         -   Normal state entered via coldstart path         -   Plausibility check failed (during startup)     -   Bus Guardian Schedule Monitoring Error (BGME)     -   Media Access Test Warning     -   Wakeup; This flag enables an interrupt whenever one of the         following events occur:         -   Frame Header Received during Wakeup         -   Wakeup Symbol Received         -   Wakeup Failed         -   Wakeup Complete

The settings in the General Error and Status Interrupt Enable Register determine which status or error flags changes shall result in an interrupt. (See above)

Requirements for Optional Mechanisms

Network Management Services

If NM services are supported, the CHI shall provide the following:

-   -   four bits to configure the length of the NM vector         (gNetworkManagementVectorLength), (0 to 12 bytes); may be         modified only in CC_SoftReset. The configured length must be         identical in all nodes of a cluster.     -   one bit to configure the starting point of the NM vector in the         data field (byte 0 if bit not set, byte 2 if bit set); may be         modified only in CC_SoftReset. The configured starting point         must be identical in all nodes of a cluster.     -   one register (with in the implementation specified 8 to 12         bytes) to hold the NM vector as a result of a logical OR         operation over all received NM vectors in the previous cycle.         The CC shall perform the OR operation over all NM vectors out of         all received NM frames with the fNMIndicationBit set. (See         Section ‘Network Management Indication Bit’) The CC shall update         the NM vector at the end of the cycle.     -   one interrupt flag to signal a change in the NM vector visible         to the host.     -   one interrupt enable bit.         Optical Diagnosis Flags

If the optical diagnosis service is supported, the CHI shall provide the following:

-   -   Two Optical Diagnosis Flags (one for each channel)     -   The flags shall be set by the CC when too low optical power was         received by the optical transceiver and signaled to the CC. If         the host checks the flags, it must reset them so that the CC can         update them.         Implementation Example         Mailbox Buffer Control Register Fields

The CHI shall provide one Buffer Control Register to configure the message mailbox buffers (as Transmit, Dedicated Receive or FIFO Receive buffer) and to control host's access to the message buffers.

This control register shall provide one byte for each mailbox buffer.

TABLE 57 Mailbox Buffer Control Register Fields Control FIFO Flag Bits Tx Buffer Rx Buffer Buffer Comment CFG 1 ‘1’ = Transmit Buffer ‘0’ = Receive Buffer ‘0’ Message Buffer Configuration Bit CFG_SR 1 ‘1’ = Mailbox Buffer ‘1’ = Buffer and the — ‘0’ = Mailbox and the associated filter associated filter can Buffer and the can be configured only be configured only associated filter during CC_SoftReset. during CC_SoftReset. can be configured during normal operation. Transmission 1 ‘1’ = Single-shot Mode — — only for static Mode (transmit Null Frame if slots buffer not updated, Commit flag = ‘0’) ‘0’ = Continuous Mode (See above) Commit 1 ’0’ = buffer not ’1’ = buffer updated — Commit Flag Flag updated, ‘1’ = buffer (valid), ‘0’ = not committed for updated; Host shall transmission; Host explicitly clear the explicitly sets the flag after reading the Commit flag when the data. buffer is ready for transmit. The Commit flag is reset by the CC after transmission has been completed in the “Single-shot” mode only. (See above). IENA 1 ‘1’ = Interrupt enabled ‘1’ = Interrupt — Commit Interrupt enabled Enable ABTRQ 1 ‘1’ = Abort request; — — Abort Request Message shall be aborted at next start of cycle if transmission has not been started before. ABTAK 1 ‘1’ = Message has — — Abort been aborted. Acknowledge LOCK 1 ‘1’ = lock, ‘0’ = ‘1’ = lock, — Message Buffer release ‘0’ = release Lock. A locked buffer is visible to the host. (Note: The host can modify the control flags CFG and CFG_SR only during CC_SoftReset.) Indication of Bus Events

The communication controller shall provide additional output signals to indicate the following events:

TABLE 58 Bus Event Indication Event Description Status Normal Symbol SET_SNSIF (SNS) detected on bus Status Alarm Symbol (SAS) SET_SASIF detected on bus Correct message was received SET_RCVMSG, even if message which may be copied into a is not copied into any receive buffer buffer (in case no adequate receive buffer is configured) One of following errors detected SET_ERRIF during the receive process: S_TssViolation, S_HeaderCodingError, S_InvalidHeaderCRC, S_FrameCodingError, S_InvalidFrameCRC. (See Section ‘Syntactical Correctness’) Slot mismatch detected SET_SLMM (S_FrameIDError). (See Section ‘Frame Acceptance’)

The exact attribution of events to interrupt vectors or lines shall be described in the documentation of the respective communication controller implementation.

In order to enable error monitoring in a star node the communication controller shall provide four output signals with the setting of internal status flags indicated by means of a pulse.

The FIG. 102 shows which internal events should be indicated externally as SLMM, ERR, ROK and SOC signals.

If an internal event is indicated, the corresponding signal shall be switched to the active state for a defined time, in order to generate a short logical “1” signal with a duration of at least 50 ns.

The SLMM signal confirms the reception of a frame with a correct format and correct CRC, even if the frame identifier deviates from the slot counter value at reception time.

The ERR signal indicates an error as described above.

The ROK signal indicates that a correct frame or a valid symbol has been received even if the message was not copied into a buffer in the communication controller.

The SOC signal confirms that a valid SOC symbol (Normal or Alarm) has been received or sent. It can be used to trigger timers or to start synchronized software tasks with every SOC.

Every communication controller should be able to generate at least the signals ERR, ROK and SOC.

System Parameters

The following parameters are used in the description of the present invention. Any values and ranges of the parameters are given by way of example and imply no restriction what so ever.

Protocol Constants

Name Description Value Unit cControllerMax The maximum number of 64 — nodes in a cluster cCycleMax The maximum cycle counter 63 — in a cluster cMaxChannels The maximum number of 2 — supported channels cPaddingValue Value of the data byte 0 — used for padding of static frames in case pMaxPayloadLength is smaller than fPayloadLength cPayloadLengthMax Maximum length of the 127 2-byte payload segment of a words frame cSlotIDMax The highest slot ID number 4095 — cStarCouplersMax The largest allowed number 3 — of cascaded star couplers between any two nodes in a cluster cSyncNodeMax The maximum possible TBD — number of sync nodes Global Cluster Constants

Name Description Range Unit gChannels The number of channels supported by the 1- — cluster. cMaxChannels Note: there is also a node constant pChannels, which reflects the connectivity of each specific node gColdStartMax The maximum number of times that a node 0-TBD — in this cluster is permitted to attempt to start the cluster by initiating schedule synchronization gdActionPointOffset The offset of the action point 1-TBD MT gdBGArmActive Duration of the Bus Guardian ARM signal low 1 MT condition gdBGDynSegment Bus Guardian dynamic segment length 0-65534 MT gdBGpostEnablePart Bus Guardian ISG part that follows a guarded 0-TBD MT schedule element gdBGpreEnablePart Bus Guardian ISG part that precedes a 0-TBD MT guarded schedule element gdBGStaticSlot Bus Guardian Static slot length (Does not 0 to 4095 MT include the inter-slot gap.) gdBGSymbolWindow Bus Guardian symbol window length 0 to 255 MT gdBGWatchdogDisable Bus Guardian watchdog disable time 1 to 255 MT gdBit The configured duration of one bit. The value TBD ns is derived from gBitRate. gdCycle The duration of one communication cycle in 250-64000 μs this cluster gdCycleMax Maximum duration of a byteflight TBD ?? communication cycle gdCycleMIn Minimum duration of a byteflight TBD ?? communication cycle gdDynamicSlotIdlePhase The duration of the dynamic slot idle phase 1-TBD Minislots gdInitialColdStartPhase Period for which a node remain in 3* gdCycle + MT CC_ColdStartICW state, if no incident causes gdSlot the transition into CC_StartupListen beforehand; this is not a configuration parameter gdMaxDrift Maximum drift offset between two node that TBD MT operate with unsynchronized clocks over one communication cycle gdMedPropagationDelay The medium expected propagation delay of a TBD μT (not a global constant) signal (including transceiver delays, wire delays and controller internal delays) in the cluster gdMinislot The duration of a minislot 2-TBD MT gdMsActionPointOffset The offset of the action point within the 1-TBD MT minislot gdNIT The duration of the network idle time TBD-TBD MT gdStartup Upper limit for the listen-timeout in gdStartup = MT CC_StartupListen state (before a sync node is gdCycle + allowed to become a coldstart node). See gdMaxDrift also vdStartup. gdStaticSlot The duration of a static slot. 2-TBD MT gdSymbolWindow The duration of the symbol window 0-TBD MT gSyncNodeMax The maximum number of sync nodes allowed 0-16 — for this cluster gdWakeup Upper limit for the listen-timeout in gdWakeup = MT CC_WakeupListen state (before a sync-Node is gdStartupt = allowed to transmit the Tx-wakeup pattern); (this gdCycle + is not a configuration parameter) gdMaxDrift gdWakeupMaxCollision Duration of ‘active low’ on the bus that a TBD gdBit communication controller sending a Tx- wakeup pattern accepts during the idle phase of the pattern without re-entering the CC_WakeupListen state. gdWakeupPattern Maximal number of repetitions of the Tx- 15 — wakeup symbol to be sent during the CC_WakeupSend state of any Node in the cluster. gdWakeupSymbolRxIdleMin The equivalent of 6 μs minus a safe part. TBD gdBit (Collisions, clock differences and other effects can deform the Tx-wakeup pattern.) To be used by the communication controller for the ‘idle’ part of the CheckRxWakeupSymbol test gdWakeupSymbolRxLow The equivalent of 6 μs minus a safe part. TBD gdBit (Active stars, clock differences and other effects can deform the Tx-wakeup pattern.) To be used by the communication controller for the ‘active low’ parts of the CheckRxWakeupSymbol test gdWakeupSymbolRxWindow The equivalent of 30 μs plus a safe part. TBD gdBit (Clock differences and other effects can deform the Tx-wakeup pattern.) To be used by the communication controller for the CheckRxWakeupSymbol test gdWakeupSymbolTxIdle The equivalent of 18 μs (rounded up). To be TBD gdBit used by the communication controller for the transmission of the ‘idle’ part of the Tx-wakeup symbol gdWakeupSymbolTxLow The equivalent of 6 μs (rounded up). To be TBD gdBit used by the communication controller for the transmission of the ‘active low’ part of the Tx-wakeup symbol gMacroPerCycle The configured duration of the cluster cycle in TBD MT macroticks gMaxWithoutClockCorrectionFatal Threshold concerning CCFC. Defines when the [gMaxWithout Number CC shall change from green or yellow into red ClockCorrection- of even/ error state Passive-15] odd cycle pairs gMaxWithoutClockCorrectonPassive Threshold concerning CCFC. Defines when the 1-7 Number CC shall change from green into yellow error of even/ state odd cycle pairs gMsgIdFilter Indicates that Message ID filtering is used Boolean — within the cluster and that the first two bytes of the payload segment contain Message ID data gNetworkManagementVectorLength Length of the Network Management vector in 0-12 Bytes a cluster gNumberOfMinislots The duration of the dynamic segment 0-TBD Mini slots gNumberOfStaticSlots The number of static slots in the static 1-cSlotIDMax Slots segment. gOffsetCorrectionInitOut The maximum offset value permitted for the TBD MT first offset correction in CC_IntegrationVCW state. (This constant is the basis for the calculation of the controller specific parameter (see pOffsetCorrectionInitOut)) gOffsetCorrectionOut The maximum offset correction permitted. TBD MT (This constant is the basis for the calculation of the controller specific parameter (see pOffsetCorrectionOut)) gPayloadLengthStatic Globally configured payload length of a static 0- 2-byte frame cPayloadLengthMax words gRateCorrectionOut The maximum rate correction permitted (This TBD MT constant is the basis for the calculation of the controller specific parameter (see pRateCorrectionOut)) gStartupNoise Upper limit for the start up listen timeout in TBD — the presence of noise. Expressed as a multiple of the cluster constant gdStartup. gSyncNodeMax The maximum number of sync nodes allowed 1- — in the cluster cSyncNodeMax gWakeupMax The maximum number of times that a Node TBD — in this cluster is permitted to attempt to send a Tx-wakeup pattern. gWakeupNoise Upper limit for the wakeup listen timeout in the gWakeupNoise = — presence of noise. Expressed as a multiple of the gStartupNoise cluster constant gdWakeup. this is not a configuration parameter! gWakeupPattern Number of repetitions of the Wakeup symbol 2-TBD —

Cluster-Wide Technology-Dependent Constants (The constants listed here define implementation-specific restrictions. The specified values apply for the FlexRay bus guardian from Philips. Worst-case restrictions apply to the whole cluster if bus guardian devices from different semiconductor vendors are mixed in a cluster.)

Name Description Range Unit gdBGMinMTNom Minimum nominal MT 1.0 μs period gdBGMInMTCorr Minimum corrected MT 0.5 μs period gdBGMinBGTPeriod Minimum BGT period 0.25 μs gdBGMinPwMT Minimum MT pulse 0.4 * — width (low or high) pdMTPeriod gdBGMinPwBGT Minimum BGT pulse 0.4 * — width (low or high) pdBGTPeriod Node Constants

Name Description Range Unit pBGDynSegEnable Indicates that a bus guardian enables Boolean — transmission during the dynamic segment pBGMatEnable Indicates that a bus guardian enables the Boolean — application of the media access test during the symbol window pBgsmDynSegDisabled Boolean — pBgsmSymWinDisabled Boolean — pBGSymWinEnable Indicates that a bus guardian enables Boolean — transmission during the symbol window pChannels number of channels supported by the node 1- — (Note: there is also a cluster constant gChannels gChannels) pClusterDriftDamping Cluster drift damping value used in clock TBD μT synchronization to minimize accumulation of rounding errors pdBgeDynamicDuration Duration of the BGE active phase during the 0-65534 MT BG dynamic segment pdBgeStaticDuration Duration of the BGE active phase during active 0-4095 MT static slots pdBgeSymbolDuration Duration of the BGE active phase during the 0-255 MT BG symbol window pdBGMTPeriod Configured nominal Bus Guardian MT period TBD μ pdBGTPeriod Configured Bus Guardian BGT period TBD μ pdCycleWithHistory Upper limit for timeout that covers a period, gdStartup MT which is large enough that any periodic transmission that complies to the global communication schedule is visible for an unsynchronized node at least once (Note: this is not a configuration parameter) pdEISSymbCycleMax Slave node, maximal appearance interval for TBD MT the CC trigger pdEISSymbCycleMin Slave node, minimal appearance interval for TBD MT the CC trigger pDelayCompensationChA Value used to compensate for reception delays μT on channel A pDelayCompensationChB Value used to compensate for reception delays μT on channel B pdExTrigCycleMax For the master node in an Event Triggered TBD MT Mode system, maximal appearance interval for the CC trigger pdExTrigCycleMin Master node, minimal appearance interval for TBD MT the CC trigger pdMasterEIStoEndOfNIT Master node, duration between reference point TBD μT in the EIS symbol and begin of next cycle (which is also the end of NIT) pdSlaveEIStoEndOfNIT Slave node, duration between reference point TBD μT in the EIS symbol and begin of next cycle (which is also the end of NIT) pdTSS Duration of the Transmission Start Sequence 1-15 gdBit pdWakeupPattern Number of repetitions of the Tx-wakeup 0- — symbol to be sent during the CC_WakeupSend gdWakeup state. Pattern pEdgeSamples Width of the edge detection window in the Bit TBD — Clock Alignment procedure pLatestTx The number of the last minislot in which 0-TBD Minislots transmission can start in the dynamic segment for the respective node pMaster Denotes that the node is configured as the Boolean — sync master in byteflight mode pMaxPayloadLength Maximum number of payload data bytes 12-127 2-byte stored in a message buffer words pMicroOverheadPer The node-specific initial value of the node TBD μT CycleNom variable vRateCorrection pMicroPerMacroMax Maximum number of microticks for one TBD μT macrotick pMicroPerMacroMin Minimum number of microticks for one TBD μT macrotick pMicroPerMacroNom The nominal (uncorrected) number of TBD μT microticks in a macrotick pOffsetCorrectionInitOut Parameter determining the upper and lower TBD μT boundaries between the red and green areas of the clock offset correction term, applied only the first time an offset correction term is available in CC_IntegrationVCW state, expressed in node-local microticks. pOffsetCorrectionOut = gOffsetCorrectionInitOut * pMicroPerMacroNom pOffsetCorrectionOut Parameter determining the upper and lower TBD μT boundaries between the red and green areas of the clock offset correction term, expressed in node-local microticks. pOffsetCorrectionOut = gOffsetCorrectionOut * pMicroPerMacroNom pRateCorrectionInitOut Parameter determining the upper and lower TBD μT boundaries for the initial rate correction allowed for rate adoption during CC_InitSync state pRateCorrectionOut Parameter determining the upper and lower TBD μT boundaries between the red and green areas of the clock rate correction term, expressed in node-local microticks. pRateCorrectionOut = gRateCorrectionOut * pMicroPerMacroNom pSamplesPerBit The number of samples taken in the TBD — determination of a bit value pSyncNode Indicates that the node is a sync node (sync Boolean — slot configured; connected to gChannels) pSyncSlot The number of the static slot in which a sync 0- Slots frame shall be sent, if a sync frame shall be cSlotIDMax sent. pVotingOffset Number of samples skipped prior to the voting TBD — window in bit value voting pVotingSamples Numbers of samples used in bit value voting TBD — Node Variables

Name Description Range Unit IbgsmRule Local variable for BG schedule monitoring BGE_X, — service BGE_ENABLED, BGE_DISABLED vBgsmError Variable indicating that the Bus Guardian Boolean — Schedule Monitoring service has detected an error vBgsmErrorAck Variable allowing the host to acknowledge the Boolean — detection of a Bus Guardian Schedule Monitoring error vCCLR The calculated rate correction value or Boolean — calculated offset correction value is beyond the specified limit vColdStartCount Counter for number of cycles/transitions for 0- — which the node has been in the coldstart path gColdStartMax vColdStartInhibit Denotes that the node is not allowed to enter Boolean — coldstart path vCurrentSlot Number of the current slot. Note that this is 1- slots slightly different to fFrameID as it is cMaxStaticSlot independent of frame reception. vCycle Cycle counter of the current communication 0-gCycleMax — cycle vdCycleWithHistory Timeout counter that covers a period, which is 0- MT large enough that any periodic transmission pdCycleWithHistory that complies to the global communication schedule is visible for an unsynchronized node at least once vdInitialColdStartPhase Timer for the period for which a node remain 0- MT in CC_ColdStartICW state, if no incident gdInitialColdStartPhase causes the transition into CC_StartupListen beforehand vdStartup Listen-timeout (counter) in CC_StartupListen 0-gdStartup MT state vdStartupNoise Listen-timeout (counter) with noise in 0- MT CC_StartupListen state pdStartupNoise * gdStartup vdWakeup Listen-timeout (counter) in CC_WakeupListen 0-gdWakeup MT state for fast Wakeup. vdWakeupNoise Listen-timeout (counter) in CC_WakeupListen 0- MT state. gdWakeupNoise * gdWakeup vErrorHandlingLevel Current Error Handling Level [Green, Yellow, — Red] vGloNMVec The network management vector provided by Bit vector of 12 — the CHI service “network management” bytes vInvalidSyncCount[ch] Counters for invalid SYNCFrame_(StartupVCW) 0-31 — decisions; assigned per channel vListenOnly Denotes that the node is not allowed to Boolean — transmit vMacrotick Macrotick counter, number of the current TBD MT macrotick vMeasureChx Measure time; time difference between the TBD expected and the observed arrival time of a frame with respect of run time compensation vMicroPerMacroCorr Actual number of microticks during the current TBD μT (corrected) macrotick. The value of vMicroPerMacroCorr can change from macrotick to macrotick in a cycle. vMicrotick Microtick counter, number of the current TBD μT microtick vMOCS The calculation of an offset correction value TBD Boolean was not possible in the clock synchronization mechanism vMRCS The calculation of a rate correction value was TBD Boolean not possible in the clock synchronization mechanism vNoise Denotes that coldstart path has been entered Boolean — due to the expiration of pdStartupNoise vObservedArrivalTimeCh Time when a frame arrived TBD TBD vOffsetCorrection Signed integer indicating the number of TBD μT microticks the node should shift the start of its communication cycle. VoffsetCorrectionExternal External correction term for the offset TBD μT correction vOffsetOut Denotes that the application of the extended Boolean — limit setting for the offset correction term check is prohibited vRateCorrection Rate correction value; number of microticks TBD μT which should the added or subtracted from a communication cycle vRateCorrectionExternal External correction term for the rate correction TBD μT vRefSync The identifier of the sync frame which was 0-4095 — originally used to enter the integration path vRxSymbol Denotes which symbol was received during the [no_symbol, — symbol window SNS, SAS, MTS] vSlotCounter[ch] Slot counter for channel ch 0-cSlotIDMax Slots vsMeasureEvenList List of the time difference values (observed TBD μT time minus expected time) measured for sync frames received during an even cycle. (Note: If valid sync frames are received on both channels the list entry corresponds to the difference value associated with the earlier sync frame (after taking delay compensation into account) vsMeasureOddList List of the time difference values (observed TBD μT time minus expected time) measured for sync frames received during an odd cycle. vSMMS Indicates that the CC has received a set of TBD Boolean sync frames during protocol startup phase that did not result in a majority of the sync frames agreeing with the local view of the system time vSyncPairs The number of corresponding sync pairs 0- — gathered during the rate measurement phase gSyncNodeMax and available for calculation of the rate correction term vTxSymbol Denotes which symbol is to be transmitted [no_symbol, — during the symbol window SNS, SAS, MTS] vValidSyncCount[ch] Counters for valid SYNCFrame_(StartupVCW) 0- — decisions; assigned per channel gSyncNodeMax vValidSyncFrameCount Counter for valid SYNCFrame_(StartupPCW) decisions 0- — per slot during gdPlausibilityCheckWindow cSyncNodeMax vWakeup Status flag indicating the abort of wakeup due TBD — SymbolReceived to a received Rx-wakeup symbol. vWakeupChannel Variable that defines which channel shall be TBD — woken. It captures the value of the ‘Wake Up Channel Select’ control bit. vWakeupComplete Status flag indicating the transmission of a Tx- TBD — wakeup pattern. vWakeupCount Counter for number of attempts to transmit Tx- 0- — wakeup patterns. gWakeupMax vWakeupFailed Status flag indicating the abort of wakeup due TBD — to gWakeupMax aborted attempts to send a Tx- wakeup pattern. vWakeupFrame Status flag indicating the abort of the wakeup TBD — HeaderReceived due to a frame header. Frame Variables

Name Length Description fCycleCount 6 Cycle count fData 0 . . . 2032 Data fData[x] 8 Byte x of the data from fFrameData fFrameCRC 24 Frame CRC fFrameID 12 Frame ID fHeaderCRC 11 Header CRC fLocNMVec 96 Network management vector extracted from the frame's payload section if fNMIndicationBit is set to one fMessageID 16 Message ID fNMIndicationBit 1 Network management indication bit fNullFrameIndicationBit 1 Null frame indication bit fPayloadLength 7 Payload length fReservedBit 1 Reserved bit fSyncBit 1 Sync bit Event Indications

Name Description Range Unit S_CASReception Indicates the reception of a valid CAS symbol on one Event — of the configured channels S_ChannelIdleCodingError Event — S_CorrectFrame Indicates the reception of a syntactically correct Event — frame that successfully passed all frame reception criteria S_CycleCounterError Event — S_CycleCountError Indicates the violation of the corresponding static Event — segment acceptance criterion S_CycleCountError Event — S_EmptySlot Event — S_FrameCodingError Event — S_FrameIDError Indicates the violation of the corresponding static Event — segment acceptance criterion S_FrameIDError Event — S_HeaderCodingError Event — S_IllegalNullFrame Event — S_IllegalSyncBit Event — S_InvalidDTSError Event — S_InvalidFrameCRCError Event — S_InvalidFrameLengthError Event — S_InvalidHeaderCRCError Event — S_PayloadLengthError Event — S_PayloadLengthStaticError Denotes the violation of the corresponding static Event — segment acceptance criterion S_SuccessfulHeaderReception Denotes the reception of a frame header on one of Event — the configured channels S_TransmissionConflictError Event — S_Trig_Symb_Failure Event indication symbol Failure Event — S_TSSError Event — S_ValidEvenStartupFrame Denotes the reception of a sync frame with an even Event — fCycleCount that passed the startup acceptance criteria S_ValidFrame Event — S_ValidOddStartupFrame Denotes the reception of a sync frame with an odd Event — fCycleCount that passed the startup acceptance criteria S_ValidStartupFrame Denotes the reception of a sync frame that passed Event — the startup acceptance criteria Glossary

In the following glossary some of the terms used for the description of the present invention are defined.

μT Microtick Application Data Data produced and/or used by application tasks. In the automotive context the term ‘signal’ is often used for application data exchanged among tasks. BCA Bit Clock Alignment BD Bus Driver BDe Electrical Bus Driver BDo Optical Bus Driver BF byteflight (protocol mode) BG Bus Guardian BGME Bus Guardian Schedule Monitor Error (error signal) BGSM Bus Guardian Schedule Monitor BSD Bit Stream Decoding BSS Byte Start Sequence Bus A communication channel in bus topology. Sometimes the word “bus” is used as synonym for communication channel. byteflight Communication network developed by BMW AG, Motorola, ELMOS, Infineon, Siemens EC, Steinbeis Transferzentrum für Prozessautomatisierung, and IXXAT. CAS Collision Avoidance Symbol CC Communication Controller - The device that implements the FlexRay protocol CCFC Clock Correction Failed Counter CCLR Clock Correction Limit Reached (error signal) CCMS Coldstart Count Maximum Signal (error signal) Channel Idle The condition of medium idle as perceived by each individual node in the network. CHI Controller Host Interface Cluster A communication system of two or more nodes connected via at least one communication channel directly (bus topology) or by star couplers (star topology). Communication The inter-node connection through which signals are conveyed for the Channel purpose of communication. The communication channel abstracts both the network topology, i.e. bus or star, as well as the physical transmission medium, i.e. electrical or optical. CRC Cyclic Redundancy Code CSEI Channel Status and Error Information Cycle Time Time for one communication cycle. DTS Dynamic Trailing Sequence Dynamic Segment Portion of the communication cycle where the media access is controlled via a mini-slotting scheme, also known as Flexible Time Division Media Access (FTDMA). During this segment access to the media is dynamically granted on a priority basis to nodes with data to transmit. Dynamic Slot Variable duration unit used to control media access in the dynamic segment of a communication cycle. A dynamic slot is comprised of one or more minislots, as determined by the minislot FTDMA/ minislot media access scheme. The duration of a dynamic slot can vary from slot to slot in a given cycle, and from cycle to cycle for a given slot. Only one node may transmit in any given dynamic slot/ channel combination. EIS Event Indication Symbol ET Event Triggered (protocol mode) FES Frame End Sequence FIFO First In, First Out (data buffer structure) Frame A structure used by the communication system to exchange information within the system. A frame consists of a header segment, a payload segment and a trailer segment. The payload segment is used to convey application data. FSEI Frame Status and Error Information FTDMA Flexible Time Division Multiple Access (media access method). This is another name for the minislot based media access method. Hamming Distance The minimum distance (i.e., the number of bits which differ) between any two codewords in a binary code ICW Initial Check Window Macrotick Unit of time derived from the cluster-wide clock synchronization algorithm. A macrotick consists of an integral number of microticks - the actual number of microticks in a given macrotick is adjusted by the clock synchronization algorithm. The macrotick represents the smallest granularity unit of the global time. Medium Idle The condition of the physical transmission medium when no node is actively transmitting on the physical transmission medium Microtick Unit of time derived directly from the CC's oscillator. The microtick is not affected by the clock synchronization mechanisms, and is thus a node-local concept. Different nodes can have microticks of different durations. Minislot Fixed duration unit of time that is used to control the minislot/ FTDMA media access scheme in the dynamic segment. A minislot consists of a configurable number of macroticks. All minislots in a cycle have the same duration (expressed in macroticks), and this duration is constant from cycle to cycle. MOCS Missing Offset Correction Signal (error signal) MRCS Missing Rate Correction Signal (error signal) MT Macrotick MTS Media Access Test Symbol Network Topology The arrangement of the connections between the nodes. FlexRay supports both a bus network topology and a multiple star network topology. NIT Network Idle Time NM Network Management Node A device connected to the network that is capable of sending and/or receiving frames. NRZ Non-Return to Zero (method of encoding) Physical An inter-node connection through which signals are conveyed for the Communication purpose of communication. All nodes connected to a given Physical Link Communication Link share the same electrical or optical signals (i.e., they are not connected through repeaters, stars, gateways, etc.). Examples of a Communication Physical Link include a bus network, or a point-to-point connection between a node and a star. A Communication Channel may be constructed by combining one or more Physical Communications Links together using stars. SAS Status Alarm Symbol Slot Either a Static Slot or Dynamic Slot, depending on context. SMMS Startup Majority Missed Signal (error signal) SNS Status Normal Symbol Star A device that allows information to be transferred from one physical communication link to one or more other physical communication links. A star duplicates information present on one of its links to the other links connected to the star, allowing clusters to be built from nodes supporting only point-to-point connections. A star can be either passive or active. Static Segment Portion of the communication cycle where the media access is controlled via a static Time Division Media Access (TDMA) scheme. During this segment access to the media is determined solely by the passage of time. Static Slot Fixed duration unit of time that is used to control media access in the static segment of a communication cycle. All static slots in a cycle have the same duration (expressed in macroticks), and this duration is constant from cycle to cycle. Only one node may transmit in any given a static slot/channel combination. Sync Frame FlexRay frame whose header segment contains information that indicates that the deviation measured between the frame's arrival time and its expected arrival time should be used by the clock synchronization algorithm. TBD To Be Determined TDMA Time Division Multiple Access (media access method) TSS Transmission Start Sequence TT-D Time Triggered Distributed Synchronization (protocol mode) TT-M Time Triggered Master Controlled Synchronization (protocol mode) VCW Validation Check Window WUS Wakeup Symbol 

1. A method for bit stream decoding of a received bit stream, the method comprising the steps of: a) defining a detection window of sample values which are used to determine a value of a bit cell in a bit stream; b) applying a majority voting to said sample values within said detection window; c) generating a value of said bit cell in dependence on the results of step b); and d) decoding the bit stream using the bit cell values generated in step c), wherein said detection window is positioned at an expected edge between two bit cells of the bit stream to overlap at least one sample of a first bit cell and at least one sample of a subsequent bit cell, having respective sample values, in order to perform bit edge detection.
 2. The method of claim 1, wherein said detection window comprises an odd number of samples.
 3. The method of claim 1, wherein said detection window is centered on an expected center of a bit cell of the bit stream to only overlap samples of said bit cell for detecting a bit value of said bit cell.
 4. The method of claim 3, wherein glitches or spikes in the bit stream are filtering out.
 5. The method of claim 1, including: sampling said bit cell in the received bit stream, to generate at least two sample values of said bit cell.
 6. A method for bit stream decoding of a received bit stream, the method for comprising the steps of: a) defining a detection window of sample values which are used to determine a value of a bit cell in a bit stream; b) applying a majority voting to said sample values within said detection window; c) generating a value of said sampled bit cell in dependence on the results of step b); and d) decoding the bit stream using the bit values generated in step c), wherein said detection window is positioned on an expected center of said bit cell of the bit stream in dependence on a predetermined offset-parameter and in dependence on a predetermined parameter specifying a number of samples in said detection window to only overlap samples of said bit cell for detecting a bit value of said bit cell.
 7. The method of claim 6, wherein said detection window comprises an odd number of samples.
 8. The method of claim 6, wherein said detection window is centered on an expected center of a bit cell of the bit stream to only overlap samples of said bit cell for detecting a bit value of said bit cell.
 9. The method of claim 7, wherein glitches or spikes in the bit stream are filtering out.
 10. A device for decoding a received bit stream, the device comprising: means for defining a detection window of sample values which are used to determine a value of a bit cell in a bit stream; means for applying majority voting to said sample values within said detection window; means for generating a value of said sampled bit cell in dependence on results of said voting; and means for decoding the bit steam using the generated bit cell values, wherein said detection window is positioned at an expected edge between two bit cells of the bit stream according to a predetermined offset-parameter and according to a predetermined parameter specifying a number of samples in said detection window to only overlap samples of said bit cell for detecting a bit value of said bit cell.
 11. A device for decoding a received bit stream, the device comprising: means for defining a detection window of sample values which are used to determine a value of a bit cell in a bit stream; means for applying majority voting to said sample values within said detection window; means for generating a value of said sampled bit cell in dependence on results of said voting; and means for decoding the bit steam using the generated bit cell values, wherein said detection window is positioned at an expected edge between two bit cells of the bit stream to overlap at least one sample of a first bit cell and at least one sample of a subsequent bit cell, having respective sample values, in order to perform bit edge detection.
 12. The device of claim 11, wherein said detection window comprises an odd number of samples.
 13. The device of claim 11, wherein said detection window is centered on an expected edge between two bit cells of the bit stream to only overlap samples of said bit cell for detecting a bit value of said bit cell.
 14. The device of claim 13, wherein glitches or spikes in the bit stream are filtering out.
 15. A node in a communication system, the node comprising the device of claim
 11. 16. The device of claim 11, including a sampling unit for sampling said bit cell in the received bit stream to generate at least two sample values of said bit cell.
 17. The device of claim 10, wherein said detection window is positioned at an expected edge between two bit cells of the bit stream to only overlap samples of said bit cell for detecting a bit value of said bit cell.
 18. The device of claim 17, wherein said detection window comprises an odd number of samples.
 19. The method of claim 6, including: sampling said bit cell in the received bit stream, to generate at least two sample values of said bit cell.
 20. The device of claim 10, wherein glitches or spikes in the bit stream are filtering out.
 21. The device of claim 17, including a sampling unit for sampling said bit cell in the received bit stream to generate at least two sample values of said bit cell.
 22. A node in a communication system, including a device as claimed in claim
 17. 23. A computer readable medium having instructions executable by at least one of a computer and a microprocessor stored thereon for performing the steps of: a) defining a detection window of sample values which are used to determine a value of a bit cell in a bit stream; b) applying a majority voting to said sample values within said detection window; c) generating a value of said bit cell in dependence on the results of step b); and d) decoding the bit stream using the bit cell values generated in step c), wherein said detection window is positioned at an expected edge between two bit cells of the bit stream to overlap at least one sample of a first bit cell and at least one sample of a subsequent bit cell, having respective sample values, in order to perform bit edge detection. 